16442761 Centurion 7 CNC Programming Manual 10208.Ru.en

NC CENTURION 7

Instruction manual

Version 3.5

November 2005.

1400 Mill LaneWaconia,MN 55,387

952 - 442-1410952-442-1401 Technical Support952-442-1418 Parts Department

http://www.milltronics.net/

ii

http://www.milltronics.net/

Milltronics Manufacturing, 2000. All rights reserved

INTRODUCTION

This guide describes the principles of this device Centurion 5, 6 and 7. From an operator perspective, there is no visible difference. The functionality of the same in all of these machines. Equipment Centurion 7 offers increased performance, more memory and expedited processing of data. When referring to Centurion 7 in this guide is also meant Centurion 5 and 6. Centurion 7 in the base configuration with five controlled axes: X, Y, Z, A and B. This guide assumes that the tool moves relative to the workpiece.

Part of this guide devoted to programming, is divided into two sections: the text dialog programming and programming. The section of the dialog programming is designed to, first, to explain the different menus, screen messages, and the general sequence of operations. Detailed explanations of each function are described in the section on codes of M & G, background information should be viewed in this section.

Milltronics Manufacturing, 2000. All rights reserved

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................iiiDETERMINATION OF AXES......................................................................................................AINTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................................3SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE...........................................................................7

Block............................................................................................................................................7Program........................................................................................................................................8The main program, program, and standard routines....................................................................8Ranges format commands............................................................................................................9Format commands for the axes: M and G codes.......................................................................10

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION.............................................................................11The front panel of Centurion 7..................................................................................................12F1 (Home) Home Screen - The starting position.......................................................................15F10 (Here) Starting position - current position..........................................................................16F2 (JOG) Main screen - pulsatory movement...........................................................................16F3 (HDW) Main screen - Flywheel...........................................................................................17F4 (Run) Main screen - Implementation...................................................................................22F9 (Halt / Resum) Main screen - Implementation - Stop / Resume..........................................25F2 (Old) Main-Run-Old (Main screen - Implementation - Existing Program).........................25F3 (Block) Main-Run-Block (main screen - Implementation - Block).....................................25F4 (OStop) Main-Run-OStop (Main screen - Implementation - Additional Stop)...................26F5 (BSkip) Main-Run-BSkip (Main screen - Implementation - Pass Block)............................26F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ (Main screen - Implementation - mapping)..................................26F1 (Dist) Main-Run-Displ-Dist (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Distance)...........27F2 (Error) Main-Run-Displ-Error (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Bug)..............27F3 (Graph) Main-Run-Displ-Graph (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Graphical display)......................................................................................................................................28F1 (Rot) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Rot (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Turn)...........................................................................................................................30F2 (Pan) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Pan).............................................................................................................................31F3 (Wind) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind (The main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Create window).............................................................................................32F4 (Auto) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Auto (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Auto-scaling)..............................................................................................................33F5 (Zoom-) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom-(Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - zoom out)....................................................................................................................33F6 (Zoom +) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom + (main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - zoom)............................................................................................................33F7 (Limit) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Limit (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Borders)......................................................................................................................33F8 (Zone) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zone (Main screen - Implementation-Display - Graphic display - security zone)..............................................................................................................33F9 (Coord) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Coord (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - coordinate)..................................................................................................................34F10 (Fresh) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Fresh (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Update)........................................................................................................................34

iv

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Help (Clear) (Help (Clear)) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Clear (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Clear).............................................................................................34F4 (Diag) Main-Run-Displ-Diag (main screen - Implementation - mapping - Diagnostics)....34F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Vnutriplatny switch)........................................................................................................................................35F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Exit to the shell)...................................................................................................................................................36F7 (Menu) Main-Run-Menu (main screen - Implementation - Menu)......................................36F8 (Dry) Main-Run-Dry (Main screen - Implementation - Idle)...............................................37F10 (HDW) Main-Run-HDW (Main screen - Implementation - Flywheel).............................37Help (TlSet) Main-Run-TlSet (Main screen - Implementation - Configuration tool)...............38F5 (MDI) Main-MDI (Main Screen - Manual data entry).........................................................39F1 (Gcode) Main-MDI-Gcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - G-codes)..........................40F2 (Mcode) Main-MDI-Mcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - M-codes)........................42F6 (Displ) Main-Displ (Main Screen - Display)........................................................................42F7 (Parms) Main-Parms (Main screen - Options).....................................................................43F1 (Setup) Main-Parms-Setup (main screen - Options - Settings)............................................44F2 (Prec) Main-Parms-Setup-Prec (Main screen - Options - Settings - Accuracy)..................46F3 (Power) Main-Parms-Setup-Power (Main screen - Options - Settings - Power).................47Tool Changer Information (information about the structure of the tool change)......................52F4 (Axis) Main-Parms-Setup-Axis (main screen - Options - Preferences - Axis)....................54F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc (Main screen - Options - Settings - Other).......................62Basic Machine Info (Basic information about the machine).....................................................63Software Options (Options software)........................................................................................69CAD Parameters (Parameters CAD).........................................................................................72Post M codes Table (Table future M-code)...............................................................................72European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions (descriptions of the parameters and the functioning of European codes).................................................................................................73F4 (FdOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-FdOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the feed rate)........................................................................................................76Exit = Exit..................................................................................................................................77F5 (HwOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the flywheel).....................................................................................................77Exit = Exit..................................................................................................................................78F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the spindle)..........................................................................................................79Exit = Exit..................................................................................................................................80F7 (BSC) Main-Parms-Setup-BSC (Home Screen - Options - Settings - Correction to the ball-screw pair).................................................................................................................................80F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-DOS (Main screen - Options - Preferences - Tip DOS)............81F2 (Coord) Main-Parms-Coord (Main screen - Options - Contact)..........................................81F3 (TOOL) Main-Parms-Tool (main screen - Options - Tools)................................................83F4 (D Off) Main-Parms-D Off (Home Screen - Options - Correction in diameter)..................84F5 (H Off) Main-Parms-H Off (Home Screen - Options - length compensation).....................85F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save (Home Screen - Options - Save).................................................86F7 (Load) Main-Parms-Load (Main screen - Options - Load)..................................................86

v

TABLE OF CONTENTS

F8 (Prog) Main-Parms-Prog (Main screen - Options - Program)..............................................86F9 (CTRL) Main-Parms-CTRL (Main screen - Options - CTRL)............................................90Serial Port Data (serial data)......................................................................................................95Digitizing Parameters (Parameters digitizing)...........................................................................97F10 (User) Main-Parms-User (main screen - Options - User)..................................................99F8 (Prog) Main-Prog (main screen - the Program)..................................................................100F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text (main screen - Program - Text mode)...........................................101F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit).........................102Terms of text editing................................................................................................................102Writing and editing text...........................................................................................................102Definitions of keys...................................................................................................................104F1 (Block) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Block (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Block).................................................................................................................................................104F2 (Cursr) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Cursr (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Cursor).....................................................................................................................................105F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Word).......................................................................................................................................105F4 (Misc) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Misc (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Other).................................................................................................................................................106F5 (Ins) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Ins (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Paste).........108F6 (Del) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Del (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Delete)....108HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Check).................................................................................................................................................109F2 (New) Main-Prog-Text-New (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - New)....................109F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Text-Old (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Old)..........................110F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Text-Any (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - Any)......................110F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Text-Menu (main screen - Program - Text mode - Menu).................110F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode).............................112F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit (main screen - Program - Interactive mode-Edit)................112Definitions of Key editing.......................................................................................................114Definitions of key conservation / I..........................................................................................117F2 (New) Main-Prog-Conv-New (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - New).........118F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Conv-Old (Main Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Old)...............118F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Conv-Any (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Any)...........118Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode)..............................................118F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - Menu)......120F9 (Verf) Main-Verf (Main screen - Check)...........................................................................121F3 (Block) Main-Verf-Block (Main Screen - Checking - Power)...........................................125F4 (OStop) Main-Verf-OStop (Main screen - Testing - Additional Stop)..............................125F5 (BSkip) Main-Verf-BSkip (Main Screen - Check - Missing the block)............................125F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ (Main Screen - Check - Displays)..............................................125F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Distance).....................126F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error (Home Screen - Check - Displays - Error).......................126F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Graphic display)....127F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag (main screen - Check - Displays - Diagnostics)..................128

vi

TABLE OF CONTENTS

F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry (Main Screen - Check - Idle)..........................................................128F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt (Main Screen - Checking - Stop) F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum (Main screen - Validity - Renewal).........................................................................................128F10 (Util) Main-Util (Main Screen - Utilities)........................................................................129F1 (Probe) Main-Util-Probe (Home Screen - Utilities - Sensor).............................................129F2 (XyDig) Main-Util-XyDig (Main Screen - Utilities - Digitize XY)..................................131F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files (Main Screen - Utilities - Files)....................................................132F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load (Main Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Download)............132F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save (Home Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Conservation).......134F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Rename)................134F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy (Home Screen - Utilities - Files - Copy)............................134F5 (Ram) Main-Util-Files- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Files - RAM) ....................134F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Erase).............................134F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232 (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232)...........................................134F1 (COM1 or COM 2).............................................................................................................135F5 (Send) Main-Util-RS232-Send (Home Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Send)........................135F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Get).......................135F7 (Ram) Main-Util-RS232-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - RS232 - RAM)...............136F5 (Tlchg) Main-Util-Tlchg (Main Screen - Utilities - Tool change).....................................136F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC)..................................................138F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Fast mode).......................138F1 (RS232)...............................................................................................................................139F2 (File) (File).........................................................................................................................139F3 (Disk) (Disk).......................................................................................................................139F4 (Any) (Any)........................................................................................................................139F5 (Old) (Existing)..................................................................................................................139F6 (Ram ) (RAM) ..................................................................................................................139F1 (First) (First).......................................................................................................................140F2 (Block) (Block)...................................................................................................................140F3 (Tool) (tool)........................................................................................................................140F4 (Cont) (Continued).............................................................................................................140F9 (Skip) (Skip).......................................................................................................................140F10 (Mirr) (Mirror)..................................................................................................................140F3 (Fast) (Fast Track)..............................................................................................................140F4 (Run) Main-Util-DNC-Run (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Implementation)..............142F9 (Verf) Main-Util-DNC-Verf (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC - Check).............................142F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info (Home Screen - Utilities - Information)..........................................143F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Standard)........................143F2 (Sys) Main-Util-Info-Sys (Main Screen - Utilities - Statistics - System)..........................144F3 (Fp) Main-Util-Info-Fp (Main Screen - Utilities - Details-Front)......................................145F4 (Path) Main-Util-Info-Path (Main Screen - Utilities - Information - Directions)..............146F5 (Time) Main-Util-Info-Time (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Time).......................147F6 (Ram) Main-Util-Info-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Statistics - RAM)...................148F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag (main screen - Utilities - Statistics - Diagnosis)...................149

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank (Home Screen - Utilities - Blank)..............................................150F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command (Home Screen - Utilities - Team)..............................150Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV (Main Screen - Utilities - Reverse the screw)...................150

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA............................................................................151Installing the software..............................................................................................................153F1 (Pos) Main-Prog-Conv-Pos (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - the Regulations).................................................................................................................................................154F2 (Mill) Main-Prog-Conv-Mill (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Milling)......155F1 (Start) Mill-Start (Milling - Start).......................................................................................156F2 (Geom) Mill-Geom (Milling - Geometry)..........................................................................158F1 (Line) Mill-Geom-Line (Milling - Geometry - Line).........................................................159F2 (Arc) Mill-Geom-Arc (Milling - Geometry - Doug)..........................................................163F3 (Tangs) Mill-Geom-Tangs (Milling - Geometry - Tangent)..............................................167F4 (CGen) Mill-Geom-CGen (Milling - Geometry - Generator circles).................................169F7 (Islnd) Mill-Geom-Islnd (Milling - Geometry - Island).....................................................170F8 (E-Isl) Mill-Geom-E-Isl (Milling - Geometry - End of treatment of the island)................171F3 (Misc) Mill-Misc (Milling - More options)........................................................................177F4 (End) Mill-End (Milling - End)..........................................................................................177F5 (Pockt) Mill-Pockt (Milling - Deep excavation)................................................................189F1 (Setup) Mill-Pockt-Setup (Milling - Deep groove - Installation).......................................189F2 (Circ) Mill-Pockt-Circ (Milling - Deep groove - Round)..................................................190F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Clean)..........................191F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Finishing)...........................192F3 (Rect) Mill-Pockt-Rect (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular).........................................192F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Clean).................193F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Finishing)..................194F3 (Face) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Face (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Ends)....................194F4 (Manul) Mill-Pockt-Manul (Milling - Deep groove - Clean by hand)...............................195F5 (Polyg) Mill-Pockt-Polyg (Milling - Deep groove - Polygonal)........................................196F6 (Frame) Mill-Frame (Milling - Frame)...............................................................................197F1 (Setup) Mill-Frame-Setup (Milling - Frame - Installation)................................................197F2 (Circ) Mill-Frame-Circ (Milling - Frame - Round)............................................................199F3 (Rect) Mill-Frame-Rect (Milling - Frame - Rectangle).....................................................200F5 (Poly) Mill-Frame-Poly (Milling - Frame - Polygon)........................................................200F7 (3dPkt) Mill-3dPkt (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions)......................................................201F1 (Start) Mill-3dPkt-Start (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - Home).................................201F4 (End) Mill-3dPkt-End (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - End).......................................203F5 (3dArc) Mill-3dPkt-3dArc (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - three-dimensional arc). . .206F8 (CAD) Mill-CAD (milling - CAD)....................................................................................210F9 (Thred) Mill-Thred (Milling - Thread)...............................................................................213F3 (Drill) Drill (Drill)..............................................................................................................214

Boring..................................................................................................................................215Drilling / Pause....................................................................................................................216Drill / drill bits with a periodic output.................................................................................216Struzhkolomnoe drilling......................................................................................................217

viii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Boring..................................................................................................................................218Boring / Pause......................................................................................................................219Boring 2...............................................................................................................................219Accelerated boring...............................................................................................................220Fine boring...........................................................................................................................220Contact boring.....................................................................................................................221Boring manual.....................................................................................................................222Tsekovanie...........................................................................................................................223Drilling holes to screw (Drill-Start-Tap).............................................................................224Drilling holes for soft tapping on the right..........................................................................224Drilling holes for soft tapping on the left............................................................................225Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right.........................................................................226Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left...........................................................................226Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right with a periodic output bits..............................227Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left with the conclusion of the periodic drills.........228

F2 (Pos) Drill-Pos (Drilling-positioning), F3 (Misc) Drill-Misc (Drilling - Options), F4 (Call) Drill-Call (Drilling - Call).......................................................................................................228F5 (End) (End).........................................................................................................................232F6 (CAD) Drill-CAD (Drilling - CAD)...................................................................................232F4 (Bolt) (Bolt)........................................................................................................................241F5 (TChng) Change Tool.........................................................................................................248F6 (Misc) (Additional Functions)............................................................................................252F7 (Call) (Call)........................................................................................................................253F8 (Spec) (Specifications).......................................................................................................254F1 (Parms) Spec-Parms (Specifications - Options).................................................................255F2 (Tools) Spec-Tools (Specifications - Tools)......................................................................255F4 (Scale) Spec-Scale (Specification - Scale).........................................................................256F5 (Rot) Spec-Rot (Specifications - Turn)..............................................................................257F6 (Mirr) Spec-Mirr (Specs - Mirror)......................................................................................259F7 (Flz) Spec-Flz (Specifications - Floating zero)..................................................................260F8 (Text) Spec-Text (Specifications - Text)............................................................................261F9 (Subs) (Sub)........................................................................................................................262F1 (Gosub) Subs-Gosub (Sub - Jump to a subroutine)............................................................262F2 (Start) Subs-Start (Sub - Run)............................................................................................263F3 (End) Subs-End (Sub - Conclusion)...................................................................................263Example programs using subprograms....................................................................................264End of program........................................................................................................................268

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)...................................................................................269G-codes....................................................................................................................................269Interpolation functions.............................................................................................................272Positioning (G00) with rapid movement (modal)....................................................................272Positioning (G01) Movement of feed (modal)........................................................................273Determination of polar.............................................................................................................274Circular interpolation (G02, G03)...........................................................................................275Corner rounding (, R)..............................................................................................................289

ix

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Bevel angle (, C)......................................................................................................................290Contact Line.............................................................................................................................291Screw cutting (G02, G03)........................................................................................................293The team paused (G04)............................................................................................................295Exact Stop (G09).....................................................................................................................295Data Set incl. / Off. (G10, G11)...............................................................................................295Cleaning the floating zero (G12).............................................................................................296The plane XY (modal) (G17)..................................................................................................296The plane XZ (modal) (G18)...................................................................................................296The plane YZ (modal) (G19)...................................................................................................296Inch size mode (Modal) (G20)................................................................................................296Metric size mode (Modal) (G21).............................................................................................296Enable / disable the safe zone (G22, G23)..............................................................................297Automatic standard programs..................................................................................................297Cleaning the round deep recesses (G24).................................................................................298Internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25)......................................................................299Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves (G26).....................................................................301Return to the zero point (G28, G29, G30)...............................................................................303Z to the gap (G31)....................................................................................................................305Z to the tool change (G32).......................................................................................................305The processing cycle ends (G33).............................................................................................305Cleaning deep rectangular grooves (G34)...............................................................................306Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves (G35)..............................................................307Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves (G36).................................................................310Tapping (G39).........................................................................................................................311The cycle performance of the polygons (G666)......................................................................312Correction of the cutting tool (G40, G41, G42)......................................................................315The inner "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool................................................................319Test sample details...................................................................................................................319How to make a correction to the cavity...................................................................................324Blocking the movement (G65)................................................................................................326Automatic correction of the cutting tool (G45, G46, G47).....................................................331Examples of programs.............................................................................................................333Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)...........................................................................335Cancel scaling (G50) Set scaling (G51)..................................................................................336Coordinate Systems.................................................................................................................338The coordinate system of the machine (G53)..........................................................................338Work coordinate system (G54 - G59) (G5 # 0 ... G5 # 9).......................................................339The local coordinate system (G52)..........................................................................................339One-way or one-time accelerated positioning (G60)...............................................................342Exact stop mode (modal) (G61)..............................................................................................342Tapping mode (modal) (G63)..................................................................................................342Cutting mode (modal) (G64)...................................................................................................342Calling the program (G65 P)...................................................................................................343Rotate the coordinate system (G68) Cancel the rotation (G69)..............................................344

x

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Turn in 3 dimensions (G0, G1, G2, G3, G68 and G69)..........................................................346Scalable and then turns the part...............................................................................................347Rotatable and scalable, then the item......................................................................................348Cancel mirroring (G70)...........................................................................................................349Install a mirrored display (G71)..............................................................................................349Group cycles............................................................................................................................350Execute bolt holes (G72).........................................................................................................356The cycle of high-speed drill bits with a periodic output (G73)..............................................359The cycle of the soft tapping on the left (G74)........................................................................360Tsekovanie (G75)....................................................................................................................361Cycle finish boring (G76)........................................................................................................362Specialized drilling cycle (G77)..............................................................................................363The cycle of boring manual (G78)...........................................................................................364Cancellation of group cycle (G80)..........................................................................................364Drilling cycle (G81).................................................................................................................365Drilling cycle / pause (G82)....................................................................................................365Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill (G83)......................................................366The cycle of the soft tapping on the right (G84).....................................................................367Boring Cycle (G85).................................................................................................................368The cycle accelerated boring (G86).........................................................................................369Boring feedback loop (G87)....................................................................................................370Rigid tapping cycle (G88).......................................................................................................372Boring Cycle / Pause (G89).....................................................................................................374Absolute / incremental mode...................................................................................................377Absolute mode (modal) (G90).................................................................................................377Incremental mode (modal) (G91)............................................................................................378Floating zero (G92)..................................................................................................................379Feed mode with a time delay (G93)........................................................................................381Submission of a minute (G94).................................................................................................381Feed per revolution (G95).......................................................................................................382Returning to the original level or the level of R (G98/G99)....................................................382On. / Off. cylindrical display (G107).......................................................................................383G271 (cleaning deep cavities).................................................................................................385Save / Restore Settings (G990/G991)......................................................................................388Read byte parameters (G995)..................................................................................................389Write byte parameters (G996).................................................................................................389Calling error (G997)................................................................................................................390Beep (G998).............................................................................................................................390Special G-codes.......................................................................................................................390

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)...........................................................393Stop the program (M00)..........................................................................................................395An optional stop (M01)...........................................................................................................395Skipping the block (/)..............................................................................................................396Completion of the program (M02, M30, M99).......................................................................396Spindle incl. / Off. (M03, M04, M05).....................................................................................396

xi

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Tool change (M06)..................................................................................................................396Coolant inc. / Off. (M07, M08, M09)......................................................................................397Clip for rotary table (M10)......................................................................................................397Decompression on the turntable (M11)...................................................................................397Tool changing device codes (M19-M28)................................................................................397Lock Drive (M31)....................................................................................................................397Canal (M32).............................................................................................................................397Various M-codes (M65/75, M67/77, M68/78, M69/79, M50/60)...........................................398Enable / disable graphics (M90, M91)....................................................................................398Enable / disable scanning in 3 dimensions (M93, M94).........................................................398Tapered wall (M95).................................................................................................................400Rounded walls (M96)..............................................................................................................403Cleaning the deep recesses (M97)...........................................................................................408Subroutine call (M98)..............................................................................................................409The completion routines (M99)...............................................................................................409Training routines......................................................................................................................410Performing routines.................................................................................................................411Specialized M-codes................................................................................................................412

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING.....................................................................415Parametric link.........................................................................................................................415Parametric team assignment....................................................................................................415PB (byte option).......................................................................................................................416Arithmetic Operators...............................................................................................................416Relational Operators................................................................................................................417The operators of functions.......................................................................................................417Mathematical expressions........................................................................................................418Conditionals.............................................................................................................................418IF-THEN..................................................................................................................................418WHILE-WEND.......................................................................................................................419Operators of transfer................................................................................................................420GOTO statements....................................................................................................................420CALL statement.......................................................................................................................420GOSUB and RETURN............................................................................................................421Computational functions..........................................................................................................422Time team................................................................................................................................426Additional commands..............................................................................................................427IPIN..........................................................................................................................................433OPIN........................................................................................................................................433Teams check details and digitizing..........................................................................................433Contact Line.............................................................................................................................433MOD (modulo operation)........................................................................................................434ORIGIN (start address)............................................................................................................435HOME (starting position)........................................................................................................436

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS............................................................................439APPENDIX..................................................................................................................................495

xii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Error Messages........................................................................................................................495Byte parameters.......................................................................................................................514The actual parameters..............................................................................................................521

xiii

DETERMINATION OF AXES

All directions are oriented relative to the tool. The figure below shows the direction of X, Y and Z.

1

INTRODUCTION

The group of commands sent to the CNC work on the machine, called a program. With the help of a specific command tool is moved in a straight line or arc, and run the machine functions such as switching on / off coolant, tool change, or turn on / off spindle.

The function of the tool along straight lines and arcs is called interpolation.

Linear interpolation Circular interpolation

When you run the tool at a desired position of the CNC moves the tool in this situation by a regime of linear or circular interpolation. The position is given as a coordinate value in a rectangular Cartesian coordinate system.

Coordinates

3

There are following types of coordinate systems.

A. The system of the machine

Two. Working coordinate system

3. The local coordinate system

4

INTRODUCTION

The command to move the tool to the desired position is performed using the values of the coordinates, based in one of the above coordinate systems. Coordinate value is a single component of each axis, X, Y and Z. The coordinate values can be entered in absolute and incremental mode in. In absolute mode, the tool moves to the point the programmed distance from the zero point coordinate system. In incremental mode, the tool moves to the point the programmed distance from the current position of the tool.

5

Absolute mode

Incremental backup is

SECTION 1 - CONFIGURATION SOFTWARE

By definition, the program - a set of commands sent to the CNC machine operation. By choosing the tool moves in a straight line or arc, or switched on and off the motor spindle. The program must specify the command in the sequence of movements of real instruments.

Program Tool movement sequence

A set of commands at each stage of the sequence is called block. The program consists of a group of blocks for a series of movements of the machine. An additional number to identify each movement is block numberAnd the number of serving for the title of each program, called program number.

Unit and the program has the following configuration.

Block

Each unit begins with an additional accommodation and ends <CR> (carriage return).

7

Block

Block

Block

Block

.

.

.

Block

Program

Typically, the program number is specified at the beginning of the program and graduation from the program code (M99, M02, M30) - at the end of the program. They are not mandatory, however, may be advantageous to omit the code to the end of the programs that are used as a subroutine. Code completion of the program is supposed to enter at the end of the main program.

The main program, program, and standard routines

If you want to process on the same path in several places on the details necessary to create a program path. It is called subroutine. If the main program there is "M98" or "Call" (subroutine call), the team routines are executed before executing the next block of the main program.

Routines can be used to create libraries of frequently used paths machining, they can be stored anywhere in memory.

8

NUMBER OF PROGRAMSBLOCKBLOCKBLOCK

END OF PROGRAM


Ranges format commands

The base address and range of values of the commands listed in the table below. It should be borne in mind that these figures indicate the maximum limit for the numerical control. These limits will always be greater than or equal to the physical limits of the machine. Limits are set using the machine parameters in the settings of the machine in the control unit.

Ranges format commands

FEATURES LETTER OF THE TEAM

ENTER IN INCHES Enter the metric system

Subroutine number and number of the program

O 1 - 9999 1 - 9999

Sequence number N 1 - 99999 1 - 99999

Preparations for the function G 0 - 999 0 - 999

* The size of the words XYZUVWQABCIJKRP

0 ± 999.9999 0 ± 9999.9999

Pause P 0.01 - 9999.99 0.01 - 9999.99

Feed rate * F 0.1 - 999.9 0.1 - 9999

Spindle speed * S 1 - 99999 1 - 99999

Tool T 0 - 99 0 - 99

The auxiliary function M 0 - 999 0 - 255

Repeat or loop L 0 - 999 0 - 999

* These functions have the election decimal places. It can be any number of integer and decimal places, while the total number of digits to be placed in the field.

9


Format commands for the axes: M and G codes

The commands for the axes can be programmed in the format of the calculator. Do not want to zeros before or after the comma. Integers can be programmed without the decimal point. Decimal point can be used with the values expressed in mm, inches or seconds. Location of the decimal point as follows.

Z15.0 Z15 Z15 millimeters or inches (Same as Z15)F10.0 10 mm / min or 10 inches / minute (Same as F10)G04 P1 Pause for one second (The same as the G4 P1)

The following addresses can be used with a decimal point: X, Y, Z, U, V, W, A, B, C, I, J, K, R, F, P, Q, AA, AB, XC, YC, ZC, E, H, L, N, O, S and T.

Min / max values for the axes of the standard systems

The smallest increment of Maximum Metric system 0.001 mm 99999.999 mmThe English system 0.0001 inch 99999.9999 in.Degrees 0.001 degrees 99999.999 degrees

The provisions of the axes are stored in floating point, so the digital team of more than 8 will be accepted.

10

SECTION 2 - FRONT PANEL OPERATION

The front of the Centurion have two 16-key keypad and 12 function keys. Keyboards are used to enter alphanumeric data requested by the CNC. The upper keyboard is used primarily for entering text characters. To enter a character to another register, simply press and release the key ShiftAnd then character. Once a symbol has been entered, the control unit automatically returns to the set of characters with no case. Key Shift works in the same manner on the bottom or the numeric keypad. Gaps between the teams of data entry is not required, but you must click on Enter to complete the data lines or move to the next function. The work of 12 function keys change when displayed on the display of various menus. In the following sections, each function key is described in detail.

The lower part of the panel refers to the cycles of the machine in manual mode. At the extreme left of the panel has an electronic hand wheel, which, when in manual mode, allows the movement of the selected axis. Next to the flywheel are filing for adjustment of the handle of the machine axes manually. By turning the handle feedrate override changes the current flow rate of the machine to a specified percentage. Pressing the button Feedhold (Stop feeding) will lead to the cessation of movement along the axes. To resume the motion of the axes, you must again click on Feedhold, And then click Cycle Start (Beginning of cycle). On the button Cycle Start to be pressed when you need to run the machine. Cycle Start flashes when it will be necessary to press it.

The next part of the panel refers to the spindle and coolant control devices. Dial adjustment spindle speed changes the current spindle speed for the selected percentage. If the machine is not equipped with optional variable speed spindle rotation speed adjustment switch will have no effect on the spindle. Use the spindle CCW (Counterclockwise),CW (Clockwise) and Stop (Stop) blocked the current command control unit and the operator can make corrections in a fully manual mode. At the operational status of the spindle will be illuminated to indicate the button. Buttons coolant (Mist (Oil mist) and Flood (Coolant splash)) Work the same way as the buttons CW and CCW. When they burn, the function is active, however, the coolant will not turn on until the spindle is running. Button Tool Reset (Reset tool) is only active when you run M6. This button is a safety interlock. It prevents the launch of the spindle with manual tool change.It lights up when changing the tool, and it must be pressed after the tool change before resume program. When you click Emergency Stop (Emergency stop) immediately cease all actions of the machine. When the button Emergency Stop pressed, the button Reset (Reset) will flash, indicating that it is necessary to press, before any movement on the machine. The control unit is always in a state of emergency stop after the power supply. Below is a diagram of the front panel of the CNC Centurion.

11

The front panel of Centurion 7

12

CNC 7200/8200


Scheme of the main screen

A RunTime (run time)

During the test period, the program displays the estimated time of execution of production parts. When working in the program, it shows how much time has passed since the start of the program. All data on the periods of implementation of programs stored in the parameter "Job Time" ("time of manufacturing the same parts") (F7 Parms - F9 Ctrl).

2 History Line (Story) History Line shows where you are in the program and how you got there. If you change the spreadsheet tool, history will show the Main-Parms-Tool-Edit.

3 Active Program (active program)Active Program indicates the program in which you work or you are testing. If you are editing a program, it will show that the activated editing program. If you send a file via RS-232, it will show that the program has been sent.

4 Current Position (current position)Current Position - a position relative to the zero adjustment of the working

5 Next Position (next position)If you are running a program or check out her next position (Next Position) is the position into which the machine.

6 Distance (distance)Distance - the distance that machine is left to go until the completion of the action.

7 The Function Keys (function keys)Illuminated function keys are active or available.

8 Status Window (status window)The status window displays detailed information about the state of the control system. A detailed description is given below.

13


The scheme of the Status Window

A Button "\" changes to "/" to "\" every time the status window is updated. 2 Comp: Correction to the tool radius (Left (Left), Right (R) or Cancelled (repealed))3 Tool: The first two digits indicate the number of the active tool. The second two numbers in

parentheses indicate the number of expected instrument. If you do not T14 M6, the expected number of tools will be 14.

4 The length of the tool. 5 The radius of the tool. 6 Plane and work offset (and the working plane correction): The plane can be XY (G17), ZX

(G18) or YZ (G19). Working correction shows the current working correction G54 (0) ... G59 (9).

7 The gap, or plane R.8 Interpolation Linear (Feed) (linear (feed)), Linear (Rapid) (linear (accelerated movement)),

Circular (CW) (a circular (clockwise)) or Circular (CCW) (circular (counterclockwise)) 9 Feedrate: programmed feed rate and its unit of measurement (flow per minute in English

system) ipm (inches / min) (flow per minute in the metric system) mmpm (mm / min), (feed per revolution in the English system) ipr (inches v / v), (feed per revolution of the metric system) mmpr (mm / rev) or (reverse flow) / minute or / sec (If the machine is in an accelerated mode, the units will always be in / min or mm / min.)

10 Feedrate override (feedrate override): Position switch feedrate and the resulting flow rate. If the machine is programmed to move faster than its maximum value, you will see the speed limit and the feed icon "*" next to the%.

11 Units (Units) (absolute) Abs or (incremental) Inc, and English (the English system of measurement) or Metric (Metric)

14


12 Cycle (Cycle): If the cycle is activated, or a group program with automatic start, in this line it will be displayed.

13 Dwell (pause): If you pause, her time will be counted in the reverse order to zero. 14 Spindle (Spindle): The programmed number of revolutions per minute. 15 Correction of the frequency and direction of rotation of the spindle: Switch position

correction and the resulting rotation of the spindle speed (if there is no spindle encoder) or actual speed (if the sensor stem.) This line is also displayed, whether disabled or spindle is rotated in a clockwise direction (CW) or counterclockwise (CCW).

16 Spindle load sensor indicates the load on the spindle. He is getting longer and the color changes from blue to green to yellow to red with increasing load.

17 Coolant (Coolant), Off (disabled), Mist (oil mist), Flood (irrigation) or Mist / Flood (oil mist / watering)

18 Readout of parts increases each time the program ends normally. They will not increase if the program is interrupted, or the program contains an error. They do not increase at idle, when checking or manual data entry. They do not increase with modes RUN, DNC-Run and the DNC-Fast. The parameter number used for the counter - P699 (it can be used for engraving or anything else). You can increase the value of the counter at any number. The option to increase - P698. To install it, there is no place to perform and should be entered manually P698 = #. Can be reset to increase or decrease the value of the counter with the following: Shift-F1 (reset / reset)Shift-F2 (decrease) (will not decrease below zero) Shift-F3 (increase)Press and hold the Shift key when you press F.

The remainder of this section provides an explanation of each function that can be done using the front panel.

F1 (Home) Home Screen - The starting position

After switching off the power control unit must always be set to its original position after setting the machine to zero. Each axis will look for the limit switch installed in the initial position and momentum of a marker on the sensor. Upon completion of this procedure will be determined by the zero position of the machine, which will be called again until the next power outage. To start the installation process to its original position, press the ESC, and until you reach the main screen, then press the F1 (starting position). The message of the need to press the button Cycle Start (The first cycle), and flashes. When you click on Cycle Start start the installation process to its original position upon completion will return to the main screen. The parameters set the starting position can be adjusted in the parameters of the axis.

F10 (Here) Starting position - current position

F10 (current position) is activated only if the settings were correct password is entered.

The machine can be set to zero without moving the axis. Press the key F10 (current position), when it is highlighted, then press the Cycle Start (Start of cycle). The position of the machine will be perceived as a zero position.

15


Note: If the machine has a line of glass used for quill removal, F1 (quill) will reset the position of sleeve. See more information on the scale of quill on page 62, Section 2.

F2 (JOG) Main screen - pulsatory movement

Before moving the jog the machine must be set to zero.

F2 (pulsatory movement) is used to move the machine in manual mode to determine the zero points and alignment of parts. Pressing the F2 (pulsatory move) the following screen appears. Note: F5 and F6 can be modified to preserve the provisions in the G92, the correction of the floating zero.

RunTime = Period Main-Jog = Main screen - pulsatory movement Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceipm = inch / min Correction: canceled

Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission:Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Slow = slow; Fast = fast; Dist = distance; Tool = Tool; Exit = exit

With the help of the function buttons at the bottom of the screen to select the desired mode jog move. Use the F1 (slowly) selects a slow jog. Adjust the feed rate is activated, it can accelerate

16


or slow jogging speed of movement. Use the F2 (quickly) selected rapid jog. The manufacturer of the machine determines the slow and fast flow rate and can change the values of each of them in the axial parameters. When you press F3 () Mode is selected as the continuous jog feed. Pulsatory movement of the default continues, if you pressed F3 (.) In continuous mode, the selected axis continues to move until the user releases the key to the axis, or until it reaches a preset limit. When submitting an incremental value of the axis moves to the selected increments and stops each time the user presses and releases a key axis. Once the operator presses the key F4 (distance), the control unit gives a hint about the need to introduce the desired increments. The diagram shows the direction of the keyboard, in which the axis moves when pressed the corresponding key on the numeric keypad. To exit the incremental supply is necessary to press F3 (.) Depending on the size of the auxiliary parameter "rather than the use of FLZ G54", F5 and F6 keys perform the G54 or G92 for X or Y in the current state of the machine. It can be seen as a challenge to this position ". # # # # # #". F7 key used to set the tool length, the operator are given clues as to the axis of Z. If the user wants to exit the jog mode is done by pressing the ESC (exit), the control unit returns to the main screen.

F3 (HDW) Main screen - Flywheel

Before you operate the machine with a flywheel, you must set the machine to zero.

Flywheel mode is used for movement of the machine with an electronic handwheel. Its main purpose: setting the correction to the length of the tool, the installation and alignment corrections job details. Pressing the F3 (flywheel), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-HDW = Main screen - Flywheel Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

Correction: canceledInstrument:Length:Diameter:

17


Plane:Clearance:Interpolation: linear (feed)Submission:Units: absolute / English systemCycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds)Spindle: (rpm = r / min)Coolant: DisabledNumber details:

Tool = Tool; Exit = exit

Note: F8 can be modified to preserve the correct position in the G92.

F keys at the bottom of the screen are used to choose which axis will move when you turn the flywheel. With the switch feedrate determined the distance that will move each axis of the handwheel one click. With illuminated keys axis is determined, which will move the axis.

F6 (Z-tool) used to set the correct length of the Z-axis tool in the tool table, or table H-parameters. In the flywheel can be placed in the tool spindle and move the zero point Z. You can then click on the button F6, which indicates an intention to enter the current position of Z as H-parameter correction of the length of the tool. CNC will give a clue as to position Z. After pressing the Enter (Enter), the current Z position is used for the length of the tool.

Depending on the size of the auxiliary parameter "rather than the use of FLZ G54", G54 executes F8 key or the G92 for X or Y or Z in the current state of the machine. The operator shall be issued with respect to the axis of clues. It can be seen as "a challenge that position '. # # # # # #'."

Note: The indicated distance refers to how the machine will move in one click flywheel.

18


The installation procedure is the correction to the length of the instrumentNote: there is an alternative method to adjust the lengths of instruments with.36.Tool length is used to compensate for the difference between the zero point of the Z-axis and the surface parts (zero parts). Install a floating zero on the Z axis is not recommended.

To set the adjustment to the length of the tool download the tool number 1 in the spindle, doing manual entry → T1M6. Use the handwheel or jog feed for contact details of the instrument in a certain place. Select F6 (Z-tool). The control unit will prompt the need to enter the installed position of Z. Tool length compensation for the number 1 tool set. Now when the tool number 1 (H1) is programmed in the position, he will be positioned relative to the zero point of detail. Repeat this procedure for each instrument.

Tool length can be set by entering a value in the table of tool offsets. The value can be measured by touching the details of the instrument and seeing the current position of the axis Z. If between the tool and the workpiece is used pad, its size should be added to the value of the correction. To enter to select F7 (Settings) - F3 (Tool). Next, enter a value in the form of a negative number.

The F8 key on-screen flywheel is used to set the floating ground or working on the coordinates of the selected axis in the current state of the machine. F8 (G54-X), F8 (G54-Y), F8 (G54-Z) mean the same thing as setting the coordinates of the G54 working in the current state of the machine.

F9 key is used to select the operating system of coordinates. With the F9 key to changing the working coordinate on key F8. There are six different options, G54-59.

19


The procedure to install the correct working

Working shifts the zero-point correction of X and Y axes to the desired position (edge details.) Thus, the item can be programmed from its zero point. In order to determine and set an example see the work of correction.

With kromkoiskatelya diameter ½ "on the X axis to move by hand wheel or jog feed to the edge of the details and press F8 (G54-X). Define a positive or a negative value kromkoiskatelya the desired zero point. Enter -0.25 for position X. The current position will be read as X -0,25. Repeat this procedure to the axis Y.

To test the null value of the work of correction to choose F5 (manual data entry), type G0 (rapid movement) X0 Y0 (X and Y position to 0). Press Enter (Enter)And then Cycle Start (Start of cycle). The machine will be the current working position correction.

Please note: Moving the machine will run in accelerated mode. The tool should be above all the parts, clutches, etc.

For more information on floating zero, see p. 369, Section 4.

20


F4 (Run) Main screen - Implementation

(Before running the machine must be set to zero)The key F4 (Implementation) is used to perform an active program. When you press the F4 (Implementation) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run = Main screen - Perform Active = activeCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission:Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Start = start; Old = the existing program; Block = block; Ostop = extra stops; Bskip = pass block; Displ = map; Menu = menu; Dry = idle; HDW = flywheel; Esc = exit; TlSet = configuration tool

When you see the above screen, press the F1 (Start), the following screen. (Note: if the machine is equipped with an automatic tool change, the operator receives a request for verification of the tool room, located in the spindle).

21


RunTime = Period Main-Run-Start = Main screen - Running-Start Active = ActiveCurrent = Next = current next Press the Cycle Start (beginning of the cycle) to start the

program from the beginning. Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission:Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

First = first; Block = block; Tool = Tool; Abort = abort

F1 (first) is selected automatically when you receive this screen. So, if you want to run an active program from the beginning, press only Cycle Start (Start of cycle). Pressing the F2 (block) device management request to enter the desired number of blocks or sequences, and then click on Enter (Enter). If the button is pressed Cycle Start (The first cycle), an active program will start from the selected block. When you click on F3 (Tool), the control unit requests the tool number. After entering the number, clicking on the tool and Enter, Click on Cycle Start, And an active program will start with the number you want the tool, the following screen.

Note: If the requested block number or tool is not found in the active program, the following window appears.

22


When you click on Cycle Start (Start of cycle) program runs from the beginning.

RunTime = Period Main-Run = Main screen - Perform Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance Correction: the left by /

Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (accelerated movement)Submission:Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Block = block; Ostop = extra stops; Bskip = pass block; Displ = display; Halt = Stop; HDW = flywheel; Esc = exit

This screen is the main startup screen with two new additions: the map unit number and F9 (Stop). It shows the current block to be executed by the program. Key F9 (Stop) is similar

23

Block N657 is not found. Press the Cycle Start (Start of cycle) to start the program from the beginning.


Feedhold (Stop feeding) that when pressed, the machine stops. However, in contrast to FeedholdBy F9 (Stop) can exit the Run (Execute) and start a new program.

F9 (Halt / Resum) Main screen - Implementation - Stop / Resume

If the program was stopped, resume function is activated. Now on the screen Run (Execute) to display the key F9 (Resum) (Renewal). The program can be renewed, if not carried out any of the following functions: F9 (Verf) (check), F5 (MDI) (Manual data entry), F1 (Home) (starting position), or Emergency Stop (emergency stop). F9 (Resum) is also canceled when any parameter is changed. If you do not perform other functions on the axes can be performed Jog feeding or management with the flywheel, regardless of the work, the spindle can be turned on and off, and F9 (Resum) will remain active. While the resume function is activated, the F9 key on the screen Run (Execute) will show a Resume (Resume). If the resume function is selected, an active program to be launched since the shutdown. First, the Z-axis will be assigned to the tool change position during the entire renewal cycle. Second, the X and Y axis will move in accelerated mode to break point. Once the X and Y will be set in position, will again be prompted for Cycle Start (Start of cycle). When you click on Cycle Start Z-axis will be moved at an accelerated rate in the plane R; then it will be submitted to its previous depth. The program execution continues as if nothing had happened. Pressing Feedhold (Stop feeding) simply stops the movement of the axes, while it is pressed again, and then also pressed Cycle Start (Start of cycle).

F2 (Old) Main-Run-Old (Main screen - Implementation - Existing Program)

F2 (Old) (existing program) allows the entry - of the message box - the text to an existing program. After entering the number, the control unit checks the text of the program on the subject of whether there is among them a program with this number. If so, this program is activated. If not, a message appears stating that the program was not found. After pressing the ESC (Exit), you can enter another number.

Press the F3, F4, F5 and F8 the screen Run (Execute) is established for the operation of the program. When these buttons are illuminated, the functions are active in any current program or any program to be executed.

F3 (Block) Main-Run-Block (main screen - Implementation - Block)

When the switch is activated F3 (Block) (Block), the program stops at the end of each block. Each time you press the Cycle Start (Start of cycle) is satisfied another block.

F4 (OStop) Main-Run-OStop (Main screen - Implementation - Additional Stop)

When the button is enabled an additional stop, F4 (OStop), the program will stop at each team M01. When you click on Cycle Start (Start of cycle) will continue the program.

F5 (BSkip) Main-Run-BSkip (Main screen - Implementation - Pass Block)

When the button is activated crossing block, F5 (BSkip), the program will skip all the blocks, beginning with a / (slash).

For example: / M5

24


When the button is activated crossing block, M5 (spindle off the team) will not run.

F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ (Main screen - Implementation - mapping)

Access to key F6 (Displ) (map) is available on many screens. The screen below shows access to the F6 (Displ) from the screen RUN (Running). All display functions and screens are identical, regardless of point of entry into the program. Differ only in the cusps on the basis of the original entry point. When you press F6 (Displ) (map), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ = Main screen - Implementation-Display Active = Active

Current = current next Next = Distance = the distanceCorrection: Left res \Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (accelerated movement)Submission:Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Obs = vnutriplatny switch; Shell = output in the shell; Esc = exit

Note: F7 and F9 appears only in protected mode.

25


F1 (Dist) Main-Run-Displ-Dist (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Distance)

When the key is activated by F1 (Dist) (distance), the screen displays the current position, next position and the distance it takes to pass.

F2 (Error) Main-Run-Displ-Error (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Bug)

Error error refers to the delay of the servo system.

Pressing the F2 (Error) (Error), the screen displays the current position, next position, and the mismatch error. Displays the following error is intended to help in setting up the machine, or find and fix faults on the line. Pressing the F2 (Error) (Error), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ = Main screen - Displays the Running-Active = ActiveCurrent = Next = current next Following Error = error error


Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Esc = exit

26


F3 (Graph) Main-Run-Displ-Graph (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Graphical display)

If you press F3 (Graph) (graphic display), the control unit switches to display text on a graphic display of the active part program. The following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical Active = ActiveCorrection: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length:Submission:Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details:Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear

Graphs in the NC are fully three-dimensional and displayed in the graphics area as long as the control device is in graphics mode. At the request of other maps in the graphics area of the window will appear with the requested data. At the end of the window with these features disappear, and the graphical display will be restored. The scales at the bottom and the left side of the screen used to control the size of the parts. If you change the scale on the lines dividing the screen will change accordingly. Division in the rulers expressed in units of the machine, in imperial system equal to the largest division of about one inch. In the metric system of dividing up the largest 10 mm. Parameter Runtime (Period), the top screen is essentially a timer that starts when the command is run Run Program (program implementation), and stops at the end of the program or when the program is terminated.

27


F1 (Rot) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Rot (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Turn)

Length:

Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details:Done = done

(F1-XY, F2-XZ, F3-Y2, F4-ISO)

Press the F1, F2, F3 and F4 produced four standard turning parts: XY top, XZ Front, YZ side and isometric views. The index of orientation in the lower left corner of the screen indicates the current orientation of the parts. By pressing the keys F1 through F4 Index orientation is moved to its new position. Keys F5 to F10 are used to turn any of the selected axis in increments of 5 °. Again, if a key is pressed, the index of the orientation is rotated to indicate the orientation of the display items. With the F5 and F6 turns the axis of X ±, using F7 and F8 - axis Y ±, and using the F9 and F10 - axis Z ±.

28


Note: The screen is scaled automatically displaying the new orientation.

F2 (Pan) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Pan)

Key F2 (Pan) (Pan) is used to select the pan, through which the operator can pan around the item. The following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Pan = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical-Pan Active = ActiveCorrection: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length:Submission:Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details:Block = block; Enter = input; Done = done

Crosshair that appears on the screen can be moved using the numeric keys or the arrow keys F7 - F10. To perform the pan to move the cursor to a point on the screen, ie to the desired center of the screen and click on the F5 (Enter) (Enter) or Enter (Enter) key on your keyboard. The screen will shift to a new position, panning can be resumed. Use the ESC (Exit) cancels the pan function and returns to the screen Graph (graphic display). Crosshairs can also be used to verify the origin items to be displayed on the screen.

29


F3 (Wind) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind (The main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Create window)

Use the F3 (Wind) (Creation of the window) is selected by a window function, which enables the operator to create a window in a specific area of detail. When you select F3 (Wind) (Creating a window) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Wind = Main Screen-Display-Running-Graphical-Create Windows Active = ActiveCorrection: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length:Submission:Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Total Dist = total distanceXDist = distance to the axis XYDist = distance to the Y axis

Enter = input; Done = done

Crosshair that appears on the screen can be moved using the numeric keys or the arrow keys F7 - F10 (as well as in the pan). In order to increase through the window to move the cursor to the first corner of the window and press the F5 (Enter) (Enter) or click Enter (Enter). Then move the cursor up until the desired region of the details do not fall into a rectangular block as shown on the screen. Then click on Enter. The area enclosed in the block will now be displayed in full screen. After clicking on Enter window closes and you return to the graphical mode. Cross can be used to verify the origin and the distance between the elements in detail.

XY coordinates in the lower left of the screen indicates the position of the cursor relative to the zero point of detail. XY coordinates in the bottom right indicate the size of the window. These numbers can be used for quick reference on the amount and details of the parameters.

30


F4 (Auto) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Auto (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Auto-scaling)

Use the F4 (Auto) is selected auto-scaling. This function is performed auto-scaling and centering all the details on the screen.

F5 (Zoom-) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom-(Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - zoom out)

Use the F5 (Zoom) function is selected to reduce the scale by which the size is reduced by half the details are currently displayed on the screen. Basically, this function is used to view much of the detail.

F6 (Zoom +) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zoom + (main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - zoom)

Use the F6 (Zoom) function is selected to increase the scale, doubling the size of the items displayed on the screen. Basically, this function is used to increase the specific area of detail that allows the operator to see more details.

F7 (Limit) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Limit (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Borders)

Pressing F7 (Limit) (Borders) features a block on the screen corresponding to the limits of the machine axes. This allows you to display the item on the transition of the machine limits. If the item is beyond the scope of this unit, it can not be processed on the machine, without making any corrections of measures to change the job of corrections. The extreme limits of axes are set from the pages of parameters. When programming parts outside the block error message "Axis software limit overtravel" (Go for the specified boundary line).

Note: To display the actual position within the need to set the zero point and the details of the length of the instrument.

F8 (Zone) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Zone (Main screen - Implementation-Display - Graphic display - security zone)

Pressing F8 (Zone) is drawn on the screen of the block corresponding to the security zone axis. This zone, which can not enter the tool. If the tool is programmed in the block when the function of the security zone (G23), an error message "Attempted to move into safe zone" (Trying to move into the security zone). G22 disables the security zone.

F9 (Coord) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Coord (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - coordinate)

Use the F9 (Coord) is drawn through the axis of the coordinate X0, Y0, Z0. This gives a visual guide to the location of the zero-point detail.

F10 (Fresh) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Fresh (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Update)

When you press the F9 (Fresh) updates the details of the current image on the screen.

31


Help (Clear) (Help (Clear)) Main-Run-Displ-Graph-Clear (Main screen - Implementation - Display - Graphic display - Clear)

Use the F10 (Clear) clears the current image buffer. After the command to clear the screen did not show up to verify or re-run the program.

F4 (Diag) Main-Run-Displ-Diag (main screen - Implementation - mapping - Diagnostics)

The key F4 (Diag) is mainly used to configure the machine or troubleshooting functions of the machine. Diagnostic screens download all the external bits of I / O connected to the CNC. The state of each bit is displayed on the screen, and, as they are changed on the machine, the screen is updated. With the help of the function keys F1 through F6 illustrates the different axes involved in TNC. If you select X, Y, Z, etc. load the corresponding I / O channels axes. Display "0" on the screen means that the I / O channel is not active. "1" indicates an activity.

The next screen provides information issued by the choice of different axes.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Displ-Diag = Main Screen-Display Performance-Diagnostics-Active = ActiveEnter the X-axis01 Emergency StopConnecting rod 02 is turned offConnecting rod 03 is included04 Acceleration 05 Change Tool06 Failure of lubrication system07 Waiting for the channel08 Zero Speed09 Faulty Drive10 Rear Spindle11 Digitization The switch 12 of the originalMarker pulse Marker of the spindle

The output of the X axis01 Program Emergency Stop02 coolant in the form of oil mist03 Coolant splashThe rotation of the spindle 04 in a clockwise directionThe rotation of the spindle 05 counterclockwiseThe spindle 06 in the order07 The inclusion of a connecting rod08 Change ToolResolution 09 reliefConclusion 10 X 1011 Locking Spindle12 swivel clip


32


Counter spindle speed Esc = exit

Note: The diagnostic screens will be different for machines with various options. The text appearing on screen - from the files and INP.XXX OUT.XXX, where XXX - this extension is to display the desired language on the screen. Files INP.XXX OUT.XXX and the base of the machine without options are located in the ROM (ROM). Files that match the options that may be on the machine, will be in the memory (RAM). The control unit first check the directory memory (RAM). If no files are found in it, the control unit will use the default files in the directory the ROM (ROM).

Each axis has inputs and outputs, by pressing the F1 ... F6 buttons are shown, the inputs and outputs for the corresponding axis.

Note: In machines with tool changer, etc. there are other diagnostic screens.

F7 (OBS) Main-Run-Displ-Obs (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - Vnutriplatny switch)

The key F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) will be displayed only on the access level 2 and above. F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) will be highlighted, it is only available if the current mapping - F1 (Next) or F2 (distance). It displays information about the motion control boards. F7 (Vnutriplatny switch) appears only in protected mode.

F9 (Shell) Main-Run-Displ-Shell (Main screen - Implementation - mapping - InExit to the shell)

Key F9 (Exit to the shell) is available if the control device is located at the access level 2 and above. It will be released into the system DOS. To return to the machines to print exit (exit). F9 (Exit to the shell) appears only in protected mode.

33


F7 (Menu) Main-Run-Menu (main screen - Implementation - Menu)

Use the F7 (Menu), selected from the screens Run (Execute) or Verify (test) window appears containing a list of all available programs that can be performed. The screen shown below appears when you request the software menu.

RunTime = Period Main-Run-Menu = Main screen - Implementation - Menu Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceConversational file Centurion = File Dialog Centurion

Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Verf = check; Enter = avodah; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Drive = CD

To activate one of the programs listed in the window, use the arrow keys and page turning to move the cursor to the desired program and press the F5 (input) or on the button Enter (Enter) key on your keyboard. The function menu can be accessed from other screens, but it works the same everywhere. When calling from the screens Run (Execute) or Verify (Test) selected program becomes active. When invoked with the selected program editing screen becomes editable. With the help of F1 (check) graphically checked the item on which the cursor is positioned. When you press F6 (switch) is displayed file size, date and time of last modification,

34


and seven characters for file name. The names of the subdirectories are defined as <DIR>. ".." Determine the parent directory to the current. Pressing the HELP (CD), a list of available drives.

Note: The file name is enclosed in brackets. If the first block there are no brackets, file name is the first unit. Pressing the "D" appears in the menu to "Full Dos Filenames" («Complete file names in the Dos»), and from it. Pressing the "N" function is called sort files by name and description.

F8 (Dry) Main-Run-Dry (Main screen - Implementation - Idle)

When activated, F8 (Idle), all the programmed feed rate will work in supply at idle.

Note: Teams spindle at idle can be ignored when setting the parameter.

Switch to Dry Run (Idle) and vice versa can be done at run time. The machine must first be set to stop F9 (Halt), switched to idle or back F8 (Dry), and then work the machine shall be resumed F9 (Resum). Key F8 (Dry) (Idle) will not be displayed during program execution.

F10 (HDW) Main-Run-HDW (Main screen - Implementation - Flywheel)

When the key is activated F10 (HDW) (flywheel), moving along the axes of the program will apply to electronic handwheel rotation. The feed rate (feed / rev or feed / min) will influence the distance covered in one click flywheel. Four different parameters that influence the distance covered in one click flywheel are listed below.

A. Peripheral flywheel sensor dataThe number of aftershocks / rev electronic handwheel. This value must be equal to 400 for our existing systems.

Two. Starting min / rev The total number of minutes of normal time, the program must comply with one turn the flywheel. The increase in supply (in inches / min) due to this factor will lead to the filing, in inches / turn the flywheel. This value must be approximately .0010 to our existing systems.

Three. Start, max. inch / minThis limits the flow rate, but it is run manually for valid response to the programmed low feed rates. Regulation of other parameters may cause flywheel mismatch error on the situation at speeds greater than 100 inches / min. This value must be equal to about 100 in our current system.

4. The coefficient on startup The coefficient for each click flywheel should be about 100 for our current system.

The coefficient of the start / Number of minutes / circulation at start proportional to the maximum allowable flow rate when manually started.

35


In manual mode, and idle distance covered in one click flywheel true for the Dry Run Feed (feed at idle).

When you switch from manual to automatic message for the operator to press "Start cycle".

If the operator is in manual mode, and the cycle starts tapping, a message appears "Tapping cycle will not be in handwheel mode. Press any key to continue" (The cycle of tapping does not work in manual mode. To continue to press any key.). The machine will perform tapping and return to manual mode.

Help (TlSet) Main-Run-TlSet (Main screen - Implementation - Configuration tool)

If you are not running any programs, help button (TlSet) (Setting tool) serves as a key tool settings. Help button Help (TlSet) is similar to F1 (Start) (Start). If you click it sought Cycle Start (Start of cycle).

A. The operator requested an installation height of the fire. Two. The operator is requested to install the tool number correction. The machine

performs the tool on the tool with this number. Three. The operator manually brings cutting edge tools to size or butt part. He then clicks

on Enter (Enter).4. The operator requested the radius of the tool. Five. Go to number 2.

During the procedure, setting the table tool is loaded with the appropriate values. After downloading the tool offset operator can press the ESC (stop) to exit the setup tool.

Note: This program can be changed for specific applications (automatic device configuration tools, a variety of devices tool change, etc.).

F5 (MDI) Main-MDI (Main Screen - Manual data entry)

Use the F5 (MDI) (Manual data entry) in the main menu, select the function of manual data entry. With it, any machine function can be performed as a function or a block at once. If you select the manual input of data, the following screen appears.

36


RunTime = Period Main-MDI = Main Screen - Manual data entry Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceCorrection: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details: MDI = Manual data entryGCode = G-codes; MCode = M-codes; Displ = map; Done = done

When you type functions, they are displayed in the MDI line at the bottom of the screen. After entering data, you must click on the Enter (Enter) to complete the unit. At a given point of beginning of the loop will execute a string MDI. In manual data entry by pressing the ESC (Exit), you can cancel any command MDI. With the F6 is called a normal graphic image, which was described above. If in manual data entry include graphics, display the extent of implementation will be graphically displayed all the action.

F1 (Gcode) Main-MDI-Gcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - G-codes)

Use the F1 (Gcode), the list of allowed G-code and a brief description of each. Pressing the F1 (Gcode) appears the following list of G-code.

00 Linear Rapid 01 Linear Feed(Linear accelerated motion) (Line feed)02 CW Arc 03 CCW Arc

37


(Clockwise arc) (Counterclockwise arc)04 Dwell 09 One-Shot Exact Stop(Pause) (Single precision stop) 10 Set Data Mode 11 Clear Data Mode(Setup mode data) Mode (data cleansing)12 Clear Floating Zero 17 XY Plane(Clearing the floating zero) (Plane XY)18 XZ or ZX Plane 19 YZ Plane(Plane XZ or ZX) (Plane YZ)20 English 21 Metric(English) (Metric) 22 Safe zone check off 23 Safe zone check on(Check off the safe zone) (Include verification of safe zones)24 Circ Pocket Clear 25 Circ Finish Inside(Clear round deep recesses) (inchickpeas. clean. Rec. circle. depth. seizures)26 Circ Finish Outside 28 Reference Return(Naruzh. clean. processing cycle. the deep recesses) (Back to the zero point)29 Return From Ref 30 2nd-4th Ref Return(Return to zero) (2-4-th return to the zero point)31 Z to Clearance 32 Z to Tool Change(Z in the gap) (Z to change the tool) 33 Facing Cycle 34 Rect Pocket Clear(Loop ends) (Cleaning pryamoug. the deep recesses)35 Rect Finish Inside 36 Rect Finish Outside(Inchickpeas. clean. pryamoug processing. depth. seizures) (naruzh. clean. Rec. straight. depth. seizures)39 Threading Cycle 40 CutterComp Off(Loop threading) (Off correction in the dir. tool)41 Left CutterComp On 42 Right CutterComp On(Including correction of the cutting tool on the left) (Including the correctionI was on scene. Tools For. right)43 + H Offset Dir 44 - H Offset Dir(H + direction correction) (- The direction of the correction H)45 Left Auto Comp On 46 Right Auto Comp On(Incl. autom. Correction dir. Tools For. Left) (Incl. auth. Correction. On scene. Instr. Right)47 Auto Comp Off 49 Cancel Tool Offsets(Disable auto-correction) (Cancellation of corrections to the tool)50 Scaling Off 51 Scaling On(Off scale) (plant scale)52 Local Coordinate 53 Machine Coordinates(Local coordinate) (the coordinates of the machine)54 Worksystem a 55 Worksystem 2(Operating system 1) (Operating System 2)56 Worksystem 3 57 Worksystem 4

38


(Operating system 3) (Operating system 4)58 Worksystem 5 59 Worksystem 6(Operating system 5) (Operating system 6)60 One-Shot Rapid Move 61 Exact Stop Mode(One-time accelerated course) (Exact stop mode)63 Tapping Mode On 64 Tapping Mode Off(Including mode tapping) (Off mode groove. Tapping)65 Move Lockout Block 68 Rotation On(Blocking traffic) (installation of the turn)69 Rotation Off 70 Mirror Image Off(AboutTmenov rotation) (FromNames mirroring)71 Mirror Image On 72 Bolt hole(Installation of mirroring) (Hole bolt)73 Woodpecker Drill 74 Left Tap(Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill) (narezanie thread on the left)76 Fine Bore 78 Manual Bore(Final boring) (Boring manual)80 Canned Cycle Cancel 81 Drill(Abolition of the loop group) (Drilling)82 Drill / Dwell 83 Peck / Drill(Drilling / pause) (Periodic withdrawal of the drill / drill)84 Tap 85 Bore(Narezanie thread) (boring)86 Fast Bore 87 Back Bore(Accelerated boring) (the reverse bore)88 Hard Tap (option) 89 Bore / Dwell(Rigid tapping (optional)) (Boring / pause)90 Absolute 91 Incremental(Absolute size) (Incrementale size)92 Set Floating Zero 93 Inverse Time Feed(Installation of a floating zero) (Supply with delay)94 Inches per Minute 95 Inches per Revolution(Inches per minute) (Inches per revolution)98 Ret to Initial Level 99 Return to R-plane(Return to the initial level) (Back to the plane of R)

Note: A text file showing the allowed G-codes on the screen, - Gcodes.XXX, where XXX is the extension for that language. The device management first looks in the directory Gcodes.XXX RAM (memory). If the file is not found, he searched in the catalog ROM (ROM).

F2 (Mcode) Main-MDI-Mcode (Main Screen - Manual data entry - M-codes)

Use the F2 (Mcode), a list of allowed M-codes with a brief description of each.

00 Program Stop 01 Optional Stop(Stop the program) (Optional stop)02 End of Program 03 Spindle On CW

39


(Completion program) (Including the rotation of the spindle on the hour. Wise)04 Spindle On CCW 05 Spindle Off(Including the rotation of the spindle against the hour. Arrows) (Rotation of the spindle off)06 Tool Change 07 Mist On(Tool change) (Including coolant in the form of oil. Fog)08 Flood On 09 Coolant Off(Including coolant splash) (Off coolant) 30 Spindle Off, End of Program 90 Graph Off(Off the spindle, the completion of the program) (Off chart)91 Graph On 93 3D Sweep Off(Graphics included) (Off 3D scanning)94 3D Sweep On 95 Tapered Wall(Including 3D scanning) (Cone wall)96 Rounded Wall 97 Pocket Clear(Rounded side) (treatment of deep grooves) 98 Call Jump 99 End of Program(Calling program) (completion of the program)

Note: A text file showing the allowed M-codes on the screen, - Mcodes.XXX, where XXX is the extension for that language. The device management first looks in the directory Mcodes.XXX RAM (memory). If the file is not found, he searched in the catalog ROM (ROM). Depending on the options allowed by the machine M codes may vary. File in the directory Mcodes.XXX ROM (ROM) refers to the basic machine without options.

F6 (Displ) Main-Displ (Main Screen - Display)

See the description of F6 (Displ) Main-Run-Displ (Main screen - Implementation - mapping) on page 25, Section 2. In this function you can access from multiple screens.

40


F7 (Parms) Main-Parms (Main screen - Options)

Use the F7 (Parms) on the main screen is displayed next page with parameters.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms = Main screen - Options Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance


Setup = setup; Coord = coordinates; Tool = Tool; D off = correction in diameter; H off = correction in the length; Save = save; Load = load; Prog = Programme; User = user; Done = done

41


F1 (Setup) Main-Parms-Setup (main screen - Options - Settings)

Use the F1 (Setup) displays the parameters that ensure the uniqueness of the control device for a specific machine or application. Pressing the F1 (Setup) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup = Main screen - Settings - Configure Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance


Level = level; Prec = accuracy; Power = power; Axis = axis; Misc = other; OVRs = correction; BSC = correction in the ball-screw pair; DOS = prompt DOS; Done = done

Note: The keys to F2 (Prec) to F9 (DOS) are displayed only if the control device is in secure mode prescribed by the code authentication.

Machines require ID Authentication and Access levels for a number of display resolution or change the settings of the machine. ID authentication and access level can provide the manufacturer of the machine.

42


RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Level = Main screen - Options - Settings-level Active = activeCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceVALIDATION CODE = code authentication Correction: canceled

Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Abort = elimination

Note: The parameters in the configuration sections are usually installed by the manufacturer of the machine. Changing these parameters can affect many functions and performance of the machine, it can be done only by qualified service personnel.

Subject to entering the correct code, you can choose the following page.

43


F2 (Prec) Main-Parms-Setup-Prec (Main screen - Options - Settings - Accuracy)

Pressing the F2 (Prec) (machine precision), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Prec = Main screen - Options - Settings-Precision Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

Decimal precision English Metric Leading Leading End EndCartesianThe angular Spindle Feed


Edit = edit; Done = done

The keys are displayed in the mode of Edit (Edit)

The screen above shows some typical settings for the leading and trailing zeros for different coordinate systems. The number of the leading and trailing zeros are not limited, but there are some practical limits. If the numbers get too large, they will not fit in the space allotted to them on the screen. If they are smaller than the elements of feedback, they will not cause displacement. To change the setting press the F1 (Edit) (Edit). A number of the arrow keys, use

44


them to move the cursor to the desired option and enter a new number. Once all numbers have been edited, press the key ESC (Exit) (Exit) to confirm the new number and a return to the previous screen. These settings apply to all numbers that are entered into the control device, except for the axles, which are set separately in the F4 (Axis) (Axis).

F3 (Power) Main-Parms-Setup-Power (Main screen - Options - Settings - Power)

Power options - are the parameters that relate directly to the machine configuration, and is usually installed by the manufacturer of the machine.

Note: When you edit or enter the parameter values (or any other numeric values in the control device) you can use the built-in calculator.

For example: Instead of 0.3750 can be introduced 3/8 Instead, you can enter 1.3750 1 + 3/8

To change the current value can be used. "," As the current value. If the current value is 0.358, and 0.002 must be added, should be introduced. +0.002 (0.360 instead of typing).

With the F3 key parameters of the power output by default, as shown on the next screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Power = Main screen - Options - Settings-Power Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceChanges in this section affect the inclusion of powerType the front ... STANDARDPanel UL ... noThe opening front panel (Cent7)Video Mode The action items ... G20, the English systemNumber of axlesKeyboard with daisy ... no

Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min)

45


The feed rate when the power is The axis of the spindleThe axis of the primary flywheel sensor (Cent6 and above)Axis 2 of the second flywheel sensor (Cent6 and above)The axis of the third flywheel sensor (Cent6 and above)The new Remote flywheel ... noRW30 new remote handwheel (Cent6) ... noRemote Sensor flywheel

Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit

Front Panel Type: Standard or with membrane keys Mini-Series (A type of front panel)UL Panel: No or Yes if you have a protective relay emergency stop(Panel UL)FP Control Port (Cent 7): The hole for the front of the 1552 standard systems Cent 7 (Aperture control front panel (Cent7))Video Mode: Default settings: 640 x 350 for CRT and 800 x 600 for(Video) LCD monitors

Initial Units are: G20, the English system of measurement, or G21, the metric(Proactive units) system to activate the inch or metric system.

Number of Axes: It can be from 1 to 5. (Axles)Serial Keyboard: Enables or disables the serial keyboard with(Keyboard daisy consistent connection)

The keyboard will transfer through the interface CLK / DATA, and not through the RS-232 interface. This means that the PC will recognize that the keyboard is present when you reboot and hangs with a message such as <PRESS F1 TO RESUME> (Press the F1 to resume.) The keyboard will always recognize the commands via RS-232 or CLK / DATA. If the appropriate command, which does not contain errors, obtained via an RS-232, will transfer via RS-232, rather than CLK / DATA.

Similarly, you can switch back to the interface CLK / DATA. If the appropriate command, which does not contain errors, obtained via CLK / DATA, will transfer through the interface CLK / DATA, not the RS-232.

Since the RS-232 interface is not so interlocked, as the interface CLK / DATA, the following additional requirements are placed in the RS-232 protocol.

A. System administration commands are allowed only in response to the transfer, set the keyboard.

46


Two. To pass the keyboard, it waits for the transfer, and then there is a delay for another two milliseconds before re-checking the keyboard buffer. This delay allows time for the system administration team retransmission or other commands, such as the inclusion of lighting. Since the transfer of a single character takes about one millisecond at 9600 baud, it gives the system of about 1 millisecond of time for data processing.

Three. In order for the system was able to send commands, the keyboard will periodically send a strobe signal. Strobe signal is just a symbol EAh. This symbol is transferred, if the keyboard is not otherwise involved in approximately 30 milliseconds. Then the system can send a command in response to the strobe signal instead of having to wait for the next keystroke.

Hardware and Software

Keyboard with a serial connection is required board keyboard controller REV E with built-in version № 1.21 or higher. Firmware for the motherboard REV E can not be used with previous versions of motherboards and vice versa.

CNC Software Version should be № * .86 or higher.

Keyboard with a serial connection using COM2. Therefore, if used the keyboard with a serial connection, the secondary serial port parameter input and output must be installed on none (no). The secondary serial port parameter input and output can be removed in future versions.

On machines that are configured to use a keyboard with a serial connection, the cable will be modified in a box store. Previously, the incoming cable is split in two, and was brought to the video card and the controller board. Now the cable is split soda and has a 9-pin D-Sub connector for connecting the input-output board. The connector on the input-output board must be configured for COM2 (for supply it is usually configured as COM1).

Enabling the keyboard with a serial connection NC program will use the keyboard interface with a serial connection, if the parameter is set to turn the keyboard Yes (Yes), if the program is executed without command line options.

Otherwise, the program will use the CNC keyboard interface with a serial connection, if the parameter is set to the keyboard Yes (Yes), and the letter "S" appears as an option on the command line.

Keyboard with serial connection is active in the following examples, if the option is also installed on the keyboard yes (Yes).

CNCCNC s (only the keyboard with a serial connection)CNC fs (lights the front panel keypad with a serial connection)CNC as (cycles acroloop, keyboard, serial connection)CNC afs (However, as the lack of options)

47


Keyboard with serial connection is deactivated in the following examples:

CNC n (demo mode)CNC f (lights the front panel)CNC a (cycles acroloop)CNC af (acroloop cycles and lights the front panel) CNC b (Network management unit, Cent 6)CNC bf (The control unit is a network of tubes and the front panel)

Power-On Feedrate: It can be any number up to a maximum flow rate. (Feed rate for the power is on)Spindle Axis: From 1 to 5 1 = X, 2 = Y, 3 = Z, 4 = A. . . etc. (Spindle axis) Usually set to 3 for the axis Z.

Primary HDW Encoder Sensor for use with a primary flywheel. Axis (Cent 6 and up) 7 for standard systems Cent 6, 8 for standard systems(AboutSubscribe the primary sensor Cent 7.Flywheel (Cent6 and above))2nd Handwheel Used for optional dual flywheel system Encoder Axis: (4 if there is an option) (AboutSubscribe 2nd sensor flywheel)3rd Handwheel Used for optional dual flywheel systemEncoder Axis: (5 if there is an option).(AboutSubscribe third sensor flywheel)New remote handwheel: Yes (yes)If you have the option of a new remote handwheel.(New remote flywheel)Remote HDW Encoder: Sensor for use with a remote fly-wheel. (Remote Sensor flywheel)100% Rapid in Run: No (no) means that the correction of the feed rate will (100% faster impact on the accelerated movement.at work) Yes (yes) means that the correction of the feed rate will not

impact on the accelerated movement of in operation.The accelerated movement of up to 100%.

100% Rapid in Dry-Run: No (no) means that the correction of the feed rate will (100% acceleration in the impact on the rapid move to idle mode.idle) Yes (yes) means that the correction of the feed rate has no effect on

the accelerated move to idle mode.The accelerated movement of up to 100%

48


Spindle on in Dry-Run: No (no) means that the spindle will not be included in the (Turning the spindle idle. idle) Yes (yes) means that the spindle will be included in

idle.Tool Tables by: The radius or diameter (Tables instrument for)Don't Load Canned No (no) means that the group will load cycles. Cycles: Yes (yes) means that the group will not load cycles;(Do not download Group cycles (drilling, cutting, frame, etc.) occupy group cycles) approximately 39K of memory. Block Skip On: If there is a Yes (yes), Skipping the block is activated when (Inclusion of missing power-up. block)Optional Stop On: If there is a Yes (yes), A conditional stop is activated when(The conditional power-up.stop)Safe Zone On: If there is a Yes (yes), Is activated when the safety zone (Activation zone power-up.security) With the G22 security zone is turned off.

With the G23 security zone is activated.

Foreign Extensions: Refers to the extension for data files. The current (Foreign expansion) currently expanding are listed below.

CES CZECH (Czech)CHN CHINESE (Chinese)NED DUTCH (Dutch)DAT ENGLISH (English)FRN FRENCH (French)GRM GERMAN (German)ITA ITALIAN (Italian)SPN SPANISH (Spanish)TRK TURKISH (Turkish)

Tool Changer Information (information about the structure of the tool change)

Machine Type: Enter VMD 30 ....(Type of machine)ATC Type is: Manual / Avanti, Milltronics, or other (Type of device changer tool)ATC tool (pocket count): The number of slots in the tool changer(An instrument device changer (Number of nests))

49


Spindle orient delay (MS): The delay of the orientation pin (use 0 for(orientation of the delay rolling pin or by e-orientation)spindle)M6 (Tool Change) Macro: The path and name of the program used for M6(M6 macro (change instrument))Put Pot down on Yes (yes) means that the slot will be omitted for the pending swing arm tool changers: tool.(Lowering of the jacks on the No (no) means that it will be raised. devices change tool with swing arm)Check drawbar switch: Yes (yes) for a new machine with switches traction (Check the switch rod. traction rod)Milltronics ATC is: Plunger, The Maltese 2-stage, Maltese 1 -(Changer landmark, or with a rotary hand tool Milltronics)Milltronics CW Coast: On the tool changer with Maltese (Coasting mechanism uses a Partner clockwise) Milltronics CW Brake: parameters to set the term indexing and (Inhibition of braking device in the direction of the tool change clockwise) clockwise and counterclockwise. Milltronics CCW Coast:(Coasting Estimated value of - 110 to move out of inertia andcounter-clockwise) 60 for braking. Milltronics CCW Brake:(Inhibition against clockwise)Check Air Pressure: If this parameter is set to yes (yes) and pressure(Check pressure low (input Y # 1), the machine will be set to air) emergency stop, and will display an error 448 "Air Pressure Error.

Check air hose connection "(Error air pressure. Check pneumatic hose).

Drawbar Delay: Used for tool changer Partner, as(Delay delay (in seconds) after turning the traction rodtraction rod) and before the head is lifted to remove the instrument to prevent

the tension of the tool holder.

Custom M and G code Tables (Tables of specialized codes M and G)

Custom G code O9010 Custom G code = special G-codeCustom G code O9011

50


Custom G code O9012Custom G code O9013Custom G code O9014Custom G code O9015 Custom G code O9016 You can not get a special G-code for G0Custom G code O9017 Custom G code O9018Custom G code O9019

Custom M code O9020 Custom code = M M-code to a specializedCustom M code O9021Custom M code O9022 Custom M code O9023 Custom M code O9024 Custom M code O9025Custom M code O9026 You can not get a special code for the M-M0Custom M code O9027 Custom M code O9028Custom M code O9029

Parameter file version: Should always be a(Version control file) Use Small Soft keys: Must be installed on no (no) for 12 "CRT monitors(Use of small Multifunction keys)

Notes on the parameters

Note 1: To change the setting press the F1 (Edit) (Edit) and enter a new number.

Note 2: After changing any parameter of the power back to the main menu before you turn off and back on food.

Note 3: Once any of the parameters of power has changed, the machine must be powered off and then on again. These options will only be read after power up.

51


F4 (Axis) Main-Parms-Setup-Axis (main screen - Options - Preferences - Axis)

When you click on F4 (Axis) (Axis), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Axis = The main screen - Options - Settings-Axis Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceLabel the axis addressThe number of pulses per unitMultiplier detectorHome position Reference direction Velocity in the direction of the sourceVelocity in the direction from the starting positionThe speed in the direction of the marker pulse


Label the axis of the address:

Edit = edit; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Esc = exit

The keys are displayed in the mode F1 (Edit) (Edit)

Press the PgUp (page up), PgDn (page down) and the arrows to scroll through the table at the top of the screen. At the bottom of the screen shows how to change the data associated with the position of the cursor at the top of the screen. To edit the values in these tables the cursor is moved using the arrow keys on the desired option from the top of the screen. When you press the

52


F1 (Edit) (Edit), the cursor moves to the bottom of the screen. Next, move the cursor with the arrow keys on the desired axis or option and enter new values on the keyboard. After entering new values press the button ESC (Exit). The new value is entered and the cursor will return to the top of the screen, then you can resume the selection process. Some details may refer to the position of the machine. To edit these settings, or download using the key F4 (Mach), whereby the position X, Y and Z are loaded into the options. Use F5 (M-XY) for X and Y, or press F6 (MZ) for the axis Z. Below is a list of all selected parameters are displayed in this mode, and a description of their functions.

Axis Address Label Code ASCII, assigned to each axis (Address label axis)

X 88.0000Y 89.0000Z 90.0000

Pulses Per Unit The number of pulses issued by the feedback(The number of pulses per unit) per unit of displacement

X 10000.0000 Y 10000.0000Z 10000.0000

Encoder Multiplier Sets the number of embedded multipliers(Multiplier detector) pulses coming from the sensor.

X 02.0000 0 - 1 time, 1 - 2 times and 2 - 4 timesY 01.0000 Z 01.0000

Home Position The size limit for the zero position of the machine(Starting position) or source of

X 00.0000 Y 00.0000Z 00.0000

Home Direction Determines the direction of rotation of the engine at (Initial direction) team set the starting position

X 00.0000 Clockwise = 00.0000Y 00.0000 anticlockwise = 01.0000Z 00.0000

Velocity Toward Home Sets the feed rate at which the axis of seeking(The speed in the direction limit switch starting positioninitial position)

X 60.0000 Y 60.0000 Z 60.0000

53


Velocity Away From Home Sets the speed at which the axis moves away from(The speed in the direction limit switch starting positionfrom the starting position)

X 12.0000 Y 12.0000Z 12.0000

Velocity Toward Marker Sets the speed at which the axis of seeking(The speed in the direction marker pulse sensormarker pulse)

X 02.0000 Y 02.0000 Z 02.0000

Home Sequence These numbers determine the order of axes in the return(The cycle reset starting position:position)

X 02.0000 First number1, then number 2, etc. Axis with the same

Y 02.0000 number back to its original position together. Z 01.0000 0 axis is not returning to its original position.

Positive Limit The distance from the zero position of the machine, which(Positive limit) there is a positive pre-programmed

X 00.0000 limitY 00.0000Z 00.0000

Negative Limit The distance from the zero position of the machine, which(Negative limit) there is a negative programmed

X -31.0000 limitY -18.0000Z - 6.5000

Maximum Feed Sets the maximum feed rate of G01(Maximum feed rate) in inches / min or mm / min

X 200.0000 Y 200.0000Z 200.0000

Dry Run Feed Sets the flow rate at idle (Feed speed at idle in inches / min or mm / mincourse)

X 75.0000 Y 75.0000Z 75.0000

54


Rapid Velocity Sets the maximum feed rate of G00 (Express delivery) in inches / min or mm / min

X 800.0000Y 800.0000Z 800.0000

Acc / Dec Acceleration / deceleration - a number that determines(Acceleration / deceleration) value at which the axis speed increases

X 20.0000 or decreases with respect to motions filing. Than Y 20.0000 lower the number, the longer the acceleration / deceleration

time. Z 20.0000 Acceleration and deceleration in the NC are linear. Units

are expressed as inches / sec ².

Rapid Acc / Dec Faster acceleration / deceleration - a number that (Acceleration / deceleration in specifies the amount at which the axis speed accelerated movement) increases or decreases relative to

X 20.0000 accelerated movement. The smaller the number, the Y 20.0000 longer acceleration / deceleration time. Dispersal and Z 20.0000 inhibition in the NC are linear. Units are expressed as

inches / sec ².

Feed S-Curve Acc The units are identical (linear) acceleration / (Cent 7 and up) inhibition. They are used when s-curves(S-curve acceleration and deceleration activated by movement submission. feeding (Cent 7 and above))

Rapid S-Curve Acc The units are identical (linear) acceleration / (Cent 7 and up) inhibition. They are used when s-curves (S-curve acceleration and deceleration activated with accelerated movement. the accelerated movement of (Cent 7 and above))

Slow Jog Velocity The rate in inches / min or mm / min.(Jog feed on slow speed)

X 50.0000 Y 50.0000Z 50.0000

55


Fast Jog Velocity The rate in inches / min or mm / min.(Jog feed on high speed)

X 200.0000Y 200.0000Z 200.0000

Jog Key Direction Determines whether the Jog to the feed(Direction buttons movement or the movement of the tool table.jog feed) "1" changes direction.

X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000

In Position After any rapid movement of the machine will (In position) wait until the axis will not be in a given

X 00.0050 position before starting the next blockY 00.0050Z 00.0050

G00 Unidirectional Sets the distance in inches or mm, which (Unidirectional G00) axis will take place after a given position in

X 00.0000 one direction before the change directionY 00.0000 so that the machine will always be positioned on Z 00.0000 one direction. Active only in G00.

P1 P2P1

The distance in one direction

G60 Unidirectional The same as the G00, only active in block G60 (Unidirectional G60)

X 00.0000Y 00.0000Z 00.0000

Backlash (Gap) Sets the distance in inches or mm. X 00.0000 The control unit will carry out the correction Y 00.0000 backlash in the reverse axis. Active in all Z 00.0000 modes.

56


Excess Error Sets the distance in inches or mm. (Error error) The machine can keep up with the CNC. NC disconnect

X 00.2500 system because of the mismatch errors. Y 00.2500 = 00.0000 is never an error mismatch. Z 00.2500

Rotary = Linear = 0 1 Specifies whether the axis be circular or (Pie = 0, linear = 1) linear. In the circular axis of the feed rate is expressed

X 01.0000 in degrees / minutes, not in inches / min. For a rotary axis Y 01.0000 do not need to convert between inches and Z 01.0000 the metric system.

Handwheel Normal = 0 Invert = 1 "1" changes the direction of rotation of the flywheel.(Flywheel, normal = 0; reverse = 1)

X +00.0000 Y +00.0000Z +00.0000

English Leading Sets the number of digits to the left of the decimal(The senior ranks point for the inch system, only for the specifiedEnglish) axis

X 02.0000 Y 02.0000 Z 02.0000

English Trailing Sets the number of digits to the right of the decimal(Least significant bit, point for the inch system, only for the specifiedEnglish) axis

X 04.0000 Y 04.0000Z 04.0000

Metric Leading Same as the senior ranks in the British system,(The senior ranks except for the fact that the metric systemMetric)

X 03.0000 Y 03.0000Z 03.0000

Metric Trailing Same as the Junior ranks in the British system,(Least significant bit, except for the fact that the metric systemMetric)

X 03.0000Y 03.0000Z 03.0000

57


Home Switch = Marker = 0 1 Specifies whether the axis of the search for the final(Switch source switch the starting position, then the markerstatus = 0, a marker pulse, or look for the closest marker pulse.pulse = 1)

X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000

Max Handwheel Error When an error is the error reaches a given (Maximum error of the flywheel) value, the pulses from the flywheel are ignored.

X 01.0000 Error is expressed in inches or mm. Y 01.0000Z 01.0000

Tool Change Z moves to this position at the command G32(Changing the tool) (Z up tool changer) or M6 (change of

X + 00.0000 tool). This position is specified in inches orY + 00.0000 mm and refers to the zero position. PositionZ + 00.0000 Tool change the Y axis is used for longitudinal milling

machines. X and Y are used in the tool changer handling type

Tool Changer Spacing (arm style) It is used to avoid placing large (Intervals changer instruments close to each other in the changing devicestool) with a rotary hand tool(With the swing arm)

Gain Proportional (KP) KP in terms of stages of DAC errors (Proportional gain) mismatch.

X + 08.0000Y + 08.0000Z + 08.0000

Gain Velocity (KV) KV in terms of steps per unit of speed DACs. (Growth rate) These units involve a 16-bit DAC

X + 250.0000 (1 bit sign, 15 bits of amplitude), while the four lower Y + 250.0000 bits do not carry a special significance. The units of

velocity Z + 250.0000 in this case are the units / pulse, with a single pulse is

3/4096-nyh seconds. Higher values reduce the mismatch error. Valid values range from 50 to 327.

58


Handwheel Gain (KP) The same as the proportional gain. Smaller (Enhancement of the flywheel) values are used to mitigate traffic

X 04.0000 flywheel. Valid values are within Y 04.0000 from 2 to 8.Z 04.0000

F5 (Misc) Main-Parms-Setup-Misc (Main screen - Options - Settings - Other)

Use the F5 (Misc) (Other) displays a variety of settings related to the spindle, and M-codes. Pressing the F5 (Misc) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-Misc = Main screen - Options - Settings-Other Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

Basic information about the machineType of machineVersion of the machineVersion of a mechanical systemRevision of the electrical systemThe serial number of the machineIncreasing the spindle from the front ... noChecking the acceleration signal (M3/M4) ... noChecking the zero speed (M5) ... noThe number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 1The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 2The number of pulses / rev encoder handwheelRange of spindle speed 1Range of spindle speed 2Range of spindle speed 3Range of spindle speed 4



59


Other parameters are edited in the same manner as the power settings. The following is a list and brief description of other parameters.

Basic Machine Info (Basic information about the machine)

Machine Type Enter VMD30, etc.(Type of the machine)Machine Version The model (Version of the machine)Mechanical Version This version of the mechanical system(Version of the mechanical system)Electrical version This version of the electrical system(Version of the electrical system)Machine serial number The serial number of the machine(The serial number of the machine)Force FP Spindle Yes (yes) for earlier models of Centurion Vs,(Strengthening of the spindle deduced that the analog signal from the spindlethe front panel) the front panel.

Check Up to Speed In (M3/M4) control device will wait (Check the acceleration signal) acceleration signal from the controller's spindle before you

continue on the M3 (spindle rotation clockwise) and M4 (the rotation of the spindle anti-clockwise). From fast moving before filing it expects acceleration signal whenever the switch from G0 to G1. It works well when using a constant cutting speed.

Up to Speed Axis Specifies the axis for the acceleration signal.(The axis of acceleration) Up to Speed Input Specifies the input for overclocking.(Signal input acceleration)Check Zero Speed (M5) The control unit will wait for a signal of zero(Check zero speed) spindle speed of the controller before you proceed on the

M5 (spindle off)

Spindle Encoder PPU1 The number of pulses / rev Spindle used for the(The number of pulses / rev option, rigid tapping andspindle sensor 1) display speed on the transfer of a

Spindle encoder PPU2 Number pulses / rev Spindle used for the (The number of pulses / rev option, rigid tapping andspindle sensor 2) display speed on the transfer of two

Handwheel Encoder PPU The number of pulses / rev flywheel must be 400(The number of pulses / rev for these systemsflywheel sensor)

60


Spindle Range A Max. spindle speed for the transfer A(Frequency range Spindle 1)

Spindle Range 2 Max. spindle speed for the transfer 2(Frequency range .Spindle 2) .

.Spindle Range 8 Max. spindle speed for the transfer 8(Frequency range spindle 8)

Spindle Range Speed range, which is set(Frequency range Spindle: 1 to 8. It is assumed in the range of spindle) Based on the programmed speed, an appropriate voltage.

Maximum Spindle Speed Captures the overall frequency of rotation of the spindle. (The maximum frequency It is used to limit the number of revolutions per minutespindle) in high gear, while leaving a large range of velocities in the

lower gears.

Spindle Ramp Time 1 (sec) Stagnation point with tapping(Acceleration Time 1 spindle adjusted based on the speed (S)) wpindelya, pitch and spindle acceleration time not to

exceed a preset depth. It dates back to the inhibition of spindle, expressed in seconds, before reaching 0 / min from full speed to transfer a.

2 Spindle Ramp Time (sec) Stagnation point with tapping(Acceleration spindle 2 adjusted based on the speed (S)) wpindelya, pitch and spindle acceleration time not to

exceed a preset depth. It dates back to the inhibition of spindle, expressed in seconds, before reaching 0 / min from full speed to the transmission 2.

2 Gear Yaskawa M5 Yes (yes) for the new drive spindle M5 with 2 - Spindle Motor step-motor spindle. Spindle is not(2-stage motor need to stop to switch. Spindle Yaskawa M5)

Electronic Spindle Gear Yes (yes) will activate the electronic switch(Electronic transfer of gear spindle. spindle)

Spindle Gear Box Yes (yes) to RW30 with a manual transmission

61


(Transmission of spindle) spindle.

Hard Tap Fudge Factor Used to adjust the depth of the loop(The configuration parameter rigid tapping. Higherrigid tapping values will lower the amount of excess at the bottom of

eachtapping) holes.

Feed Back on Mitutoyo Scale Yes (yes) enables feedback on the situation in(Feedback on the scale Z-axis of the scale options Mitutoyo.Mitutoyo)

Feed Back on Quill Scale Yes (yes) enables the glass line for options(Feedback on the line quill axis Z.Quill)

Quill Epsilon If the value is zero, the analysis is not conducted(Epsilon sleeve) errors on the movement of quill. If the value is not zero,

moving the sleeve monitored during program execution. If the quill moves, the control unit goes into block mode and displays an error 666 "Quill motion detected, return the quill to it's original position -12.3456" (Quill movement is found, return the quill to its original position - 12.3456). The program execution will not proceed until such time until the quill will not be returned to its original position. Position sleeve at the start (and when changing the tool) is retained and used to compensate for the Z position during program execution.

Quill Scale Encoder Sensor for use with glass line for (The sensor bar sleeve) options quill axis Z.

Quill Scale PPU The number of pulses / inch for the sensor bar sleeve. Back Gear Reverse If the input gear busting detected and indicated Yes(The number of pulses / inch (Yes), the outputs for motion in a clockwise direction andline of Quill, counterclockwise direction reversed. change of gear busting)

Keyboard Code 015 for systems with pay-CAT900, 0 for other (Code keyboard)

Yaskawa Drives Yes (yes)If the drives Yaskawa (Yaskawa Drives(Drives Yaskawa) give a signal of willingness to drive instead of drive signals

a fault)

62


Feedhold G1 and No Spindle If set to Yes (yes), and the spindle is turned off during(Stop feeding G1 and filing the motion, the control unitno spindle) stops supplying the machine, and displays an error message

"Spindle Stopped Feedhold "(The spindle is stopped Stop feeding). When you start the spindle can resume execution of the program (Feed hold off ... Cycle start ... (Disable Stop ... Start feeding cycle) ... and so on, to delete the message.)

Door Open Switch See notes for European Codes (p. 70) In the(Switch open end of this section. doors)

European Code See notes for European Codes (p. 70) In the(European code) end of this section.

Auger Aux (Cent 7 and up) Additional buttons (Aux) front panel can beSetup Aux (Cent 7 and up) used for various functions. For(Additional button for purpose of the button functions Aux1 screw typescrew (Cent 7 and above)) "001", to assign a button function Aux2(Additional button for settings, enter "002" in the parametersettings (Cent 7 and above) )

Door Open Axis See notes for European Codes (p. 70) In theDoor Open Input end of this section. (The axis of the door opening)(Log in opening the door)

Door Open Override Axis See notes for European Codes (p. 70) In theDoor Open Override Input end of this section.(The axis of the abolition of the door opening)(Log cancel opening the door)

Check Tool Door Open If Yes (yes), The input Z 10 is checked prior to issuance(Checking tool Team hand tool change device. Ifwhen the door is open) input is not detected within 15 seconds, an error message

timeout.

Check Chiller Fault If Yes (yes) and there is excess heat,(Check the fault a message about malfunctioncooling devices) cooling.

Chiller Fault Axis Specifies the axis for fault indication(Axis Fault cooling devices. cooling devices)

63


Chiller Fault Input Specifies the input signal of malfunction(Login failure cooling devices. cooling devices)

Cool-Down Time (Min) It is used to stem the flow of the cleaning system(Cent 6 and up) the air. (Cooling time (min) (Cent 6 and above))

Lube Cycle Time It is used on systems of air-oil lubrication(Cent 6 and up) spindle. (Cycle time lubrication (Cent 6 and above))

Recycle Pump Time (Secs) Used on engines coolant through the(Cent 6 and up) spindle.(Time recirculation pump (Sec) (Cent 6 and above))

Max Feed w / Door Open See notes for European Codes (p. 70) In the(Maximum flow rate end of this section.when the door is open)

Soft Start Delay (Secs) The delay time to permit movement of the axes(Delay starter (s)) After rebooting the machine.

Digital Readout in E-Stop If Yes (yes) map position of the axis will be(Digital display in updated even when the emergency stop. emergency-stop mode)

Probe Axis and Probe Specifies the axis and the number of inputs for use withInput commands for the sensor 1 and sensor 2. (The axis of the sensor and sensor input)

Cranking Minutes / Rev How many minutes of normal performance(The number of minutes / v at startup) program corresponds to one turn the flywheel.

Increasing the time of submission (in inches / min), this factor will lead to the filing, in inches / turn the flywheel. This value must be approximately .0010 to our existing systems.

Cranking Factor The coefficient for each click of the handwheel(Ratio at start) approximately 100 in our current system. The coefficient of

the start / min number / proportion of the startup maximum flow rate when manually started.

64


Cranking Max IPM This limits the flow rate, but(Maximum number of inches / rev is run manually forat startup) reasonable response to the programmed low feed rates.

Regulation of other parameters may cause flywheel mismatch error on the situation at high speeds. This value must be equal to about 100 in our current system.

Sharp Corners If you choose to No (no)All sharp edges are(Sharp edges) rounded up to the maximum specified in the parameter

max. deflection angle. If you choose to Yes (yes), Rounding the corners will be proportional to flow rate. At full rate filing will be rounding the corners of the parameters max. deflection angle. At slower speeds, feed the deviation decreases.

Max Corner Deviation This number sets the maximum allowable(Maximum deviation angle) the deviation angle. A value of 0.001 means that the

machine will slow down when approaching a corner more than 0.001 ". (Only Centurion 6)

Min Block Time (sec) If the time to perform an action is less than this(Minimum time unit (s)) value, the control device will slow the feed rate to prevent

giving plenty of movement from a lack of data.

End-of-Cycle Axis and With these two parameters determined whatEnd-of-Cycle Outputs output will be used for a light signal(The axis of the end of the cycle and the end of the cycle.output end of the cycle)

The light signal the end of the cycle does not require programming. The lamp will light up every time there is no traffic during the execution of the program and at the end of the program. This

65

Programmed path

Deviation of the angle

The desired trajectory


will cause the stop block, waiting for the reset tool change, etc. The lamp is extinguished when any key is pressed or the resumption of traffic. The lamp can be lit during the pauses, the automatic tool changer, orientation, etc., but it will go blank when resuming motion machine.

Acc Settling Time (Msec) The period of time maintain a constant speed afterDec Settling Time (Msec) acceleration or deceleration. (Cent 6 and up)(Acceleration time setting (ms))(Deceleration time setting (ms))(Cent 6 and above)

Cylinder Parked Axis See 4, pp. 372, Cylindrical mapping (G107)Cylinder Rotary Axis(Cylindrical axis of the map in the original position)(Cylindrical rotary axis display)

Software Options (Options software)

Security Code # 0 The secret code to activate S-curves (S-Curves)(Passcode # 0 (S-curves))

Use S-curves Yes (yes) to activate the S-curves for acceleration and braking. (Cent 7 and up)(Use S-curves (Cent 7 and above))

Security Code # 1 Secret code for the correction of old guard(Pay Timer) timer.(Passcode # 1 (WDT))

Look Ahead Indicates number of axes of movement, which the device(Cent 6 and up) control can preview what(Advanced view) allows the device to prepare for the management of acute(Cent 6 and above) corners or other elements, which otherwise may be rounded with

increasing flow rate.

Note: The advanced view is activated only in DNC-fast. Valid values range from 10 to 255.

Max graph file size Limits the number of graphics on the screen. (Maximum size 30.000 for standard systemsgraphic file)

Minimum Parts Space If the distance between the parts is less than the(Minimum distance parameter in HF, the system will jump to the page

66


between the parts) cleaning every time a key is pressed in the main menu.

G18 is Plane XZ (X - major axis), or the plane ZX (Z - (G18-it) the main axis)

G93 is 1 /min or 1/sec rate for the inverse supply(G93-it)Special Flags Normally set to 0(Special pins)

Through a bit (# 1) there is a point on the graphical display in the planning of the tool path.

Via bit 2 (# 2) turns off the trigonometric help.

Through bit 3 (# 4) is turned off correction in the cutting tool.

Through bits 5 (# 16) features a disk cutter in the XY plane with the same diameter as that of the active tool.

Through the six-bit (# 32) features a 3-dimensional tool for graphical display.

Ignore Rapids in If you choose to Yes (yes)Accelerated movement willAutoscale ignored in the automatic scaling(Ignore graphics. accelerated movement of with automatic scale)

Remove Length If you choose to Yes (yes), With graphical representation of allfrom Graphics the length of the instrument will be considered equal to 0.(Remove the length of the charts)

Screen Blank Time (min) Time in minutes before switching off the screen if no key(Time to turn off not pressed.screen (min))

Flat Screen Blank Yes (yes) for CRT screens. Some flat screens(Off the plane takes too long to update, ifscreen) parameter is set to Yes (yes).

Use FLZ instead of G54 Used to set the correct operating mode(Use FLZ jog feed or manual mode. Yes (yes) meansinstead of the G54) use of FLZ (correction G92). No (no) means the use of offsets

G54.

67


G5 #-Z in Handwheel Yes (yes) permits the use of keys G5 #-Z mode(G5 #-Z mode flywheel. flywheel)

Tool Setting If set to any tool, the algorithms(Tuning tool) configuration tool jog mode and mode of submission of the

flywheel will be given a prompt to the operator installed the tool room. If it is set to the current tool, the control unit will consider the number of active tool number installed.

Tool Setting Use If set to No (no), The position given byWork Offsets operator applies to the original. If set to Yes(The use of workers (Yes)Given the position relates to the work of correction (this iscorrections when setting useful when setting up the tool off the table and tool)

application of labor adjustment to the top of the Ztool).

Extract Input Programs If set to Yes (yes), The control unit will(Extract remove programs based on 0 # # # in the file, downloaded fromprogram entry) floppy disk drive, or obtained in the RS-232. Program-doubles

overwritten, with no hint is displayed to the operator.

Restrictive Edit Key If this parameter is set to Yes (yes), and the key(Restricted keys editing is enabled, then:editing) From the main menu you can select F2 (Jog) (Jog feed), F3

(HDW) (flywheel) or F4 (Run) (Performing). In the Jog to select only the F1 (Slow) (slow) or F2 (Fast) (Fast). In the HDW can select only the axis X, Y, Z, A or B. In Run mode you can only select F1 (Start) (Start) - F2 (Old) (existing program) or F7 (Menu) (Menu). F3 (Block) (Block), F4 (OStop) (optional stop) and F5 (BSkip) (Pass Block) only displayed. They can not be changed.

P899 As for the special options consult factory.

Resolve DNC programs If you choose to Yes (yes), Goto program can be used in(Resolution DNC (DNC), Run (Execute) or DNC Verf (Check DNC programs) DNC).

Full Dos File Names If you choose to Yes (yes)Can be used by the file names(Full names of the files DOS up to 11 characters [FILENAME.EXT]. At DOS) Pressing "D" in any menu option displays Full Dos File Names

(Full file names DOS).

Disable 417 Errors If you choose to Yes (yes), The parameters can be changed during the

68


(Lock error 417) implementation or testing program. If you choose to No (no)When you try to change the parameter at run-time error will be displayed 417.

Load Tool Offsets Set to Yes (yes) Every time we run(Loading corrections program, or is manual data entry. Correction on the instrument) the tool installed by default on the values from the table tool for

the current tool. If you choose to No (no), The length and radius of the tool will be the default set to zero.

Multiple Block Display If you choose to Yes (yes)During the execution of the program will(The map show running at the time of the block plus seven a few blocks) the following blocks.

CAD Parameters (Parameters CAD)

CAD Type is, DXF, CDL Type of CAD file to import dialog (Type of CAD, DXF, CDL) programming.

CAD Epsilon Tolerance for geometric intersection of imported (Epsilon CAD) Files CAD.

Post M codes Table (Table future M-code)

Post M code # 0 Post M code = following M-codePost M code # 1Post M code # 2Post M code # 3Post M code # 4 These are M-codes will be Post M code # 5 performed after all other operations Post M code # 6 within the block. Post M code # 7Post M code # 8Post M code # 9

Report File Filenames DOS, in which the text is written(Report file) DPRINT using POPEN P0

Command Name Any line in this parameter will appear in the (Team name) key F10 (Util) (Utilities). Pressing the F10 will execute the

file DOS, associated with the command name. See more details about this feature on page 142.

69


PULSEX pulse delay (MS) Pulse delay time in milliseconds that is used to (Pulse delay time PULSE0 and PULSE1PULSEX (ms))

Spindle Power Raw Value read from the ADC is 0 to 255(Spindle power source)

Spindle Power Scale Multiplier to obtain the power values (Scale of spindle power) Spindle

Spindle Power Value (AMPS) Calculated on the basis of the initial capacity and(Power the scale of the spindlespindle (amp))

Spindle Power Limit (AMPS) Not applicable(Limit of spindle power (Amp))

European Code Parameter and Operation Descriptions (descriptions of the parameters and the functioning of European codes)

Door Open Switch Activate the switch is open the door(Switch open doors)

European Code Activate the door opening button(European code)

Door-Open axis Axis №, which gets the input-switch door (The axis of the door opening)

Door-Open-Input Log №, which gets the input-switch door(Entrance door opening)

Door-Open-Override Axis Axis №, which enters the cancel button (The axis of the abolition of opening the door opening the door)

Door-Open-Override Input Input №, which enters the cancel button (Entrance cancel opening the dooropening the door)

Max Feed with Door Open The maximum speed of the machine when the door is open, (Maximum speed If you click cancel opening the door filing with the door open)

70


Soft Start Delay (secs) The delay time to permit movement of the axes(Delay starter (s)) After rebooting the machine.

Software related to European codes for opening the safety door switch. Below is a description of the software relative to the button Set Up (Configure), and the parameters of the software.

Only if the switch is activated by opening the doorWhen the door is opened, turns off the spindle, and stop feeding the machine. When the door is opened, the spindle will not start. When the door is open, you can not make manual data entry, filing shaking, the machine will not operate in a mode of execution, however, you can do the job manually using the handwheel. The machine will perform the functions associated with I / O, except the inclusion of the spindle (ie, manipulation of the rotary arm, connecting rod, etc.). If the machine performs the tapping, and the door opened, he finishes the operation, will make stops feeding and stop the spindle.

If the door is opened during operation of the machine:A Spindle off.2 Stop the movement along the axis. 3 Stop feeding the lamp lights up. 4 The spindle will not start again.

To continue:A Close the door (lights Cycle Start (Start of cycle)). 2 Click on the button CW (Clockwise) on the front panel (spindle run again). 3 Click on the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle) on the front panel (Cycle Start

stop flashing and the indicator goes off Feedhold (Stop feeding)).

If the machine does not work, and the spindle does not work, opening the door will have no impact on the machine. However, the indicator lights Feedhold (Stop feeding).

If the switch is activated by opening the door and the European Code When the door is open, what happens when you press the button door open (Opening door), the spindle is turned off, and stop feeding the machine going. When the door is opened, the spindle will not start. When the door is open, you can not make manual data entry, filing shaking, the machine will not operate in a mode of execution of the program, it will not run in the flywheel. If the machine performs the tapping, and the door opened, he finishes the operation, and then make stops feeding and stop the spindle.

If the door is opened, the machine will allow the device to change the tool indexed by only one position while using the utility tool change or customize the tool.

If the door is opened and the button is held Setup (Settings), the machine with jog feed enters the parameter Max Feed with Door Open (ipm) (max. flow rate with the door open (inches / min)).

If the door is opened and the button is held Setup (Settings), the machine comes with the flywheel up to speed on the switch 50% correction of the feed rate that is 0.1 mm / click

71


flywheel. (It is difficult to generate speed in excess of 1000 mm / min in this mode). Change the distance to a mouse flywheel also require a password, which can only be obtained from the manufacturer of the machine.

If the door is opened during operation of the machine:A Spindle off.2 Stop the movement along the axis. 3 Stop feeding the lamp lights up.4 The spindle will not start again.

If a key is pressed Setup (Settings), the machine will move with a fixed feed rate until the button is held.

To continue:A Close the door (lights Cycle Start (Start of cycle)). 2 Click on the button CW (Clockwise) on the front panel (spindle run again). 3 Click on the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle) on the front panel (Cycle Start

stop flashing and the indicator goes off Feedhold (Stop feeding)).

F4 (FdOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-FdOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the feed rate)

Use the F4 (FdOvr) output settings feedrate. These settings determine what percentage will be used for each of the 16 switch positions feedrate. (Enter 5-040 means 40% at 5-position, 1 - a 0%, 2 - 10%, 3 - 20% ... 16 - 0%.) The following screen appears when you select F4 (FdOvr). To edit these settings to select F1 (Edit) (Edit) and move the cursor to the value you want to change. Enter the desired change and press Enter (Input).

72


RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-FdOvr = Main screen-Options-Settings-Correction-correction flow rate Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceSettings feedrate Correction: canceled


Edit = edit; FdOvr = feed rate correction; HwOvr = correction of the flywheel; SpOvr = correction of the spindle; Back = back


73


Exit = Exit

F5 (HwOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the flywheel)

Use the F5 (HwOvr) (Correction of the flywheel) output switch settings for flywheel switch feedrate. These settings determine how the axis will move one step flywheel (001 = 1 unit). Editing is performed in the same manner as that for the parameters of feedrate. The next screen displays the settings correct flywheel.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-HwOvr = Main screen-Options-Settings-Correction-Correction flywheel Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceCorrection settings flywheel Correction: canceled




74


Exit = Exit

F6 (SpOvr) Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr (Main screen - Options - Settings - Correction - Correction of the spindle)

Use the F6 (SpOvr) 16 switch settings are displayed correct spindle. These settings are the percentages by which the correction will be made in each spindle command line switch position. Correction parameters are changed the spindle in the same manner as the parameters of feedrate. Screen adjustment spindle is shown below.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-OVRs-SpOvr = Main screen - Options - Settings-correction-correction of spindle Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

75


Settings adjustment spindle Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:



Exit = Exit

F7 (BSC) Main-Parms-Setup-BSC (Home Screen - Options - Settings - Correction to the ball-screw pair)

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Setup-BSC = Main screen - Options - Settings-correction on the ball-screw pair Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

76


Information about the correction in the ball-screw pair

The new gap - 0.5000

A: Off.Y: Off.Z: off.


New = new; On = ON.; Off = off.; Load = load; Gap = gap; Edit = edit; Done = done

Help to create a table of correction on the ball-screw pair

Enter X, Y, Z (A, B, C) to select the axis. With the help of F1 (New) (New) creates a new, blank table is ball-screw pair. With the F2 (On) (On) the correction is included in the ball-screw pair for a given axis. With the F3 (Off) (Off) turns off correction in the ball-screw pair for a given axis. With F4 (Load) (download) table of ball screw pair is loaded into the axle. With F5 (Gap) (gap) varies in the range of file ball screw pair, created by F1 (New)

(New). With F6 (Edit) (Edit) to edit the transition table ball screw pair.

With F7 (4 <> 6) is selected 4 or 6 decimal places in your ball-screw pair, generated by F1 (New) (New).ESC (Done) (Done).

F9 (DOS) Main-Parms-Setup-DOS (Main screen - Options - Preferences - Tip DOS)

Pressing the F9 (DOS) is out of the NC program and returns to the tip DOS.

77


F2 (Coord) Main-Parms-Coord (Main screen - Options - Contact)

Use the F2 (Coord) (coordinates) on the options screen displays the parameters associated with the different coordinate systems control device. To modify the operating parameters of coordinates to use key PgUp (page up), PgDn (page down) and the arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired setting, then press the key F1 (Edit) (Edit) and point the arrow to the desired axis. Enter the new value and press Enter (Enter), Then the ESC (Exit) (Exit). The next screen shows the G92, G52 and the parameters of the production system G92/G52/54-59, described in the G-codes. On the next page of this screen are options for this.

Positive Safe Zone Position relative to the initial position of the machine, (A positive safety zone) which, together with a negative situation X 00.0000 Safe Area, describes the cube, which

Y 00.0000 tool can not enter. If the instrument Z 00.0000 programmed in the cube, you will see an error.

Negative Safe Zone G22 turns off the safety zone (The negative safety zone) G23 includes the safe zone

X 00.0000 Y 00.0000 Z 00.0000

G28 Reference Point 1 Described in Section 4, page 295.G30 Reference Point 2G30 Reference Point 3 Reference Point = reference pointG30 Reference Point 4

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Coord = Main screen - Options - Contact Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

78


Work = Working WorkCoords = working positionSubset = a subset



It should be noted that working with the coordinates of the G54 to G59 are subsets. To view / edit, for example, labor adjustment G573 move the cursor to work four-coordinate (G57), then switch (F3) for as long as the subset will not be reading 3.


Mach = Mach number; Esc = exit

The functioning of the working coordinate systems G92 and G52 described in section 4, page 369 (G92), and p 330 (G52). These parameters are the positions relative to the zero point of the machine and become a new zero point of their use. Use the F4 (Mach) in the edit mode is entered the current state of the machine as the zero point of the working coordinates for X, Y, and Z. Use the F5 (M-XY) coordinates are introduced only to the axes X and Y. Use the F6 (MZ) is introduced only for the coordinate axis Z.

79


F3 (TOOL) Main-Parms-Tool (main screen - Options - Tools)

Use the F3 (Tool) (tool) displays the following screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Tool = Main screen - Options - Tools Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceTool = ToolLengths = lengthDiameters = diameter


Exit = exit

The cursor defaults to the number sent to the active tool.

The process of editing on this screen is the same as on all other screens Parms (parameters). When selecting F3 displays a table of tool length (H) and Table tool radius (D). The value entered in the string length, T04, introduced also in H04. The value entered in the string radius, T04, also introduced in the D04. This entry screen is there, mostly for convenience, it is useful if the correction of H and D are associated with the corresponding T-numbers.

Note: In the control device can be modified with respect to the use of the radii of the tool instead of the diameters. When editing tool offset current value of the right side of the edited

80


value, so that small quantities can be easily added to or subtracted from the values of the correction.

F4 (D Off) Main-Parms-D Off (Home Screen - Options - Correction in diameter)

Use the F4 (D Off) displayed 99 D corrections to the radius or diameter, available in NC. These corrections are evaluated and edited in the same manner as the other parameters. The following shows the screen D-corrections.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-D Off = The main screen - Options - Correction to the diameter of the Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceTool Diameters = diameter of tool Correction: canceled


Exit = exit


81


F5 (H Off) Main-Parms-H Off (Home Screen - Options - length compensation)

Use the F5 (H Off) displayed 99 H corrections to the length of the tool available to the control device. These corrections are evaluated and edited in the same manner as the other parameters. The following screen shows the H-correction.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-H Off = The main screen - Settings - Adjust the length of the Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceTool Diameters = tool length Correction: canceled


Exit = exit


F6 (Save) Main-Parms-Save (Home Screen - Options - Save)

Use the F6 (Save) saves all the files in RAM (memory) on a floppy disk. You will be informed that the duplicate files to a floppy disk will be overwritten. Then you will be prompted to confirm this by pressing the F1 (Ok).

82


F7 (Load) Main-Parms-Load (Main screen - Options - Load)

Download files from floppy disk to the directory RAM (memory). You will be informed that the current settings will be overwritten. Then you will be prompted to confirm this by pressing the F1 (Ok).

F8 (Prog) Main-Parms-Prog (Main screen - Options - Program)

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Prog = Main screen - Options - Program Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceThe previous position of P200R208 Current SituationPrevious R216 machineR224 Current MachineR232 Working Correction P240 Correction to the toolR248 radius of the arcR249 The value of i arc


Previous position

Exit = exit

This parameter set gives access to all machine programmer's internal parameters used by the CNC program. Typically, these parameters are used only for display purposes as an aid in debugging the program. However, you can read and modify these parameters in a parametric program. This should be done with great caution, because these parameters are used directly to NC for the next move or function. These parameters are displayed and edited in the

83


same manner as the parameters of the coordinates. Below is a list and description of these parameters.

From P200 to P207 Contains the previous specified position relative to the current working-axis correction activated P200 = X P201 = Y P202 = Z. . . etc.

On the P208 for P215 Contains the current desired position relative to the current working-axis correction activatedP208 = X P209 = Y P210 = Z. . . etc.

From P216 to P223 Contains the previous position of the machine relative to the zero point of the axis of the machine is activatedP216 = X P217 = Y P218 = Z. . . etc.

From P224 to P231 Contains the current state of the machine relative to the zero point of the axis of the machine is activatedP224 = X P225 = Y P226 = Z. . . etc.

From P232 to P239 Contains the coordinates of the correct working of the machine relative to the zero point of the axis of the machine is activatedP232 = X P233 = Y P234 = Z. . . etc.

From P240 to P247 Contains the parameter length of the active tool (H) for the activated axis P240 = X P241 = Y P242 = Z. . . etc.

P248 Contains the current radius of the arc

P249 Contains the current value of I or J or K arc

P250 Contains the current value of I or J or K arc

P251 The current feed rate in inches / min or mm / min

P252 Current shutter time

P253 Current spindle speed

From P254 to P258 Last performed by the values of X, Y, Z, A, B, C

P260 Contains a number of the active tool

P261 Contains the active tool radius D

84


P262 H contains the length of the active tool

P263 Contains the number of active correction of D

P264 Number of active correction H

P266 Contains the status of the safe zone and excessive speed (0 = off., 1 = on.)

P267 Contains the ratio of the pulses from the sensor feedback to program units (1 - inch, 0.03937 for metric system)

P268 The expected number of tools

From P270 to P274 time i, time j, k time

From P273 to P299 It is used as a temporary memory

From P300 to 303 Modal Modal 00-03

P304 Status if the control device is in data processing or normal programming (0 = off., 1 = on.)

P305 The direction or sign of the correction H

P306 Status Mode 0 = G0, 1 = G1, 2 = G2, 3 = G3

P307 Not used

P308 Number of active planes 0 = G17 (X4), 1 = G18 (ZX), 2 = G19 (YZ), 3 = G18 (XZ)

P309 The status of compensation for the cutting tool 0 = G40, 1 = G41, 2 = G42, 5 = G45, 6 = G46

P310 Current number of active cycle of group0 = Canceled (CANCELLED), 1 = Drill (Drill), 2 = Drill / Dwl (Drilling / Pause), 3 = Peck I (Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill I), 4 = Tap (tapping), 5 = Bore (Boring), 6 = Bore II (Boring II), 7 = Peck II (Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill II), 8 = Hard Tap (rigid tapping), 9 = Bore / Dwl (Boring / Pause), 10 = Left Tap (Tapping the left), 11 = Cir Pck Clear (Clear round deep grooves), 12 = Cir Fin Inside (Finishing the internal processing of deep circular cut-outs), 13 = Cir Fin Outside (Fine surface treatment of deep circular cut-outs), 14 = Rec

85


Pck Clear (Clear deep rectangular grooves), 15 = Rec Fin Inside (Finishing the internal processing of deep rectangular grooves), 16 = Rec Fin Outside (Fine surface treatment of deep rectangular grooves), 17 = Threading (Threading), 18 = XZ sweep (sweep XZ), 19 = YZ sweep (sweep YZ)

P311 0 = The absolute, 1 = Incremental mode

P312 Supply unit (0 - Submission / min, 1 - Submission / v, 2 - the reverse flow)

P313 Spindle Units (0 - r / min, 1 - constant cutting speed)

P314 The direction of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise or counter-clockwise

P315 0 = inches, 1 = Metric

P316 Scale (0 = off., 1 = on.)

P317 Rotation (0 = off., 1 = on.)

P318 Mirror Image (0 = off., 1 = on.)

P319 The current number of working coordinates (G54 = 1, G55 = 2 ... G59 = 6)

From P320 to P322 Gets the primary, secondary and tertiary axis of the plane on the basis of selectionX = 1 Y = 2 Z = 3. . . etc.For the G17 XY prim = 1 sec = 2 t = 3For the G18 ZX prim sec = 3 = 1 t = 2For the G19 YZ prim = 2 sec = 3 t = 1For the G18 XZ prim = 1 sec = 3, t = 2

P323 0 = Return to the plane of the R (G99), a = initial level (G98)

P324 Tapping mode (0 = off., 1 = on.)

P369 The processing time (the amount of run-time programs)

P370 The actual number of tools used for the tool changer

Block Rate The number of blocks per second for the last of the running

86


(Frequency blocks) programs

F9 (CTRL) Main-Parms-CTRL (Main screen - Options - CTRL)

This parameter set is a superset of F8 (Prog) (Program). This group deals primarily with the parameters used for the automatic creation of standard programs and group loops. These parameters can be checked and changed in the same manner as all other parameters are the control device. Below is a list and description of these parameters.

Load Text Cycles Yes (yes) cycles to load the engraving text. If(Download text cycles) set to No (no)And the text runs the team, you will be an

error 578 "Undefined text cycle" (Uncertain text cycle).

Offset Round Tapered See Description M95 and M96 (p 387 and 391, Section 5) Walls (Correction of curved and tapered walls)

Spindle Range At what range of gears is the spindle (Range of rotation spindle)

Chip Remove On (Min) If the machine is equipped with a screw removal system(Removal of chips chips, it will be the time during whichinc. (Min)) auger will run after the M38 or pressing a button Auger

(Screw) on the front panel.

Wash Down On (Sec) During operation, the screw with the dataWash Down Off (Sec) parameters of time on and off(Washing incl. (S)) wash-around(Washing off. (S))

Sort Directories by Name If you select yes (yes), the menus are sorted (Sort directories alphabetical order by the 1st line of code.by name) Note: this option is invoked by pressing the "N" from any

menu.

Drive Key on Menus If you select yes (yes) key gives aid(Key disk in the menu) the operator to select the drive for the menu. It allows the

operator to select a new directory for the menu.

Auto Rotary Brake If you choose to Yes (yes) is automatic(Automatic control of rotational axis on the brake A and B. Thisrotary brake) brake is turned off before the circular movement, and

turned back on after the move. If you select No (no), to

87


enable / disable the brakes need M10/11 and M12/13. Note: If you change this setting to turn the power off and then on again.

Rotary Brake Delay (Secs) This delay, measured in seconds after M11(Rotational latency (Inhibition of the axis A) and M13 (disinhibitionbrake (s)) axis B). It is also a time delay after automatic release in

the modes of Home, Jog and Handwheel. Default - 0.25 sec, max - 2.55 seconds.

Ignore Tool too Large Errors If you choose to Yes (yes) control device will be(Ignore the error, ignore the error 569 and cut the corner whentool compensated arc too small. too large)

Pre Check Software Limits Never (ever), Run Only (only in Run), or (Pre-screening Always (always). Never: the control unit programmed never checks the programmed limits.limits) Early versions of the software to work that way. Error-

programmed limits is issued, if the axis is moved outside. Run Only: checks are not performed in the test mode. During the execution of the program will be tested, do not move if any of the axes of the outside, prior to displacement. In the graphical representation of the course will be shown, but the machine will not implement it. This can prevent the collision, when the movements are fast moving beyond. In earlier versions of the accelerated movement was carried to the limits, and it was impossible to stop before the limit switch and / or a hard stop. Always: the control unit will monitor does not go there any axis beyond in the performance of the program or during the scan. The graphical display will show the progress, but the machine will not implement it. It may be useful to test the program before you implement it.

Tool Load Flag Limit Exceeded (Limit exceeded) or Limit not(Check downloads Exceeded (limit is not exceeded)tool)

Tool Load Monitor Currently there are six options: (Sensor load tool)

Off There will be no control of the tool /(Off) spindle. E-Stop If the limit is exceeded, the machine switches to

88


(Emergency stop) emergency stop, and it will be shown the appropriate message.

Feed Hold If the limit is exceeded, the machine will perform shutdown

(Stop feeding) submission, and will display a corresponding message.Block Mode On If the limit is exceeded, the machine switches to (Including mode Lock (Block Mode), and will be shownLock) an appropriate message.Set Flag-No Message If the limit is exceeded, the machine will set the check

box. (Setting flag - Messages will not be shown. Flag - PB418. lack of communication) program can check this option to see whether the limit

has been exceeded, and perform the variable operation, switch to another instrument, etc. The operator can also see the state (or a change of state) flag in the parameters of CTRL. The parameter "Tool Load Flag" (download the tool box) has two states: Limit Exceeded (limit exceeded) or Limit not Exceeded (limit is not exceeded).

Message Only If the limit is exceeded, only shows (Only report) message.

The following message appears:

The sample is made only in the movements of supply (G1, G2 and G3). Sampling is not performed when the accelerated movements (G0). Sampling is carried out only during acceleration drive spindle when the program is executed and the spindle is turned on. Necessary to stabilize the load of the spindle after any change in the number of its revolutions per minute. This requires that the program was expecting about 5 seconds after the dissolution or any change in the correction to the frequency of rotation of the spindle. Time is hard-coded (no option). Time is based on the configuration of two-speed spindle at 8000 rev / min. Various actuators, spindles and / or drive parameters can affect the time delay.

89

Load a tool spindle has exceeded the limit of 64, the load was 66


Limits (Limits) and the maximum load (Max load) for each instrument are shown in the table below the instrument. If the limit is zero for the instrument will not be held control of the tool / spindle. The upper value (High) is not reset until the operator resets the value in the tool table. Initially, the operator will carry out the program and then watch the upper values for each instrument. For an instrument that he would like to check, it loads the appropriate limits on the basis of the upper values obtained in the course of the program.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-Tool = Main screen - Options - Tools Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceTool = Tool Lengths = lengthDiameters = diameterLimit = limitHigh = higher value of


Exit = exit

It controls only the tools 1 to 25, they will have these options. Column load spindle will also have a number associated with it.

Watch Spindle up to Speed If set to YES (Yes), the device(Tracking signal Management will monitor the dispersal of the signal.

90


Spindle acceleration) The control unit will not produce the track during a specified time after starting the spindle or after manual correction of spindle speed. Time is based on the parameters of the MISC - Spindle Ramp Time 1 (Acceleration spindle 1) (if it is on the transfer of 1) or 2 Spindle Ramp Time (Ramp-up time spindle 2) (if it is to any other transfer). If the acceleration signal is not observed, the control unit stops the supply of the machine, and a message appears: "The spindle up to speed signal was lost while the spindle was running. The spindle may have stalled. "(Spindle acceleration signal was lost during the work spindle. Perhaps the spindle stopped.). It should be noted that the acceleration only applies to the engine speed when the drive operates in the flux vector. This means that the MC5, or G5, running with the vector of open-loop system will not work in the above manner, since the acceleration is related to the frequency of the drive, not the actual engine speed.

Serial Port Data (serial data)Note: Com-port, baud rate baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits are the parameters for communication. See more details on page 128, Section 4 of F4 (RS232).

Primary Serial Port NONE, COM1 or COM2(Primary serial port)

COM1 Baud Rate 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200(COM1, baud rate data baud rate)

COM1 Parity, Data N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, and Stop Bits E/7/2, E/8/1, E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2(COM1, parity, Information and stop bits)

COM2 Baud Rate 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200(COM2, transfer rate data baud rate)

COM2 Parity, Data N/7/1, N/7/2, N/8/1, N/8/2, E/7/1, and Stop Bits E/7/2, E/8/1, E/8/2, O/7/1, O/7/2, O/8/1 or O/8/2(COM2, parity, Information and stop bits)

91


Secondary Serial Port NONE, COM1 or COM2(Secondary serial port)

Tape Start Character Value ASCII, is used to send in(A symbol of starting tape) the opening of the port com-

Tape Stop Character Value ASCII, is used to send in(The symbol of the stop band) closing of the port com-

RS232 Buffer Size One for users who are long (Buffer size RS232) connect the RS-232, and 255 to improve the RS-232 to

DNC

LF in change to CR Yes (yes) means a change of carriage returns,(Line in received on the RS-232, a transfer linechanges to the return carriage)

End of Block Send Yes (yes) means sending a carriage return / transferCR / LF lines at the end of blocks that are sent to the RS-232(Send the return carriage / linefeed at the end of block)

RS232 EOF Character The value of ASCII character sent by the end of(Mark the end of File sent to the RS-232File RS232)

92


Digitizing Parameters (Parameters digitizing)

P100 Digitizing Proportional gain(P100 Digitizing)P101 Digitizing The integral gain (P101 Digitizing)P102 Digitizing Differential gain(P102 Digitizing)P103 Digitizing Step subskanirovaniya (P103 Digitizing)P104 Digitizing Detailed angle (P104 Digitizing)P105 Digitizing The gap sensor (P105 Digitizing)P106 Digitizing The radius of the sensor (P106 Digitizing)P107 Digitizing Submission 1 - Picks (P107 Digitizing)P108 Digitizing Submission 2 - Search (P108 Digitizing)P109 Digitizing Submission 3 - removal (P109 Digitizing)P110 Digitizing Vibration Sensor(P110 Digitizing)P111 Digitizing Activation of the walls of the search(P111 Digitizing)From P120 to P139 It is used for seizures in 3 dimensions

P140 The size of the plane R

P141 The final depth of the loop group

P142 The initial level of the group cycle

P143 Step-cycle group

P144 The first cycle of the depth of the group

P145 The feed rate of the tertiary axis for group cycle

P146 The distance to the discontinuous chip removal cycle

P147 The distance R to the plane of each cycle periodic withdrawal of the drill

93


P148 and P149 The time delay for the group of cycles

P150 The radius of circular recesses in automatic programs, Rectangular recesses in automatic programs, the radius of curvature of the angle

P151 The size of the rectangular recesses X

P152 The size of the rectangular recesses Y

P153 Finishing allowance for the XY automatic programs

P154 Finishing allowance Z for automatic programs

P155 Cutting width in automatic cleaning programs seizures

P156 The radius of the bolt holes cycles

P157 The initial angle of bolt holes

P158 Number of bolt holes at 360 °

P159 Number of bolt holes that you want to drill

From P160 to P171 Working memory

From P172 to P179 The coordinates for the center position for the team for the mirroring axis is activated P172 = X P173 = Y P174 = Z. . . etc.

From P180 to P187 The coordinates of the center axis scaling for the activatedP180 = X P181 = Y P182 = Z. . . etc.

From P188 to P195 The scale factor for each of the axes of the activatedP188 = X P189 = Y P190 = Z. . . etc.

P196 Regulation I, J, K the center of rotation of the primary axis

P197 Regulation I, J, K the center of rotation of the secondary axis

94


P198 Angle of rotation

P199 Automatic program incision / Z-axis deviation0 = incision, a = slope

P346 Cycles used G76 (Finishing boring) and Bore Relief Angle G87 (reverse bore) for orientation and (Back corner of the hole) distance from the hole

P347 Same as P346Bore Relief Distance(Distance to the rear the angle of the hole)

F10 (User) Main-Parms-User (main screen - Options - User)

This set of 100 parameter is reserved for the programmer to handle parts for use in the writing of parametric programming. These parameters are not defined, you can edit, display or download from this screen. Formats, editing and display identical parameters described in this section. See information about programming options in Section 5.

RunTime = Period Main-Parms-User = main screen - Options mPolzovatel Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

95




F8 (Prog) Main-Prog (main screen - the Program)

Centurion at the control device has two modes of creation / editing of program files: text and dialogue. Pressing the F8 (Prog) (Program) is activated by a functional keyboard, and you can select the type of programming. It also allows you to transfer programs from floppy disks, and on him.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog = Main screen - Program Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

96



Text = text mode; Conv = interactive mode; Files = Files; Edit = edit; Esc = exit

Test and interactive programs are stored in the control unit in different file formats and have different prefixes for their differences. Text of the program have to prefix the letter "O" and stored in the machining of parts in ASCII. Dialog programs are stored in the machining of parts in two formats: ASCII, with the prefix "O"; and in the dialog - the prefix "P".

Only programs with the prefix "O" can be carried out or verified.

F1 (Text) Main-Prog-Text (main screen - Program - Text mode)

If you switch to text mode programming in the top right of the cell containing the number of active programs that will be displayed last edited the test program.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text = Main Screen-Program-Text Mode Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

97



Edit = edit; New = new; Old = previous; Any = any; Menu = menu; Esc = exit

F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Text-Edit (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit)

Use the F1 (Edit) (Edit), select the program shown in the upper right corner, as an active editable text program.

Terms of text editing

Program The program allows you to input and changeEditing: information, then save it to a file for retrieval and / or further changes in the

future.

Lyrics: Refers to the edited sequence of characters and / or rows. Manipulation of the individual characters are produced by the widespread American standard code exchange (ASCII).

Cursor: The small square on the screen, marking where the text changes were made.

Writing and editing text

Text is entered in the same way as he was introduced to using a typewriter, and most of the keys on the keyboard correspond to the standard layout (such as pressing Enter to complete block). However, one should pay attention to many important differences.

The cursor always points to that which will be introduced a new text, you can move the cursor in several ways. You can copy and move through the test block commands. You can place a line of text using the F8 (Find) (Find) and additionally to replace it with another string using the F7 (Chang) (Edit). And, in most cases, you can even undo some recent changes with the help recovery teams line F2 (Rest) or F1 (UnDo) (Cancel). These commands and others are summarized in the following sections.

98


The first screen you see when you log into a text editor - it's edit screen, which displays the first 16 lines of code. The main function keys are located at the bottom of the screen editing.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Edit = Home screen, program-text-editing mode Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance


Block = block; Cursr = cursor; Words = words; Misc = other; Ins = insert; Delete = delete; Exit = output; Verf = check

Now you can enter text at the current cursor position.

99


Definitions of keys

F1 (Block) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Block (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Block)

Block - is any arbitrarily defined, continuous element of the text. The block may consist of one character, and of the entire program. Mark the block by placing a marker at the beginning of the block the first character the desired block, and handle end of the block - just the last character. Once it is marked, the block can be copied, moved or deleted.

Although the marked blocks, as a rule, stand out, so you can see the marked, the block can be Hide (Or see) with the command to hide the block F5 (Hide).

F1 (Begin) Marks the beginning of the block. The very visible marker on the screen, and the block

(Top) becomes visible only when the marker is the end of the block.

F2 (End) Marks the end of the block. As early marker block, marker of the end (End) block invisible, and the block will not appear until they install both markers.

F3 (Word) Marks a word as a unit, combining the functions of the commands start (Word)block and end block. When the cursor within a word, that word will be marked. If

it is not within a word, the word will be marked on the right of the cursor. If the right of the cursor is not the word, the word will be marked on his left.

F5 (Hide) Turns off the mark, and includes a visual block. (Hide)

F6 (Del) Deletes the marked and displayed block. While using the (Delete) F1 (UnDo) (Cancel), you can usually recover accidentally deleted part of

the block there is no command to restore the block completely, so this command should be used with caution.

F7 (Copy) Creates a copy of the marked and displayed block in the current(Copy) the cursor position. Initiallyth block remains unchanged, and the markers are

placed around a new copy of the block.

100


F8 (Move) Moves marked and displayed block from its current(Move) position to the cursor. Markers are around the block in its new position.

F2 (Cursr) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Cursr (Main screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Cursor)

The menu F2 (Cursr) (cursor) contains advanced cursor motion commands:

F1 (BBlok) Moves the cursor to the beginning of the marker block.

F2 (EBlok) Moves the cursor to the position of the bullet end of the block.

F3 (Tab) Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word.

F5 (TOF) Moves the cursor to the first character of the program.

F6 (EOF) Moves the cursor to the last line of code.

F7 (PgUp) Moves the cursor up 15 lines.

F8 (PgDn) Moves the cursor down 15 lines.

F9 (Left) Moves the cursor to the top of the line.

F10 (Right) Moves the cursor to the end of the line.

F3 (Words) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Words (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Word)

Pressing the function key F3 (Words) (Word), open the reserved words that can be used for programming the control unit.

Pressing the key word will be printed on the screen. See the information on the parametric programming in Section 6.

Note: Pressing the F6 (RETRN) will be printed RETURN (Return).

101


F4 (Misc) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Misc (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Editing - Other)

In this section we are talking about some teams that are not included in other categories.

F1 (UnDo) Restores the entire line, deleted using the delete command to delete a row or block. It does not restore the individual characters or words.

F2 (Rest) Cancels any changes made to the line of text until you came out of that line. The line is restored to its previous contents, regardless of the changes.

F3 (HDW) Enables the use of a flywheel to move into position. You can insert the position of the axis of the program by pressing Enter.

F1 - F4 (X / Y / Z / A) Select the axis position to insert

F6 (LnDel) Deletes the line where the cursor is positioned and moves all rows below it up one line. The cursor moves to column 1 of the next line.

F7 (Chang) This operation works the same way as the team Find (Find), except that it is possible to replace the found string any string of up to 67 characters. After entering the search string will be prompted to enter a string to replace. The latter was introduced to replace the string, if any, will be displayed, it can take, edit, or enter a new line. In the end, given a hint about the options. The first displays the options that were used last. You can enter a new option (abolishing the old), edit the current options, or select them by pressing the Enter (Enter). Available options are the same as for the command Find (Find).

F8 (Find) Allows you to search for a string of up to 67 characters. When you enter this command, you will be prompted for the search string. Displays the last search string, if any. You can select the row again by pressing the Enter (Enter) or edit it, or enter a new search string. Once the search string is entered, you must specify search options. This displays the options used for the last time, if available. You can enter a new option (abolishing the old), edit the current options, or select them again by pressing the Enter. Following options are available.

102


B Search in the opposite direction from the current cursor position toward the beginning of the program.

G Global search. The entire program is scanned for the string, regardless of the current cursor position. The search starts at the beginning of the program if it is produced in the forward direction or in the end, if the direction of the back.

L Limit the search to a block marked at the moment.

U Ignores the case, said all the letters of the alphabet, as having the upper register.

W Find whole words only; skips suitable combinations in other words.

If the text is an object that matches the search string, the cursor is placed directly behind him.

Note: For replacement surgery an option available.

N: No option "N", before changing each row that prompt "Replace Y / N / A / Q" (Replace Y / N / A / Q) allows the operator to

Y: Yes (yes) - to change it

N: No (no) - do not change it

A: REPLACE ALL unprompted (Used with the global option "G")

Q: QUIT - stop (using the global option "G")

ESC: does the same thing and quit (stop)

With the option "N" is not given a hint to change the line or lines.

F9 (FNext) Repeats the last search operation. If the last command was a search operation Find (Search) will be repeated this same search string and options, for the operation Find-and-Replace (find and replace) the replacement string will also be used again.

103


F5 (Ins) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Ins (main screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Paste)

If you press F5 (Ins), edit the program is in insert mode, and the characters will be inserted in the place where the cursor is positioned. If the key F5 (Ins) is pressed, the editing program is in overwrite mode, and the characters will overwrite the previous in the location where the cursor is positioned.

F6 (Del) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Del (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Delete)

Deletes the character under the cursor and moves all characters to the right of the cursor one position to the left. This command does not work with line breaks.

Note: At any point in the editing program by pressing a key (Back) on the numeric keypad moves the cursor one position to the left and remove character, standing in this place. Any characters to the right of the cursor are moved one space to the left.

F7 ( )Moves the cursor up one line.

F8 ( ) Moves the cursor one line down.

F9 ( ) Moves the cursor to the left.

F10 ( ) Moves the cursor to the right.

ESC (Exit) Pressing the ESC (Exit) exit from (Exit) editing program, active editable program is checked for changes. When

they were done, a message appears indicating whether to accept and save your changes. When you click on the "Y" changes are accepted, and the program file is changed. When you click on the "N" changes are discarded, and the file remains unchanged. Pressing the ESC will return to edit mode.

HELP (Verf) Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Edit - Check)

When editing a text file, you can check the edited program.

Key HELP (Verf) is not active if the currently running program or verified. Pressing the HELP (Verf) program will be tested in trial mode, with zero radius of the tool, as if the program was tested with the option F5 (Part) (Detail). Movement of supply are shown in yellow. Rapid movements are not shown. After testing the program will be made auto-scaling. You'll look at the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). Then you can rotate, zoom, zoom, and etc. Pressing the ESC will return in a text editor.

104


Notes: When the program is verified to be ignored M6, M0, M1, operators, and so I The program is copied to the file in the machining program, under the name "TEXTVER". When a file is copied, not running checks for the space outside the machining program. The file "TEXTVER" is removed when you return to the edit screen. This is to ensure that it does not automatically kept the program on which you work (still a hint will be displayed "Program was Modified. Accept changes? (Y / N) "(The program has been changed. Accept changes (yes / no)).

Key HELP (Verf) will not appear if you are on the next level down, such as F1 (Block) (Block), F2 (Cursr) (cursor), F3 (Words) (Word) or F4 (Misc) (Other).

If you need a lot of time to test the software, you can press the ESC key during its inspection. Carried out through its automatic scaling that has been tested, and the transition to the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). The program will continue testing until the end or until re-pressed on the ESC.

F2 (New) Main-Prog-Text-New (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - New)

Use the F2 (New) (New), you can enter a new number for the text of the program. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the text of the program on the subject of whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, a warning is displayed and the operator will be able to erase the text to allow the program to go into a text editor.

F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Text-Old (Main Screen - Program - Text mode - Old)

Pressing the F3 (Old) (Old) can enter the number of existing programs. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the text of the program, currently available in the catalog processing software components, to check whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, the Edit window appears, displaying the first 16 lines of code. If the program is not found, a message appears about the error and after clicking on the ESC key, you can enter another number.

F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Text-Any (Home Screen - Program - Text mode - Any)

When you press the F4 (Any) (Any) prompted the introduction of user file to be edited. Specify the drive, path, file name and extension.

105


F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Text-Menu (main screen - Program - Text mode - Menu)

When you press the F7 (Menu) (Menu) displays a list of all the text of programs currently available in the software processing components. Press the F7 - F10 arrows to select a file placed on the program you want to edit, select, press the key F5 (Enter) (Enter). See more details about changing discs and routes to other text programs in Section 4.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Menu = Home screen, program-text-mode menu Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance


Verf = check; Enter = input; Togle = shift; PhUp = page up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Drive = CD

Edit window appears, showing the first 16 programs. To select one of the programs listed in the window, use the arrow keys and scroll keys to move the cursor to the desired program and press the key F5 (Enter) or Enter - on the keyboard. The function menu can be accessed from other screens, but it will work the same way. If the menu from the screen due to Verify (Test), the selected program becomes active editing program. Use the F1 (Verf) (Test) graphically checked the item on which the cursor is positioned. Shows the scheme would apply to an instrument with a diameter of 0. When you press the F6 (Togle) (Switching) will show the file size, date and time

106


of last modification and the seven characters of the filename. Subdirectories are indicated by <DIR> as file names. Signs ".." indicate the parent directory of the current. If you press the button HELP (Drive), will be a list of available drives.

Note: The file name consists of characters enclosed in brackets. If the first block is not parentheses, the name is the first unit.

Pressing the "D" menu switches to the full names of DOS and vice versa. Pressing the "N" include sorting by name or description of the file.

Regardless of which mode you select (Edit (Editing), New (New), Old (Old), Any (Any) or Menu (Menu)) is used when there is an editing window, the number of editable text programs will be shown in the active window.

F2 (Conv) Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode)

In this section we will focus on the choice of interactive programs. When you enter the interactive programming mode active window in the upper right corner will change to show the latest edited interactive program.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv = Home screen, program mode, Interactive Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

107



Edit = edit; New = new; Old = previous; Any = any; Menu = menu; Esc = exit

There are five options to choose from an interactive program for editing.

F1 (Edit) Main-Prog-Conv-Edit (main screen - Program - Interactive mode-Edit)

By pressing F1 (Edit) (Edit) selected program and an active dialog to log into interactive programming. When programming or editing in interactive system there are three types of function keys. That the following keys:

-The configuration of the function keys 1: Editing keys


108


Event 0 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160Installing the software

The name of the program [....]Dimensions [Absolute]Units [Metric]Working coordinate [---]

Notes on installation:


Edit = Edit; View = view; Event = event; Ins = insert; Del = Delete; Prev = previous; Next = next; Exit = output; Verf = check

These function keys are available when there was made Logon Edit menu. Program can be divided into steps, edit the event and insert or delete an event.

Definitions of Key editing

F1 (Edit): By pressing F1 (Edit) (Edit) cursor (Edit) installed in the first field of the current event.

Will save the key / I, and the event can be edited.

F2 (View): Allows you to view the whole program and position in the (View)any of the events in the program. A window similar to

the next.


109


0 InstallationA change of instrumentTwo piercing tool - Start cutting cycle3 Geometry of milling - Line 4 Geometry of milling - Line5 The geometry of the cutting - Arc6 Geometry of milling - Line7 Withdrawal tool8 Beginning of an island9 The geometry of the cutting - Line10 The geometry of the cutting - Line11 The geometry of the cutting - Line12 End of the implementation of the island13 Beginning of the island14 The geometry of the cutting - Arc15 The geometry of the cutting - Arc


Begin = start; End = complete; Del = Delete; Copy = copy; Move = move; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Exit = output;

F7 ( ), F8 ( ), F9 (PgUp) and F10 (PgDn) can be used to navigate to the desired event. Then press the ESC or Enter, to reflect this event.

F1 (Begin): Marks the beginning of the block

F2 (End): Marks the end of the block

F3: Deletes the block of events

F4 Copies a block of events at the cursor position

F5 Moves a block of events at the cursor position

Note: You can not move, delete or copy the installation screen of the program or end the program of events.

F3 (Event) Allows you to enter an event for your search. If the number of events are not detected, the screen appears the end of the program.

F4 (T # #) Permits entry of the tool to search for numbers. If the number is not found a tool to display the event does not change.

F6 (Ins) INS is used to insert events into the program. A new (-s), event (s) is inserted before the event, which is currently displayed. Insert lasts as long as you press the function key F10 (Exit) (Exit).

F7 (Del) Removes a phenomenon that appears at the moment.

F9 (Prev) Displays the previous event in the program file.

F10 (Next) Displays the following phenomenon in the program file.

110


Help (Verf) When editing a file dialog, you can check the edited program. When the key is using (Help) is activated, it will show Verf (check).

Key HELP (Verf) is not active if the currently running program or verified. Pressing the HELP (Verf) program will be tested in trial mode, with zero radius of the tool, as if the program was tested with the option F5 (Part) (Detail). Movement of supply are shown in yellow. Rapid movements are not shown. After testing the program will be made auto-scaling. You'll look at the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). You can then perform the rotation, zoom, zoom and so on Pressing the ESC will return to the dialog editor.

Notes on key HELP (Verf) (HELP (check))

Note 1: When the program is verified to be ignored M6, M0, M1, operators, and so I

Note 2. If you need a lot of time to test the software, you can press the ESC key during its inspection. Carried out through its automatic scaling that has been tested, and the transition to the screen F6 (Displ) (map) - F3 (Graph) (graphic display). The program will continue until the end of the test or re-pressing the ESC.

Note 3. Operators While without wend and operators wend without while will not cause error messages.

ESC (Exit) Exit the dialog system and the automatic generation of executable program text with the prefix O.

- Configuration 2 function keys: The keys to save / I

111


RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Pos = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Position Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distanceEvent 1 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160Position

The feed rate [accelerated]Coordinates [Cartesian]


Store = save; Togl = shift; Exit = output;

These function keys are available when input is expected. At this time, the screen will appear, containing any number of fields, and the cursor will be in one of the fields.

There are two types of fields that can be displayed on-screen input: the data field and the field shift. The data fields - a field in which data is entered using the keyboard. Red fields require input. Switching fields - is a field with a limited number of possible incoming values and the values that can only be changed by pressing the F3 (Togl) (Switch).

Definitions of key conservation / I

F1 (Store) Accepts inputs and adds them to the program file. If all the required data has not been entered, the key F1 (Store) will not work, and the cursor moves to the field, requiring input. Each screen is saved is called an event.

F3 (Togl) Clicking this button will display the following values of the switching field. It is absent in the data field.

F5 (Del) Used to delete entries from the data field. It is absent in the switch.

F7 ( )Moves the cursor to the previous field.

F8 ( )Moves the cursor to the next field.

F9 ( ) Moves the cursor to the left. It has no effect on the switch.

F10 ( ) Moves the cursor to the right. It has no effect on the switch.

ESC (Exit) Cancel entry and return to the menu keys.

112


F2 (New) Main-Prog-Conv-New (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - New)

Use the F2 (New) (New) You can enter a number for a new interactive program. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the interactive program, already available in the software processing of parts, with a view to whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, two warnings will be displayed and the operator will allow erasing interactive programs and related text of the program prior to entering into a dialog system. It should be remembered that the interactive program is stored in both formats.

F3 (Old) Main-Prog-Conv-Old (Main Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Old)

Pressing the F3 (Old) (Old) can enter the number of existing interactive program. Once a number is entered, the control device will check the interactive program, available at this time in the software processing components, to check whether there is a program with this number. If the program is found, the Edit window appears, displaying the setup screen of the program. If the program is not found, a message appears about the error and after clicking on the ESC key, you can enter another number.

F4 (Any) Main-Prog-Conv-Any (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Any)

Pressing F4 (Any) (Any) allowed to put any file. Specify the drive, path, file name and extension. If the name has the correct format for interactive program will transition into the mode of interactive programming. If not, will transition into a text mode programming.

Main-Prog-Conv (Main Screen - Program - Interactive Mode)

The menu keys are used to navigate through the interactive system and the transition to the desired input screen. The sequence of menu keys, refer to the structural scheme of an interactive system in Section 6.

- Configuration of the three function keys: The keys programmingThe keys are displayed at the first level menu:

113


Pressing the function key displays the input screen, or [for example, F1 (Pos)], similar to the following

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Pos = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Position Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distanceEvent 1 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160Position



Store = save; Togl = shift; Exit = output;

another menu, or [for example, F2 (Mill)], as given:

Note that, at all levels, except for level 1, there is a key ESC (Back) (Back). With the help of it returns to the previous menu level keys.

Pressing the F10 (Exit) going out of the sub menus and editing keys appear at level 1.

114


When I found the screen, there are the following buttons to save / input.

Note: F3 (Togl) (Switch) and F5 (Del) (Delete) can not be on the same screen.

See more details about the input dialog screens in SECTION 3 - display a dialog input.

F7 (Menu) Main-Prog-Conv-Menu (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - Menu)

The key F7 (Menu) (Menu) dialog displays a list of all programs currently loaded in the catalog of programs for processing details.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Menu = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Menu Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

115


Event 1 of 17 Bits: 631 of 102 236 160Position



Verf = check; Enter = input; Togl = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = break; Drive = CD

Press the F7 - F10 arrows to select a file located on the program you want to edit, but the key F5 (Enter) (Enter) is pressed to make a choice. Edit window appears, displaying the setup screen of the program.

Regardless of which mode you select [F1 (Edit) (Edit, F2 (New) (New), F3 (Old) (Old), F4 (Any) (Any) or F7 (Menu) (Menu)] is used when editing window appears, the number of editable interactive programs will be shown in the active window.

F6 (Togle) shows the time and date for each program.

F9 (Verf) Main-Verf (Main screen - Check)

Function F9 (Verf) (Test) is used to verify the machining program. In general, the inspection is performed in graphical mode, but it is not necessary. Time is really checking, and can be used to calculate the processing time. The tested program is active. To obtain information about the coordinates for comparison with the map, set the control unit in the block mode, and go through the stages of the program. The cursor in graphics mode will be about the details, and the mapping XYZ will read the coordinate values of each point.

116


Verification is used to control the active program. When you press the F9 (Verf) (check) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf = Main screen, check Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance


Start = start; Old = old; Block = block; OStop = extra stops; BSkip = pass block; Displ = map; Menu = menu; Dry = idle; Esc = exit

117


When you see the above screen, press the F1 (Start), and the following screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Start = Main screen, check Active = ActiveCurrent = current Next = Click on the following <Cycle Start> (Start of cycle) to start the program from the beginning


First = first; Block = block; Tool = Tool; Path = path; Part = item; Both = both; Abort = abort

Key F1 (First) (First) is automatically selected when you enter this screen from the screen Verf (check). So if you want to test an active program from the beginning, you need only press the button Cycle Start (Start of cycle). If you press F2 (Block) (Block), the device management request to enter a number or sequence of the desired block, and then press Enter. If the button is pressed Cycle Start (The first cycle), an active program will be checked from the selected block. If you press F3 (Tool) (tool), the control unit will ask about the number of the instrument. After entering the number of tools and squeezing Enter button is pressed Cycle Start (Start of cycle). Active program will check with the number you want the tool, and the following screen. Use the F4 (Path) (path) shows the trajectory of the tool on a graphic screen. Use the F5 (Part) (detail) shows the trajectory of moving parts on the graphics screen. Use the F6 (Both) (Both), and shows the tool path and the trajectory of the details on the graphics screen.

118


Note: If you enter the block number or tool number is out of the program, the program will start from the beginning.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf = Main screen, check Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

SECTION 28 .....

Correction: left cutInstrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise)Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Block = block; OStop = extra stops; BSkip = pass block; Displ = map; Dry = idle; Halt = Stop; Esc = exit

119


The screen shown above, is the main test screen with two new additions: the map unit number and pressing F9 (Halt) (Stop). The block number indicates the current executable line validation program. Key F9 (Halt) is similar to the Feedhold (Stop feeding), so that when it is pressed, the machine stops. However, in contrast to Feedhold, F9 (Halt) also allows you to run the new program.

F3 (Block) Main-Verf-Block (Main Screen - Checking - Power)

If the key is activated F3 (Block) (Block), the program will stop at the end of each block. Each time you press Cycle Start (Start of cycle) will be tested one more block.

F4 (OStop) Main-Verf-OStop (Main screen - Testing - Additional Stop)

If the key is activated by an additional stop F4 (OStop), the program will stop on each team M01.

F5 (BSkip) Main-Verf-BSkip (Main Screen - Check - Missing the block)

If the key is activated crossing block F5 (BSkip), the program will skip all the blocks, beginning with a "/" (slash).

/ F5 If the key is activated crossing the block, the command changes the feed rate will not be executed.

F6 (Displ) Main-Verf-Displ (Main Screen - Check - Displays)

By the key F6 (Display) (map) can be accessed from multiple screens. The screen below shows, as if access to the F6 (Displ) was carried out from the screen F9 (Verf) (Test). All display functions and screens are identical, regardless of the access point. Differ only in the cusps on the basis of the original access point. When you press the F6 (Disp) the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Displ = Main Screen-Display-Check Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

120


SECTION 71 .....

Correction: left cutInstrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise)Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Dist = distance; Error = error; Graph = graphical display; Diag = diagnosis; Esc = exit

F1 (Next) Main-Verf-Displ-Dist (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Distance)

See page 26, Section 2.

F2 (Error) Main-Verf-Displ-Error (Home Screen - Check - Displays - Error)


F3 (Graph) Main-Verf-Displ-Graph (Main Screen - Check - Displays - Graphic display)

If you press F3 (Graph) (graphic display), the control unit switches to display text on a graphic display of the active part program. The following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Verf-Displ-Graph = Main screen, check-display-graphic display Active = ActiveCorrection: canceled Instrument: Diameter:

121


Length:Submission:Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details:Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear

Graphs in the NC are fully three-dimensional and displayed in the graphics area as long as the control device is in graphics mode F3 (Graph). At the request of other maps in the graphics area of the window will appear with the requested data. At the end of the window with these features disappear, and the graphical display will be restored. The scale at the top of the screen is used to control the size of parts. If you change the scale on the lines dividing the screen will change accordingly. Division in the rulers expressed in units of the machine, but in the English system of measurement. The largest division is approximately one inch.

Note: Charts are removed from the screen when you start or the beginning of the test program.

Functions of graphics used in the test mode, the same as the functions used in run mode. A full explanation of these features, see page 26, Section 2, the graphics mode of the program.

F4 (Diag) Main-Verf-Disp-Diag (main screen - Check - Displays - Diagnostics)


F8 (Dry) Main-Verf-Dry (Main Screen - Check - Idle)

F8 (Dry) (Idle), running in test mode, will drive the program as quickly as possible. For positions feedrate of 100% and above - the scan speed is gradually reduced to 0-90% correction.

F9 (Halt) Main-Verf-Halt (Main Screen - Checking - Stop)F9 (Resum) Main-Verf-Resum (Main screen - Validity - Renewal)

If the program was stopped F9 (Halt) (Stop), resume function is activated. Now the screen will display validation key F9 (Resum) (Renewal). The program can be resumed, until the key is active. If you choose to resume function, an active program will be resumed from the point of shutdown.

Press the F3, F4, F5 and F8 the screen test mode is set to test the program. When these buttons are illuminated, the functions are active at any current tested the program or the program to be tested.

122


Note: From the test mode can switch to the program. This is convenient for long programs, DNC, as it covers all the feed / speed / tool offset / correction on the cutting tool, etc. To switch to the execution of the verification regime must be in block mode, waiting for the start of the cycle. Press the F9 (Halt) (Stop). F10 key will not show F10 (Run) (Performing). When you press F10 (Run), the control device will behave as if it was held stop / resume running the program. Make sure that the control device was removed from the block and / or idle mode, if it were. Do not try to do it in the middle of an automatic tool changer or similar automated programs input / output.

F10 (Util) Main-Util (Main Screen - Utilities)

Buttons and options that are displayed when you press F10 (Util):

F1 (Probe) Main-Util-Probe (Home Screen - Utilities - Sensor)

Note: For machines with the option of sampling.

If digitization is part of the options and pressed F1 (Probe) (sensor), will be on display next screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Probe = Utility main screen-Sensor Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

123


SCREEN INSTALLATION DigitizationThe input file: NOT SELECTEDDisplay Mode: NOT SELECTED


Begin = start; In = input; Out = output; Esc = exit

Note: F1 (Probe) (sensor) is used only for sampling XZ or YZ.

F1 (Begin) If the selected file input and output mode will begin digitizing. If not, an error message 808 "Set up not selected" (Installation is not selected).

F3 (In) Displays a menu from which you select the file that contains information to guide sampling.

F4 (Out) Specifies the output mode for the digitized data. Options are as follows.

F1 - RS232 Primary SerialF2 - File File number NC F3 - Disk The name of the file on a floppy disk

124


F2 (XyDig) Main-Util-XyDig (Main Screen - Utilities - Digitize XY)

Note: For machines with the option of sampling.

If digitization is installed and pressed F2 (XyDig) (Digitize XY), will be on display next screen.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-XyDig = Utility main screen-digitizing XY Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceSCREEN INSTALLATION DigitizationThe input file: NOT SELECTEDDisplay Mode: NOT SELECTED


Begin = start; In = input; Out = output; Close = close; Esc = exit

F1 (Begin) If the selected file input and output mode will begin digitizing. If not, an error message 808 "Set up not selected" (Installation is not selected).

F3 (In) Displays a menu from which you select the file that contains information to guide sampling.

125


F4 (Out) Specifies the output mode for the digitized data. Options are as follows.

F1 - RS232 Primary SerialF2 - File File number NC F3 - Disk The name of the file on a floppy disk

F6 (Close) Switches between the closed and open.

Note: More information about the digitization of a guide for digitization.

F3 (Files) Main-Util-Files (Main Screen - Utilities - Files)

In the utilities to work with files containing basic data manipulation function. They are:

Load = load; Save = save; Renam = rename; Copy = copy; Ram = memory; Erase = delete; Done = done

F1 (Load) Main-Util-Files-Load (Main Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Download)

The function F1 (Load) (Download) is used to download programs from the floppy disk into the program memory control unit. When this function is selected, the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Files-Load = Utility main screen-Files, Download Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: linear (feed)

126


Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Start = start; Set = setting; Reset = Reset; All = all; None = no; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = interrupt; Verf = check

In the editing window will display a list of programs on a floppy disk. The cursor selection (> <) is located on the first program.

F1 (Start) When you click on this button starts the transfer of selected programs (Start) floppy disk into the memory of the program. If the file already exists, the operator

will be given a hint.

F2 (Set) Selects the file to which the cursor is positioned to boot from the floppy(Set) drive. It will be highlighted.

F3 (Reset) Deselects the file to which the cursor is positioned. Cancels the selection(Reset) the selected file.

F4 (All) Selects all the programs on a floppy disk that you want to download.(All) Selects all files.

F5 (None) Deselect all selected programs. Deselects all(Nothing) the selected files.

F6 (Togle) Shows the size and file date. (Switching)

F7 ( ) Moves the cursor to select the top.

F8 ( )Moves the cursor to select down.

F9 (PgUp) Moves the cursor to select up to 16 lines.

F10 (PgDn) Moves the cursor down to the choice of 16 lines.

The key means used to select the new disk, or to check the program (based on the parameter control unit)

Help (Drive) Displays a list of available drives for the new menu. Help (CD)

Help (Verf) Graphically check the item on which the cursor is positioned. Help (check)

127


Note: If set to extract the files, one file on a floppy disk, separated by 0 # # # # can be downloaded and is divided into several files. When removing the download program does not check for files that already exist.

F2 (Save) Main-Util-Files-Save (Home Screen - Utilities - Downloads - Conservation)

The function F2 (Save) is used to save programs from the program memory control device on a floppy disk.

The function F2 (Save) works the same way as the function F1 (Load) (download), except that the transfer direction is changed.

F3 (Rename) Main-Util-Files-Rename (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Rename)

With the function F3 (Rename) changing the name of the program. If a new file name already exists, the operator will be shown the appropriate prompt.

F4 (Copy) Main-Util-Files-Copy (Home Screen - Utilities - Files - Copy)

With the function F4 (Copy) makes a copy of the program under a different name. If a new file name already exists, the operator will be shown the appropriate prompt.

F5 (Ram) Main-Util-Files- Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Files - RAM)

This function is used to download programs from floppy disk, Zip-drive or network drive to the RAM disk and then RAM in the DNC.

Note: RAM disks of more available as an option.

F9 (Erase) Main-Util-Files-Erase (Main Screen - Utilities - Files - Erase)

Function F9 (Erase) is used to erase the program from the program memory control unit. Available keys are the same as in option F2 (Save) (Save).

F4 (RS232) Main-Util-RS232 (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232)

In the utilities F4 (RS232) provides basic communication functions. These include the following:

F1 (COM1 or COM 2)

F1 (COM1 or COM2) - is the primary port.

128


F5 (Send) Main-Util-RS232-Send (Home Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Send)

Pressing the F5 (Send) (Email) appear the following keys.

After selecting the F1 (Text) (text) or F2 (Conv) (interactive), select the programs you want to send to the computer running in standalone mode, with the menu. In connection with these actions the following menu appears.

F1 (Begin) (Start) starts to transfer an active program, which is shown in the upper right corner.

F7 (Menu) (Menu) to select the program to send the menu.

Notes on sending

Note 1: When sending parameters F7 (Menu) (Menu) is not an option.

Note 2: Parameters of the RS-232 must be set to identical values in the control device and computer. Always check these settings.

Note 3: Parameters of the RS-232 are located in the parameters of the control unit (Main-Parms-Ctrl) (Home Screen - Options - Ctrl). Default settings:

Primary Port COM1Baud Rate from 1200 to 9600Parity even Data bits 7Stop bits 2

F6 (Recev) Main-Util-RS232-Recev (Main Screen - Utilities - RS232 - Get)

Option F6 (Recev) (Get) is used for programs or settings from a computer running in standalone mode, in memory of the program control unit. When you press the F6 (Recev) will see a new toolbar buttons (shown below). Next, enter a new number in the message window of the program. After the introduction of the real numbers of the program editing screen will appear and will show the program after it is received. Preparation continues for as long as you press ESC (Done) (Done).

129


Note: If the number received by the program already exists, the operator will be given appropriate help.

If set to extract the files, multiple files can be sent from a computer running in standalone mode, the control unit will extract them to the correct file # # # # if they are separated by 0 # # # #. When removing the check is not carried out of existing files.

F7 (Ram) Main-Util-RS232-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - RS232 - RAM)

This function is used to download programs from the RS-232 to the RAM disk, and then drive to the RAM DNC.

Note: RAM disks of more available as an option.

F5 (Tlchg) Main-Util-Tlchg (Main Screen - Utilities - Tool change)

F5 (Tlchg) - is an option for machines with automatic tool changing devices.

If the machine has a rotary tool changer, you will see the following panel keys.

When you press the keys F1 (CW) (clockwise), F2 (CCW) (counterclockwise) or F3 (Home) (starting position) the number of active tool is reset, indicating that there is no tool in the spindle.

F1 (CW) store moves one position clockwiseF2 (CCW) store moves one position clockwiseF3 (Home) Store results in the initial positionF5 (Open) opens the door of the tool changer F6 (Close) closes the door of the tool changer

If installed on the machine tool changer with swinging arm, following keys are displayed.

130


F1 (Home) (starting position), F2 (CW) (clockwise) and F3 (CCW) (counterclockwise) perform the same function as the rotary tool changer. The key F7 (Slots) (Jacks) is used to edit the numbers in the nests of the tool changer tool. If you press F7 (Slots), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-TlChg-Slots = Utility main screen-changer tool-slots Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distancePocket = slotTool = ToolSpindle Spindle =Current pocket = the current slot


Edit = edit; Dflt = default; Esc = exit

F1 (Edit) (Edit) tool allows you to change the number in each nest. .

With the F3 (Dflt) (Default) numbers are loaded by default the tool (tool 1 in slot 1, the tool 2 in slot 2, etc.). Use F7 and resets the tool number in the spindle.

F6 (DNC) Main-Util-DNC (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC)

Mode F6 (DNC) (DNC) is used to run large programs. These programs are not loaded into the memory control unit, so they do not have a transition team (GO-TO), cycles, WHILE-WEND, GO-SUB command or commands call (CALL).

131


Note: CALL instruction permitted the accelerated mode DNC.

GO-TO commands are allowed in DNC mode and the DNC run in test mode, provided that the option "resolve DNC" (allow the DNC) is set to Yes (yes).

If you press F6 (DNC) (DNC), DNC modes appear.

F3 (Fast) Main-Util-DNC-Fast (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Fast mode)

After pressing the F3 (Fast) (Fast Track), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-DNC-Fast = The main screen-Utilities-DNC-Fast Track Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceSelect the input mode

Missing pulses account: 0 Power: 0


File = file; Disk = disk; Any = any; Old = current; Ram = memory; Skip = skip; Mirr = mirroring; Abort = interrupt

132


F1 (RS232)

By pressing the F1 (RS232) is activated by waiting for data from the Com-port, and then prompted the beginning of the cycle to start the program.

F2 (File) (File)

With the F2 (File) menu, select the program from the programs in the control unit.

F3 (Disk) (Disk)

With the F3 (Disk) program is selected from a menu of programs on a floppy disk or from LAN.

F4 (Any) (Any)

The key F4 (Any) allows you to enter the name of any disk route and file extensions.

F5 (Old) (Existing)

Key F5 (Old) allows you to enter the file number you want to run.

F6 (Ram ) (RAM) F6 (Ram ) is used if the program is loaded from disk memory (via RS-232 or a floppy disk). With F6 (Ram ) will be selected by the program.

After you select INPUT (input), the control unit will ask to press the start button to start the program cycle. All of the above modes of input - except for the RS-232 - allow to run the program from other places other than the beginning. There are also the following options.

F1 (First) (First)

F1 (First) runs the program from the beginning.

F2 (Block) (Block)

F2 (Block) runs the program with a serial number.

F3 (Tool) (tool)

F3 (Tool) starts with the numbers of the instrument.

F4 (Cont) (Continued)

The key F4 (Cont) allows you to start from the place where it interrupted the DNC earlier. When a file is interrupted, the file position is saved. Not carried out checks of whether the operator switched the number of files or change file DNC. Use the F4 (Cont), execution will continue from the file position, which was interrupted by any.

F9 (Skip) (Skip)

F9 (Skip) asks for a pass pulses account. If the bill does not pass the pulse is zero, the request will be made in the run cycle of missed (or ignored) of the number of blocks, and then the second loop will be executed starting from the next block.

133


F10 (Mirr) (Mirror)

F10 (Mirr) authorizes a mirror image of X0 and Y0 in the mode of DNC-FAST.

F3 (Fast) (Fast Track)

In the F3 (Fast) (Fast Track), the following screen appears.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-DNC-Fast = The main screen-Utilities-DNC-Fast Track Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distance

SECTION 6 .....

Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Clearance: Interpolation: circular (counterclockwise)Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Abort = interrupt

When the program is completed or a key is pressed ESC (Abort) (Termination), the screen will display the total time of DNC, the total distance, average flow rate, average power and average units / second.

134


This mode should be used for large programs, where high frequency units, for example, when the short movements at high feed rates. In this mode, you can not perform trig help (trigonometric aid), cutter comp (compensation for the cutting tool), rotating (turning), scaling (zooming) or other non-standard command. Reliable data for the Fast Track:

X, Y, Z, A, B, I, J, K, F and N

Significant G-codes:

G0, G1, G2, G3, G17, G18, G19, G70, G71, G90, G91

Secure with a format for arcs:

(G17/G18/G19), (G2/G3), (I / J / K), (X, Y, Z)

If the code is not included in these groups, the time for this unit will be slow, and it will be highlighted on the display unit.

F4 (Run) Main-Util-DNC-Run (Home Screen - Utilities - DNC - Implementation)

With F4 (Run) you can make the same choices as with F3 (Fast) (Fast Track) for input modes. In F4 (Run) there is no option F10 (mirroring). After selecting the input mode and skip any block, the control unit selects the Execution Screen (Main-Run), and DNC software can be run like any other program.

F9 (Verf) Main-Util-DNC-Verf (Main Screen - Utilities - DNC - Check)

F9 (Verf) operates identically to the regime F4 (Run) (Performing). After selecting the input mode and skip any block, the control unit selects the test screen (Main-Verf), DNC and the program can be checked like any other program.

Note: For RS-232 DNC F4 (Run) (Performing), and F9 (Verf) (check) number search tool or block number can be made to run the program from the desired location. Program can not be reset to the "first" (first) after a search tool or block number.

Option for part / path / both (part / path / both) are not available for DNC in test mode.

135


F7 (Chart) Main-Util-Chart (Main Screen - Utilities - Scheme)

Use the F7 (Chart) shows the scheme of assistance by the end user in accordance with the specific application. If the catalog RAM (memory) is a file called charts.dat, it will be displayed. The format of the file system allows for the indexing of files and other data available to the operator.

Below is a sample listing charts.dat.

Note: Only the top 16 lines chart.dat. The first 12 characters of each line are not displayed.

Speed and feed (Updated May 10 1994.)

To get more information or to make changes to the schema information, see Bill Jones.

Carstl.dat *Carbon steelAllSt.dat *Alloy steel

·etc.··

Allum.dat *Aluminum CstIron.dat *Cast iron Acme.dat *Tasks for ACME Inc.

F8 (Info) Main-Util-Info (Home Screen - Utilities - Information)

F8 (Info) shows information about the software, hardware, etc. The following function keys are displayed.

F1 (Std) Main-Util-Info-Std (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Standard)

F1 (Std) shows the standard information as a representative in the next window.

136


Memory Avail (Access Memory) shows the available system memory in bytes.

Parts Storage (memory processing software components) shows the amount of memory processing software components, in bytes.

Front Panel (front panel) shows the code version of the front panel.

Controller Card (Controller board) shows the version of the controller card (v0206 mean 2.06) and counting the number of errors (should be zero).

Information on cycle Acroloop about axes X, Y and Z for systems Centurion 5 as follows:

version, (v0214 = 2.14)Set count of the number of errors (should be zero)four bytes, downloaded the program issuing the optional acroloop (files. HEX), formatted as:

aamm ssrr, where:aa = axis (01 = X, 02 = Y, etc.)mm = major version (= 00 hand, 01 = P1ATC ram, 07 = P7ATC, 08 = P8ATC, 11 = P1 geneva)ss = subversion, uniquely identifies a file. HEX.rr = Reserve (always zero)

The information network control block (NCB) on the axes X, Y and Z for Centurion Systems 6/7 is as follows.

The version number Date of each file NCB.HEX A brief description of the file

F2 (Sys) Main-Util-Info-Sys (Main Screen - Utilities - Statistics - System)

F2 (Sys) shows the system information as a representative in the next window.

137


This screen shows the internal information system. Lines 1 - 5 show the distribution of memory in DOS, NC and overlays dynamically allocated area. Line 6 shows the version of MS-DOS, and CP 80286, 80386, 80486 or 80586. Lines 11 and 12 show the compiler and blocks previously allocated to the group of cycles, cycles, and text codes M and G, connected by the user. Line 13 - is a hex dump of the BIOS memory for F000: 0. Line 14 - is a hexadecimal dump of the emulator ROM drive with CA00: 0. Line 15 indicates the type of Bios and type of disk emulator.

F3 (Fp) Main-Util-Info-Fp (Main Screen - Utilities - Details-Front)

F3 (Fp) shows information on the front panel, as shown in the figure below.

The first line of the version of the front panel. The next two lines are a few abbreviations and numbers:

AK Confirmation received from the sensor / controller keyboardRT Repeated transmission received from the sensor / controller keyboardTO Timeouts for transmission to the sensor keyboard, the keyboard controller

foundSR Repeated sending fragments - timeouts detected NC SS Sending fragments - the standard keyboard to send a probeNK Nonconfirmation found the keyboard controllerDC The value of the DAC spindle sent to the transmitter keyboardPE Parity error detected by the keyboard controllerTL Time limits detected by the keyboard controllerCL Pressing Control, received by the keyboard controller (Used to indicate the inconsistency of data / command)

138


F4 (Path) Main-Util-Info-Path (Main Screen - Utilities - Information - Directions)

When you press the F4 (Path) the next screen appears, which displays the file path. The standard procedure is for the ROM catalogs (ROM), memory (RAM), details of programs for processing, display and floppy disk. The following catalog processing software components shown in the available space for programs in bits. For directories, the ROM (ROM), machining programs and display the volume name of the DOS to the disk is shown on the right.

NC Centurion VI 6.6206rROM: RAM: Processing program details: Showing: Floppy disk: Remote files:

Note: File Route reboots, which displays the above information. So you can edit the file path, and then restart it using this command.

If route processing program details and / or remote file has been modified from the menu, they will be saved back to the original route of the PATH.DAT.

Version of the above #. # 169 route have a floppy disk and route remote files. Route the floppy disk is used specifically to save and load settings.

139


F5 (Time) Main-Util-Info-Time (Home Screen - Utilities - Statistics - Time)

F5 (Time) shows the time and distance are calculated when checking program. Information on the clock at 100% to correct feed rate for tool change, spindle acceleration, stopping blocks, etc. Views expressed in hours, minutes, seconds. Length - in inches or mm. Change the tool adds 10 seconds to the time of filing.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Time = Utility Main Screen-Time Active = ActiveCurrent = current next Next = Distance = the distanceNC Centurion VI 6.6206rInformation on the clock at 100%

Implementation: Submission: Faster movement:Distance:


Std = standard; Sys = systematic; Fp = front panel; Path = path; Time = time; Ram = memory; Diag = diagnosis; MISC = additional parameters; Done = done

The screen above provides information on the timing for the last audited program. Shown period of time suggests that correction of the feed rate is 100%. RUN (Running) gives the total time, FEED (Feed) - the time of milling (G1, G2, G3), and RAPID (Fast Moving) - during G0. All the time expressed in hours: minutes: seconds. The distance means the total distance traveled in inches or millimeters.

140


F6 (Ram) Main-Util-Info-Ram (The main screen - Utilities - Statistics - RAM)

With F6 (Ram) displays the following screen, which shows the contents of the directory RAM (memory). F6 is used mainly for diagnostic purposes. Programs that run the various options on the machine, usually stored in the directory.

NC Centurion VI 6.6206rThe contents of RAM: ...To continue, press any key

F7 (Diag) Main-Util-Info-Diag (main screen - Utilities - Statistics - Diagnosis)

With F7 (Diag) displays the following screen, which shows the diagnostics of the machine just before the emergency stop. F7 is used mainly for diagnostic purposes to determine the cause of the emergency stop. The user can view the status of inputs and outputs for each axis.

RunTime = Period Main-Util-Diag = Home screen, utilities, diagnostics Active = active

141


Enter the X-axis01 Emergency StopConnecting rod 02 is turned offConnecting rod 03 is included04 Acceleration 05 Change Tool06 Failure of lubrication system07 Waiting for the channel08 Zero Speed09 Faulty Drive10 Rear Spindle11 Digitization The switch 12 of the original

The output of the X axis01 Program Emergency Stop02 coolant in the form of oil mist03 Coolant splashThe rotation of the spindle 04 in a clockwise directionThe rotation of the spindle 05 counterclockwiseThe spindle 06 in the order07 The inclusion of a connecting rod08 Change ToolResolution 09 reliefConclusion 10 X 1011 Locking Spindle12 swivel clip


STATUS I / O AT THE TIME OF THE LAST EMERGENCY STOP Esc = exit

F9 (Blank) Main-Util-Blank (Home Screen - Utilities - Blank)

F9 (Blank) makes the screen blank. With this feature removed written to the CRT image. The screen will remain blank until such time as there is no any key is pressed.

The screen will be cleared automatically and remain empty until such time until any key is pressed. Shutdowns block tool change, a request to start cycle, etc. activate the screen, the operator will be given a hint, then the screen will again be cleared. There is also a timer to clear the screen if the key is not pressed within a specified period of time. See information about the parameter of time to turn off the display on page 67, Section 2.

F10 (Command) Main-Util-Command (Home Screen - Utilities - Team)

If the parameter Misc (Optional) Name of the team is not empty, the first 5 characters will be displayed pressing F10. When the F10 key is pressed, the command will be executed. If you need a few commands can run a batch file. See more information on this page 69.

Help (AugRv) Main-Util-AugRV (Main Screen - Utilities - Reverse the screw)

When you press and hold this key is reversed screw. It is used to help eliminate jamming systems chip removal. The screw will move in the opposite direction until the button is depressed.

The screw will not move (forward or backward) if the door is opened or the machine is in an emergency stop.

142

SECTION 3 - display a dialog INPUT DATA

143

BLOCK DIAGRAM Dialog Box CNC CENTURION 7

POS Regulations MILL - START Start cutting cycle

GOEM - LINE LineAdditional features MISC ARC Arc END End milling cycle TANGS Tangent

CGEN generation of circlesHome treatment ISLND islandE-ISL completion of processing of the island

POCK - SETUP Installing milling grooves CIRC - CLEAR Cleaning the round cut-outs

F IN Fine ext. processing of round recesses RECT- CLEAR Clear the rectangular cut-outs

F IN Fine ext. pryamoug processing. seizures FACE treatment cycle ends

MANUL cleaning cycle manually cut-outs POLYG Turnaround polygonal cavities

FRAME- SETUP Installing milling frame CIRC Outdoor finishing a round frameOutdoor finishing RECT rectanglePOLYG polygonal frame processing cycle

3DPCT- START Start scanning cycle in 3 dimensions LINE A line in 3 dimensionsARC arc in 3 dimensionsEND End of the cycle sweep in 3 dimensions3DARC Set rotation in 3 dimensions

CAD Import CAD filesTHRED Threading cycles

DRILL- START Activation of the selected cyclePOS positioning for drilling Additional features MISCSUB Subroutine CallEND decontamination cycle CAD Import CAD files

BOLT Activate the selected program performance of bolt holes TCHNG Call / tool changeAdditional features MISCCALL Call subroutineSPEC- PARAMS Setting

TOOLS Set tool offsetSetting the zoom SCALEROT Set rotationMIRR Setting MirroringInstall a floating zero FLZTEXT Text loop

SUBS GOSUB subroutine callSTART Start routines

144


Each interactive program has an associated text program. File an interactive program begins with the letter P, followed by 4 digits, for example, P1234. The text file begins with the letter O, followed by 4 digits, for example, O1234. Time is a program created or modified from the interactive program. Changes in the interactive program, create a new text of the revised program of dialogue. The operator can view or edit text program, but changes will not be transferred to an interactive program. If you resend an interactive program overwrites it changed the program text.

This section contains the schema dialog data entry screens and explanations of each screen.

Showing, not all possible combinations of input screens, so if you need additional information regarding any of the screens or fields, please refer to the relevant section of the manual.

In the red field to enter data. After entering the data, these fields will be red.

Setting screen of the program, shown below, always appears at the beginning of each program. He runs some important functions, so that the program carried out before, leaving no options.

Installing the software

The following dialog screen to install the software. This is the first event of each interactive program.

Event 0 of 2 Bytes: 130 088 960 118 ofInstalling the software

The name of the program []

Dimensions [Absolute]Units [English system]Working coordinate [---]

Installation Notes:

The main keys are installed in the following dialog programming.

145


F1 (Pos) Main-Prog-Conv-Pos (main screen - Program - Interactive mode - the Regulations)

The screen position is generally used for fast positioning, however, filing the motion may be made by switching in the feed rate and the input flow rate.

Below is an interactive screen for fast positioning in the Cartesian coordinate system.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Position


The X-axisThe Y-axisThe Z-axis

Note: See more information about the positioning of page 266, Section 4.

Below is an interactive screen for positioning in a polar coordinate system.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 84 out of 800 522 240Position

The feed rate [12]

146


Coordinates [polar]

The plane [XY]Type [the current]

The length of R [1.4142]The rear corner of the AB [45]The axis Z [-2]

Note: See more details about the polar setting lines on the page 268, Section 4.

F2 (Mill) Main-Prog-Conv-Mill (Home Screen - Program - Interactive mode - Milling)

When you select F2 (Mill) appears next panel function keys.

F1 (Start) Mill-Start (Milling - Start)

Screen F1 (Start) is used to start the continuous cycle of single-or multi-row routing. Milling begins at the first depth Z, and continues to decline to step Z, until it reached a final depth of Z.

Interactive tool to puncture the screen and start cutting cycle is as follows.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 125 894 656 118 ofPuncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z []1st depth of Z []Step Z []X point of puncture X []Puncture point Y Y []Correction [off]

Options [---]

147


In the beginning of the milling cycle usually follows the geometry, but in the end - the event "end mill cycle" (End milling cycle).

Correction of the cutting tool is activated on the screen below.

Event 1 of 3 bytes: 168 of 125 894 656Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [- .25]Step Z [.25]X point of the puncture x [0]Puncture point Y Y [0]Correction [Left] [Cartesian]Before the puncture x [1] Y [0]

Options [---]

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 215 125 894 656Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]

148


The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [- .25]Step Z [.25]X point of the puncture x [0]Puncture point Y Y [0]Correction [Left] [polar]The angle AB [0]

Options [---]

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 215 125 894 656Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [10]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [- .25]Step Z [.25]X point of the puncture x [0]Puncture point Y Y [0]Correction [automatic left]

Options [---]

F2 (Geom) Mill-Geom (Milling - Geometry)

When you select F2 (Geom) appears next panel function keys.

149


F1 (Line) Mill-Geom-Line (Milling - Geometry - Line)

Use the F1 (Line) displays the following dialog screen for the linear interpolation in the Cartesian coordinate system, which is used to perform linear interpolation in the mode of delivery.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Geometrical parameters of milling - Line

The feed rate F [20]Coordinates [Cartesian]


End of [---]Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details about positioning on the page 266, Section 4.

150


In the programming for all the fields entering the feed rate or spindle speed will be the active key is F12. Pressing the F12 key operator requested assistance in calculating the appropriate spindle speed and feed rate for the relevant entries. The only exception - the feed rate of the screen, since it is assumed that the flow rate is rapid movement. After pressing the F12 key the next screen appears.

Calculation of speed and feed

The diameter of the cutting tool (inch)Cutting width (inches)Cutting speed (ft / min)Number of cutters Chip thickness (inches)

Spindle speed (rpm = r / min)The feed rate (ipm = inches / min)

After entering the data in the first five fields will be given the recommended feed rate and spindle speed.

Below is an interactive screen for positioning in a polar coordinate system.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616

151


Geometrical parameters of milling - Line

The feed rate F [20]Coordinates [polar]The plane [YZ]Type [absolute]The absolute center of YC [1] ZC [-1]The length of R [2]The rear corner of the AB [60]The axis X []

End of [---]Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details about the polar setting lines on the page 268, Section 4.

When set to Extend Back [ON] (Elongation in the opposite direction [inc.]), The following screen appears.

Event 7 of 10 Bytes: 423 886 848 358 ofGeometrical parameters of milling - Line

The feed rate F []Coordinates [Cartesian]


End of [---]Elongation in the opposite direction [short] angle [110]

Note: See more information on the back line on page 284, Section 4.

Interactive screen for lines with a rounded corner is shown below.

152





End of [rounded the corner]Radius [.15]Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details about rounding the corners on the 282, Section 4.

Interactive screen for lines with land listed below.



153



End of [facet]Length [.15]Elongation in the opposite direction [off]

Note: See more details on the corners with chamfer on page 283, Section 4.

F2 (Arc) Mill-Geom-Arc (Milling - Geometry - Doug)

Screen F2 (Arc) is used to perform circular interpolation mode supply.

Sample of an arc

Below is a dialog screen plane XY, the center of the increments, circular interpolation clockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY]The feed rate F [20]The direction [clockwise]Center [Centre increments]

Center of the arc I [1]

Endpoint [absolute]AYZThe final option is [---]

Note: See more details about circular interpolation on page 269, Section 4.

154


A sample of the arc two

Below is a dialog screen plane ZX, the absolute center, circular interpolation clockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [ZX]The feed rate F [10]The direction [clockwise]Center [the absolute center]Arc radius R [2]Center of the arc ZC [0]

Endpoint [absolute]AYZThe final option is [---]

Note: See more details about circular interpolation on page 269, Section 4.

A sample of the arc 3

Below is a dialog screen plane XY, Polar Center, helical interpolation counterclockwise, with a rounded corner.

155


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY]The feed rate F [15]The direction [clockwise]Center [polar]Arc radius R [3]The initial angle of AA [45]

Endpoint [polar]The final angle of AB [135]

The final option [rounded the corner] Radius [.25]

Note: See more details about the description of the arc with polar coordinates on the page 268, Section 4.

Sample 4 arc

Below is a dialog screen plane XY, only the radius, circular interpolation clockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY]The feed rate F []The direction [clockwise]Center [the radius]Arc radius R [2]Endpoint [absolute]AYZThe final option is [---]

Note: See more details about the description of the arc with the radius of the page 271, Section 4.

156


F3 (Tangs) Mill-Geom-Tangs (Milling - Geometry - Tangent)

Screen F3 (Tangs) is used to calculate the intersection points needed for the arc tangent or tangent line between the two arcs. When this function is used, the program introduced the first arc and the tangent line or arc. Information about the second arc will be used only for purposes of calculation. This capability has been developed in order to be able to program a series of successive tangent lines or arcs. Therefore, the command line or arc tangent, as a rule, follows the arc of the team, describing the second arc.

To determine the value of left or right inputs on these screens, draw a line connecting the centers of the two arcs in the direction of the tool. Next, determine the desired point are right or left of the line, and enter these values.

The general sequence of the above form is as follows.

Event 1 The line L1Event 2 The function of the tangent line or arc, describing an arc R1 and L2 line or

arc 3Event 3 Doug R2

157


The tangent line Below is an interactive screen for the tangent line.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Connecting two arcs tangent line or arcin the plane [XY]

Milled first arc in the direction [clockwise]R1XC1

The second arc is to calculate: R2HC2

Exit 1st arc [left] and enter into the second [left]Connect the [line]

Note: See more details about the tangent line at p 408, Section 6.

Arc Tangent Below is an interactive display of the tangent arc.

158


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616Connecting two arcs tangent line or arcin the plane [XY]

Milled first arc in the direction [clockwise]R1XC1

The second arc is to calculate: R2HC2

Exit 1st arc [left] and enter into the second [left]Connect the [arch] center to the [left]Radius [5] The direction of the arc [clockwise]

Note: See more details about the arc of a tangent on page 408, Section 6.

F4 (CGen) Mill-Geom-CGen (Milling - Geometry - Generator circles)

For use F4 (CGen), the function generator circles to fill in any three points on the arc. These three points will be used to calculate the center and the radius of this arc.

Below is a dialog screen for the generator circles.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 48 out of 85,487,616The generator of the circles with three points The plane [XY]The direction [clockwise]

X1 ...Y2 ...Z3 ...

Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [yes]

159


Note: The screen generator circles do not move to the first point on the arc to cutting arc. In most cases, the screen is preceded by the movement of the generator circle line in this situation. Depending on the direction of the arc generated by the arc can not pass through the second point.

See more details about the display of the generator of the circle in Section 6.

F7 (Islnd) Mill-Geom-Islnd (Milling - Geometry - Island)

The screen of the island is used to determine the geometric parameters of the individual in a series of milling. It can be used in the standard cycle of milling, or for any option (clear cuts, tapered or rounded walls of the wall).

Event 5 of 5 Bytes: 280 788 992 201 ofHome treatment of isletIslet № [1]

The point of puncture X [2]The point of puncture Y [3]

Correction [automatic, left]

The screen begins to process the island there is no information about the Z. All dimensions are in the cycle Z began milling. The island is called a screen cutting cycle completion.

160


F8 (E-Isl) Mill-Geom-E-Isl (Milling - Geometry - End of treatment of the island)

The screen has finished processing the island used to complete the setup geometry on the island.

Event 6 of 6 Bytes: 219 280 788 992Completion of processing of the island

Point to the details after the removal tool[Automatically]

Below is a sample program that uses a cutting cycle with cleaning grooves and islands.

Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P7878 Event 0 out of 16 Installing the software


Dimensions [Absolute] Units [English system] Working coordinate [---]

Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- -

161


Event 1 of 16 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle The feed rate puncture Z [25] Point of Return [Gap] Gap [.1] The final depth of Z [-1] 1st depth Z [- .3] The increment of Z [.3] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [Left] [Polar coordinate system] The angle of AB [90]

Options [Clean grooves 1] Feed rate XY [50] Cutting width [.2] The final allowance [.005]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line

The feed rate F [50] Coordinates [Cartesian]

The axis X X [3] The axis Y Y [0] The axis Z Z []

End of [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 3 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line

The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian]


End of [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled]-------------------------------------------------- -

162


Event 4 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [1.5] Center of the arc XC [1.5] YC [3] Endpoint [Absolute] X [0] Y [3] Z []

The final option is [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 5 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line



End of [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 6 of 16 Removal of the instrument Completing the cycle of milling

Forward to the part after the removal tool [The polar coordinate system] The angle AB [0]

Call island # [1] Call island # [2] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet []-------------------------------------------------- -

163


Event 7 of 16 Home treatment of islet Number of islands # [1]

The point of puncture X X [1] The point of puncture Y Y [1]

Correction [Left] [Polar coordinate system]

The angle AB [0]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 8 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line



End of [---]




End of [---]


164


Event 10 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line



End of [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 11 of 16 Completion of processing of the island

Forward to the part after the removal tool [The polar coordinate system] Angle AB[45]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 12 of 16 Home treatment of islet Number of islands # [2]

The point of puncture X X [.75] The point of puncture Y Y [2.75]

Correction [Left] [Polar coordinate system]

The angle AB [-90]-------------------------------------------------- -

165


Event 13 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [50] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [.5] Center of the arc XC [1.25] YC [2.75] Endpoint [Absolute] X [1.75] Y [2.75] Z []

The final option is [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 14 of 16 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY] The feed rate F [] The direction [clockwise] Center [the absolute center] Arc radius R [.5] Center of the arc XC [1.25] YC [2.75] Endpoint [Absolute] X [.75] Y [2.75] Z []

The final option is [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 15 of 16 Completion of processing of the island

Forward to the part after the removal tool [The polar coordinate system] Angle AB[90]-------------------------------------------------- -

166


Event 16 of 16 End of program

Spindle off [Yes] Coolant is turned off [yes] Z to change the tool [yes]

Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) []-------------------------------------------------- -

With the previous program generated the following graphic.

Note: See more information about cleaning up the deep grooves on page 395Section 5.

F3 (Misc) Mill-Misc (Milling - More options)

See explanation on page 244, Section 3.

F4 (End) Mill-End (Milling - End)

Screen F4 (End) is used to complete the previously started cutting cycle. Completing the cycle cutting cycle with no beginning or the beginning of cutting cycle, cutting cycle without end milling will lead to a syntax error when you run or test program.

167


Common error codes for milling cycles

andNO = ERROR # 602 No operator of WEND

This may be due to the start of the cycle without end milling cutting cycle.

andNO = ERROR # 601 WHILE there is no operator

This may be due to the completion of the cycle without cutting cycle start milling.

Below is an interactive tool for removing the screen at the completion of milling cycles.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 54 146 374 656 Removal of the instrument Completing the cycle of milling

Forward to the part after the removal tool [Cartesian coordinate system] X [0] Y [1]

Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet [] Call island # [] # Call the islet []

Start cutting cycle

Cycle removal tool, complete milling

Cycle removal tool, complete milling

Start cutting cycle

168


Example of milling program

Event 0 of 7Installing the software


Dimensions [Absolute]Units [English system]

Working coordinate [---]

Notes on setting:[][][][][][]

-------------------------------------------------- -Event 1 of 7

Puncture tool - Start cutting cycleThe feed rate puncture Z [20]

Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]

The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [- .2]

The increment of Z [.3]The point of puncture X X [0]The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right]

Options [---]-------------------------------------------------- -

169


Event 2 of 7Geometrical parameters of milling - Line


The axis X X [2]The axis Y Y []The axis Z Z []

End of [---]


Event 3 of 7Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug

The plane [XY]The feed rate F []

The direction [clockwise]Center [polar]

Arc radius R [1]The initial angle of AA [-90]


Z []

The final option is [---]-------------------------------------------------- -

Event 4 of 7Geometrical parameters of milling - Line


The axis X X [0]The axis Y Y []The axis Z Z []

End of [---]


170


Event 5 of 7Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug

The plane [XY]The feed rate F []

The direction [clockwise]Center [polar]

Arc radius R [1]The initial angle of AA [90]

Endpoint [polar]The final angle of AB [-90]

Z []


Event 6 of 7Removal of the instrument

Completing the cycle of milling

Forward to the part after the removal tool[Automatically]

Call island # [] # Call the islet []Call island # [] # Call the islet []Call island # [] # Call the islet []Call island # [] # Call the islet []

-------------------------------------------------- -Event 7 of 7

End of program

The spindle is turned off [yes]Coolant is turned off [yes]Z to change the tool [yes]

Regulation X (relative to the original) [] Regulation Y (relative to the original) []-------------------------------------------------- -

171


The following graphic is an isometric view of the program milling.

172


Below is a dialog screen for the option of deep cleaning grooves with loop start milling tool with a puncture.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 124 878 848 406 ofPuncture tool - Start cutting cycleThe feed rate puncture Z [20]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [0]The increment of Z [.1]The point of puncture X X [0]The point of puncture Y Y [0]Correction [automatic right]

Options [Clean grooves 1]Feed rate XY [20]Cutting width [.1] Final allowance [.01]

The following graphic is a top view of an example program using the routing options are a clear cut-outs in the cycle began milling tool with a puncture.

Note: See more information about cleaning up the deep grooves on one page 395, Section 4.

173


Below is an interactive screen for option clean grooves with loop start milling tool with a puncture.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 252 124 878 848 ofPuncture tool - Start cutting cycleThe feed rate puncture Z [20]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [0]The increment of Z [.1]The point of puncture X X [0]The point of puncture Y Y [0]Correction [automatic right]

Options [Clean grooves 2]The number of passes [5] The width of cut [.125] Enter a negative width of cut for finishing pass

The following graphic is a top view of an example program using the option of milling grooves 2 in the treatment cycle began milling tool with a puncture.

Note: see more detailed information about clearing the cut-outs on page 2 395, Section 5 2.

Note: This option can also be used to clean the frame of the cutting cycle. To use the option finishing pass initial data for the tool radius rough passage can exceed the actual radius of the tool, in this case to achieve the proper tool radius using two passes with a negative width of the

174


aisle. This option is intended for the treatment of the real details, but did not clear the entire excavation.

Below is a dialog screen for the cycle beginning with the milling tools and a puncture with the option of conical walls.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 337 of 124 911 616Puncture tool - Start cutting cycleThe feed rate puncture Z [20]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [0]The increment of Z [.25]The point of puncture X X [0]The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right]

Options [Tapered Wall (spherical cutter)]The angle of the wall [20]

In the following graphic representation is given a sample program using the option of milling tapered walls in cycle beginning with the piercing tool milling.

175


0 ° - a vertical wall, 90 ° - is impossible. The conical wall is also an option for end mill. To be able to use the conical walls of the correction must be activated on the cutting tool. First depth of Z should be the top of the wall. The first pass is adjusted for the entire radius of the tool.

Note: See more information about the conical walls of the page 387Section 5.

Below is an interactive screen to start the cycle milling tool with a puncture with the option of rounded walls.

Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 498 124 911 616 ofPuncture tool - Start cutting cycleThe feed rate puncture Z [20]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-2]1st depth Z [0]The increment of Z [.1]The point of puncture X X [0]The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right]

Options [Round the walls (spherical cutter)]The radius of the wall [2] The initial angle [0]

176


An example program using the rounded walls of the loop end milling

0 of 4 EventsInstalling the software



Notes on setting:[][][][][][]-------------------------------------------------- -Event 1 of 4Puncture tool - Start cutting cycleThe feed rate puncture Z [20]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-2]1st depth Z [0]The increment of Z [.1]The point of puncture X X [0]The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [automatic right]

Options [Round the walls (spherical cutter)]

The radius of the wall [2] The initial angle [0]-------------------------------------------------- -

177


Event 2 of 4Geometrical parameters of milling - DougThe plane [XY]The feed rate F []The direction [clockwise]Center [polar]Arc radius R [1]The initial angle of AA [0]


Z []

The final option is [---]-------------------------------------------------- -Event 3 of 4Removal of the instrumentCompleting the cycle of milling

Forward to the part after the removal tool[Automatically]

Call island # [] # Call the islet []Call island # [] # Call the islet []Call island # [] # Call the islet []Call island # [] # Call the islet []-------------------------------------------------- -Event 4 of 4End of program


Regulation X (relative to the original) []Regulation Y (relative to the original) []-------------------------------------------------- -

178


In the following graphic representation is given a sample program using the option of milling curved walls at the beginning of a cycle of milling tool with a puncture.

0 ° - a vertical wall, 90 ° - is impossible. Rounded wall also has an option for end mill. To be able to use the curved walls of the correction must be activated on the cutting tool. First depth of Z should be the top of the wall. The first pass is adjusted for the entire radius of the tool.

Note: See more information on the rounded walls of the page 391Section 5.

F5 (Pockt) Mill-Pockt (Milling - Deep excavation)

When selecting F5 (Pockt), a function of milling of deep cavities, the following panel keys.

F1 (Setup) Mill-Pockt-Setup (Milling - Deep groove - Installation)

Screen F1 (Setup) is used to set the parameters needed for the programs of milling round, rectangular and polygonal cavities. Setting must be done before any milling grooves programs. Cleanup dredging hand does not require the installation screen.

The cycles start and end milling not should be used with programs of milling deep cavities.

Note: All automatic standard milling program must be activated with the instrument in the heart of the program.

179


Below is an interactive screen to install the milling of deep cavities.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368Installing the software milling of deep cavities

A center of the notch [1]Center recess Y [2]

Feed rate XY [20]The feed rate puncture Z [10]Point of Return [Gap]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [- .2]The increment of Z [.25]

Note: See more information about standard milling of deep cavities programs on page 290,297 in Section 4, and page 395 in Section 5.

F2 (Circ) Mill-Pockt-Circ (Milling - Deep groove - Round)

When you select F2 (Circ) appears next panel function keys.

180


F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Clean)

Below is a dialog screen to clear the circular cut-outs in a clockwise direction.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368Cleaning the deep recesses of round

Notch radius [4]Finishing allowance XY [.01]Finishing allowance Z [.01]Cutting width [.25]

Z down [incision]Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more information about clearing the round cut-outs on page 290, Section 4.

181


F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Circ-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Round - Finishing)

Below is an interactive screen for internal finishing of round recesses in a clockwise direction.

Event 6 of 18 Bytes: 895 out of 1,023,932,928Internal finishing round of deep grooves

Notch radius [1.3]

Z down [Line] Corner [3.5]Areas of cut [counter-clockwise (counter-milling)]Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more details about the internal finishing the round cut-outs on page 291, Section 4.

F3 (Rect) Mill-Pockt-Rect (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular)

When you select F3 (Rect) (Milling rectangular recesses) appears next panel function keys.

182


F1 (Clear) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Clear (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Clean)

Below is an interactive screen for cleaning of rectangular grooves in a clockwise direction.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368Cleaning deep rectangular grooves

Size of excavation X [2]Size of excavation Y [4]Finishing allowance XY [.01]Finishing allowance Z [.01]Cutting width [.25]Corner radius [.5]

Z down [incision]Correction [inc. ]Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]

Note: See more information about cleaning up of rectangular cut-outs on page 297, Section 4.

183


F2 (Fin) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Fin (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Finishing)

Below is an interactive screen for internal finishing of rectangular grooves in a clockwise direction.

Event 2 of 4 Bytes: 138 of 237 010 944Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves

Size of excavation X [2]Size of excavation Y [3]The radius of curvature of the vertices [.3]

Z down [incision]Correction [inc. ]Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]

Note: See more details about the internal finishing of rectangular recesses on page 299, Section 4.

F3 (Face) Mill-Pockt-Rect-Face (Milling - Deep groove - Rectangular - Ends)

Below is an interactive screen for loop ends.

184


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368The processing cycle ends

Size of excavation X [3]Size of excavation Y [6]Cutting width [.2]

Correction [inc. ]

F4 (Manul) Mill-Pockt-Manul (Milling - Deep groove - Clean by hand)

The function is used to manually clean grooves to the operator was able to move the tool on a graphic screen and create a tool path with the arrow keys (move tool) and press enter (to select points).

To add the manual points interactively select F2 (Mill) - F5 (Pockt) - F4 (Manul). Screen cleaning recesses in the manual mode is as follows:

Event 1 of 16 Bytes: 366 of 215 711 744Cleaning the deep recesses in the manual mode

The feed rate puncture Z []Point of Return [Gap]Clearance []The final depth of Z []1st depth of Z []The increment of Z []

Number to use the tool []

After pressing the F1 (Store) (Save) to increase the area you want to clear,then click on Help (Manul) (Manual). Use the cursor keys to the tool, use the key Enter (Enter) to select positions.

The fields on the screen similar to the beginning of the cycle of milling. Number of tool used to graphically display the tool (the diameter of the tool in the tool table). After filling out the fields

185


on the screen and pressing the F1 (Store) (Save) programmable item will be checked (the part and tool path). The operator may enter into the frame, increase or pan, press the Help (Man) (Manual mode) and move the tool by using the cursor keys and Enter key to select the tool position.

When the operator leaves the graphics mode, the control unit stores the point, as the cycle of cutting, using the 1st point in the cycle as the initial start of milling. The remaining points are stored as lines. Event end milling cycle persists after the last line.

Note: To use this feature it is recommended that the operator has programmed the region, requiring manual data, and grooves put in the function of cleaning by hand before the geometrical parameters to be cleaned.

F5 (Polyg) Mill-Pockt-Polyg (Milling - Deep groove - Polygonal)

Below is an interactive screen for polygonal milling cycle of deep grooves.

186


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 131 out of 1,023,932,928The inner loop cutting deep grooves of polygonal

The number of sides [6][The radius of the plane] [1]Angle to the first vertex [0]The radius of curvature of the vertices [.2]

Z down [Line] Corner [2.5]Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more details about the cycle of cutting polygonal cut-outs on page 304, Section 4.

F6 (Frame) Mill-Frame (Milling - Frame)

When choosing F6 (Frame) (frame) appears next panel function keys.

F1 (Setup) Mill-Frame-Setup (Milling - Frame - Installation)

Screen F1 (Setup) (Set) is used to set the parameters needed for automatic programming cutting round and rectangular frames. Installing the program should be carried out before any cutting program framework.

The cycles start and end milling not should be used with programs of cutting the frame.

Note: All automatic standard milling program must be activated with the instrument in the heart of the program.All standard automatic routing software framework can be used to determine the G65 X___Y___ center.

Below is a dialog screen to install the routing framework.

187


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368Installing the software routing framework

Center frame X [1]Center frame Y [3]

Feed rate XY [20]The feed rate puncture Z [10]Point of Return [Home]Gap [.1]The final depth of Z [-1]1st depth Z [- .2]The increment of Z [.25]

F2 (Circ) Mill-Frame-Circ (Milling - Frame - Round)

Below is an interactive screen for milling round outside the scope counterclockwise.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368Outdoor finishing the round frames

The radius of the framework [4]

Z down [incision]Correction [Off. ]Areas of cut [counter-clockwise (dial.)]

Note: See more information on finishing the round outer frame on the page 293, Section 4.

188


F3 (Rect) Mill-Frame-Rect (Milling - Frame - Rectangle)

Below is an interactive screen for outdoor finishing a rectangular frame:

Event 2 of 2 Bytes: 206 1023932928The inner loop cutting deep grooves of polygonal

Size of the frame X [2]Frame size Y [4]The corner radius [.05]

Z down [Line] Corner [3.5]Correction [inc. ]Areas of cut [clockwise (counter-milling)]

Note: See more information about the external finishing of rectangular frames on the page 302, Section 4.

F5 (Poly) Mill-Frame-Poly (Milling - Frame - Polygon)

Interactive screen for processing polygonal outer frame is as follows:

189


Event 3 of 4 Bytes: 139 264 000 149 ofThe cycle of the internal processing of polygonal frames

The number of sides [6]

[The radius of the plane] [1]Angle to the first vertex [0]The radius of curvature of the vertices [.2]

Z down [incision]Areas of cut [clockwise (dial.)]Correction [inc. ]

Note: See more details about the cycle of cutting polygonal frame on page 304, Section 4.

F7 (3dPkt) Mill-3dPkt (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions)

When you select F7 (3dPkt) appears next panel function keys.

F1 (Start) Mill-3dPkt-Start (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - Home)

Use the F1 (Start) (Home) is called the next dialog screen to start the cycle pazvertki in 3 dimensions.

190


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080The beginning of the sweep cycle in 3 dimensionsGap [.1]The feed rate puncture Z [5]The feed rate of the arc [10]Starting point X [0] Y ZThe radius of the beginning of the sweep R [1]The initial angle of the sweep of AA [- .001]The final sweep angle AB [180]Aisle width [.05]The plane sweep [YZ]Correction of the cutting tool [inc. ]

Notes on the cycle of scanning in 3 dimensions

Note 1: If the initial angle sweep = sweep the final corner, the arc will not be formed.

Note 2: Negative angles indicate the initial covering part, the positive initial angles - for the male part.

After filling out the home screen 3D next step - it is programming the desired path using only lines and arcs. These should be entered through screens Mill-3DPkt-Line or Mill-3DPkt-Arc. Once introduced XY profile details using the above cycle will be scanning the arcs in this plane along the lines of pre-programmed, or XY, until the cycle is completed the sweep by the events unfolding in the decontamination cycle of 3 dimensions. The net result of this cycle is the rotation of the programmed contour in the XZ plane XY, or YZ. In the case of the bottle mold bottle only has to be programmed in the plane XY, and then rotated in the YZ plane or XZ.

191


F4 (End) Mill-3dPkt-End (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - End)

To complete the cycle sweep seizures in 3-dimensions, select the key F4 (End), or you will receive an error message. Below is an interactive screen for decontamination cycle scan in 3 dimensions.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 854 343 368 Deactivation of sweep cycles in 3-dimensions.

A sample program using theScan cycle in 3 dimensions

Installing the software



Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- -

192


Event 1 of 6

The beginning of the sweep cycle in 3 dimensions Gap [.1]The feed rate puncture Z [15]The feed rate of the arc [20]Starting point X [2 ]

Y [1 ]Z [0 ]

The initial radius R scan [1 ]The initial angle of the sweep AA [- .0001]The final sweep angle AB [180 ]Width of passage [.05]The plane sweep [XZ]Correction of the cutting tool [inc.]-------------------------------------------------- -Event 2 of 6

Three-dimensional geometry - Line The feed rate []Coordinates [Cartesian]The X-axis X [3]The Y-axis Y [3]The Z-axis Z []-------------------------------------------------- -Event 3 of 6

Three-dimensional geometry - Line The feed rate []Coordinates [Cartesian]The X-axis X []The Y-axis Y [4]The Z-axis Z []-------------------------------------------------- -

193


Event 4 of 6

Three-dimensional geometry - arc The plane [XY]The feed rate F []The direction [clockwise]Center [the absolute center]The radius of the arc R [1 ]

Center of arc XC [3 ]YC [5 ]

End point [Absolute]X [2 ]Y [5 ]Z [ ]

-------------------------------------------------- -Event 5 of 6

Deactivation of sweep cycles in 3 dimensions -------------------------------------------------- -Event 6 of 6End of programSpindle off [No]Coolant off [No]Z to the tool change [No]Regulation X (relative to baseline) []Regulation Y (relative to baseline) []---------------------------------------------------

The next graphic shows an example of the mapping program using cutting-cycle refresh in 3 dimensions.

194


F5 (3dArc) Mill-3dPkt-3dArc (Milling - Sweep in 3 dimensions - three-dimensional arc)

When you press the F5 (3dArc) appears next dialog screen to call a subroutine function three-dimensional arc.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 89 out of 109 510 656 Subroutine call three-dimensional arc Turning to the trajectory of the sub, including the outside of the plane of the arc.Does not support the correction to the cutting tool or trigonometric help.All arcs must be the absolute center. The plane [XY to Z]Clearance []Starting point X [1] Y ZThe initial angle [0]The angle increment of [-5]

The called routine [826]Number of cycles [36]

Below is a sample program using three-dimensional arc:

195


Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P0825 Event 0 of 2Installing the software



Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 2 Subroutine call three-dimensional arc

Turning to the trajectory of the sub, including the outside of the plane of the arc.Does not support the correction to the cutting tool or trigonometric help.All arcs must be the absolute center.

The plane [Xy - Z] Clearance [] Starting point X [1] Y [1] Z [0] The initial angle [0] The angle increment of [-5]

The called routine [826] Number of cycles [36]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 2 End of program

The spindle is turned off [yes]Coolant is turned off [yes]Z to change the tool [not]


196


Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P0826 Event 0 out of 5 Installing the software



Notes on setting: [] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 5 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line



End of [---]


197





End of [---]



The axis X X [] The axis Y Y [4] The axis Z Z []

End of [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [Disabled]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 5

Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug The plane [XY]The feed rate F []The direction [clockwise]Center [the absolute center]The radius of the arc R [1 ]Center of arc XC [3 ]

YC [5 ] End point [Absolute] X [2] Y [5] Z []


198


Event 5 of 5 End of program

The spindle is turned off [yes]Coolant is turned off [yes]Z to change the tool [not]


The next graphic shows an example of the mapping program using three-dimensional arc:

F8 (CAD) Mill-CAD (milling - CAD)

Importing CAD files in the devices CNC milling machines Milltronics.The control unit has the ability to import files to CAD (. Dxf or. Cdl) directly in the interactive program. With this possibility created by the events of lines and arcs that define the geometric parameters of the details.

Creating a CAD drawing to be imported.Imported only lines and arcs. The text, splines, polylines, dimension data, boundary drawings are not imported. When you create a file milling CAD geometric parameters of CAD file to form a continuous path from start to finish, with no gaps between objects. There is a parameter that controls the search distance that the control device will be used to find the next object. It is located in the parameters of F7 (Parms) - F1 (Setup) - F1 (Level) - F5 (Misc) and designated as CAD EPSILON. It is necessary to edit the parameter to a value that will work with the files CAD (recommended from 0.0003 to 0.0005).

The following is an entry screen for CAD.

199


RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Mill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Milling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distanceRoute CAD fileCAD File NameEnhanced CAD file

CAD file will be displayed after clicking on the F1. Press the F1 (Path) (path) to select the starting point and direction of the cut.


Input = input; Menn = menu; Strip = delete; Esc = exit;

According to the introduced above route CAD file DXF file will be imported from the "C: \ CK19 \ DXF". You can specify any valid path to the file allocation drawings CAD. Use the F2 (Menu) (Menu), you can select the item from the list of all files stored in the control unit or any of their CDs. When the light is the key F3 (Strip) (Delete), the control unit will delete the file from Z CAD. This is useful for 2-axis geometry. To import the size of the Z key to switch from F3 (Strip) (Delete) that it has not been activated.

The only valid option for the field of file extensions CAD - a. DXF and. CDL. This field is set by default DXF. If you want, you can adjust the MISC (optional) so that the default standing CDL.

200


Once the file name has been entered and selected F1 (Input) (Enter) to display all the geometric parameters of the file CAD (lines and arcs) and any additional events in the program. Key F1 (Path) (path) is used to select the trajectory and direction.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Mill-Verf-Graph = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Routing-Check-Graphical Active = ActiveCorrection: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length:Submission:Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details:Path = path; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = exit

After selecting the key F1 (Path) (trajectory), the control unit will prompt the operator to select the starting point for the trajectory. The starting point is selected by moving the crosshair to the desired location using the arrow keys F7 - F10 (you can also use buttons move the jog) and press F5 (Enter) (Enter) (or you can use the Enter key on your keyboard). After the initial point is selected, the control unit will prompt the operator to select points in the desired direction of cutting. This point is chosen by the same procedure. The control unit uses these two points to create a path.

201


F9 (Thred) Mill-Thred (Milling - Thread)

Use the F9 (Thred) displays the input screen for thread milling. The following shows two examples.

Event 9 of 9 Bytes: 317 of 422 576 128Thread milling cycle Center for X [] Center Y [0]The initial depth [0]The final depth of Z [-1]Threads per unit [10]Gap [.1]The feed rate [50]Part of the wall [internal]The direction of the thread [right]Correction [inc. ]Passages [forward-]

Thread type [cylindrical]Diameter [2]

202


Event 9 of 9 Bytes: 317 of 422 576 128Thread milling cycle Center for X [] Center Y [0]The initial depth [0]The final depth of Z [-1]Threads per unit [10]Gap [.1]The feed rate [50]Part of the wall [external]The direction of the thread [right]Correction [inc. ]Passages [multipass]Reducing the diameter of [.5]The final diameter [1.5] Thread type [conical]The initial diameter [2]The angle of the cone [3.52]

Note: See information on the correct combination of the correction to the cutting tool, cutting directions on page 307, Section 4.

F3 (Drill) Drill (Drill)

When you select F3 (Drill), the following menu.

All cycles must begin drilling before the end and after the last hole. This is done by pressing F1 (Start) (Start) and F5 (End) (End).

203


Dialog screens

The screen started drilling cycle F3 (Drill) a switch box to select the type of drilling to be performed. In the beginning of a cycle is usually followed by drilling holes for the position, and it ends with the completion of drilling cycle event. Optional drilling cycles are shown below.

Boring Below is an interactive screen for drilling.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 96 out of 406 159 360Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle]

The feed rate puncture F [5]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth of [-2]

Note: See more details about the cycle of drilling on page 355, Section 4.

204


Drilling / PauseBelow is an interactive screen for drilling / pause.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 99 out of 402 259 968Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle with a pause]

The feed rate puncture F [5]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.5]

Note: See more details about the cycle of drilling / pause on page 355, Section 4.

Drill / drill bits with a periodic output Below is an interactive screen for drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill.

205


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 143 402 227 200Activate the drilling cycle [Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill]

The feed rate puncture F [5]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25]The increment in Q [.25] The gap in the periodic output bits D [0.2]

Note: See more information about the drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill on page 356, Section 4.

Struzhkolomnoe drilling Below is an interactive screen for struzhkolomnogo drilling cycle.

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 108 724 224 134 ofActivate the drilling cycle [Struzhkolomny drilling cycle]

The feed rate puncture F [5]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25]The increment in Q [.25] The gap in the periodic output bits D [0.2] Step periodic output bits U [.2]

Note: See more details about struzhkolomnom drilling cycle on page 349, Section 4.

206


BoringBelow is an interactive screen for boring cycle.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 398 032 896 191 ofActivate the drilling cycle [Boring Cycle]


Note: See more details about the cycle of boring on the page 358, Section 4.

207


Boring / PauseBelow is an interactive screen for boring / pause.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 219 402 227 200Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring with a pause]


Note: See more details about the cycle of boring with a pause on page 364, Section 4.

Boring 2The following shows the dialog screens bore 2.

208


Accelerated boring

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 281 of 396 361 728Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2][Accelerated boring]


Note: See more details about the accelerated cycle of boring on the page 359, Section 4.

Fine boring

209


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 281 of 396 361 728Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2][Fine boring]


Note: See more details about the cycle finish boring page 351, Section 4.

Contact boring

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 315 of 396 361 728Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2][Contact boring]The feed rate puncture F [5]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000]

The initial depth of the R [.1]The final depth of [-2]

Note: See more details about the feedback loop boring page 360, Section 4.

210


Boring manual

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 343 of 396 361 728Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2][Boring manual]The feed rate puncture F [5]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.6]

Note: See more information about the boring cycle manually on page 354, Section 4.

211


Tsekovanie

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 108 724 224 184 ofActivate the drilling cycle [The cycle of boring 2][Tsekovanie]The feed rate puncture F [5]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [2000]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25]The increment in Q [.25] Feed rate XY [7] Correction of the cutting tool [inc.]Radius tsekovki [1]

Note: See more details about the cycle tsekovki page 358, Section 4.

212


Drilling holes to screw (Drill-Start-Tap)The following shows the dialog screens for drilling holes for the loop thread.

Drilling holes for soft tapping on the right

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 488 of 396 034 048Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw][A soft tapping on the right]The feed rate puncture F [20]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth of [-2]

Pause before turning in [.2]Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for soft tapping on the right page 357, Section 4.

213


Drilling holes for soft tapping on the left

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 488 of 396 034 048Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw][A soft tapping on the left]The feed rate puncture F [14.2857]Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]The final depth [-2.5]

Pause before turning in the [0]Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for soft tapping on the left of page 350, Section 4.

214


Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right

Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 206 243 236 864Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw][Rigid Tapping on the right (option)]Threads per unit of F [14]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]Depth [-2.5]

Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for rigid tapping on the right page 362, Section 4.

Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left

215


Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 206 243 138 560Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw][Rigid Tapping on the left side (optional)]Threads per unit of F [14]Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]Depth [-2.5]

Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine holes for rigid tapping on the left of page 362, Section 4.

Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the right with a periodic output bits

Event 1 of 4 Bytes: 243 138 560 241 ofActivate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw][Rigid Tapping on the right (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill]Threads per unit of F [14]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [200]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]Depth [-2.5]The first deep V [- .5] The increment in Q [.5]Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine threaded holes on the left of page 362, Section 4.

216


Drilling holes for rigid tapping on the left with the conclusion of the periodic drills

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 130 of 105 644 032Activate the drilling cycle [The cycle of drilling holes to screw][Rigid Tapping on the left (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill]Threads per unit of F [14]Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [200]Point of Return [Gap]Clearance R [.1]Depth [-2.5]The first deep V [- .5] The increment in Q [.5]Pause after the rotation R [0]

Note: See more details about the cycle ofVerlaine threaded holes on the left of page 362, Section 4.

F2 (Pos) Drill-Pos (Drilling-positioning), F3 (Misc) Drill-Misc (Drilling - Options), F4 (Call) Drill-Call (Drilling - Call)

Use the F2 (Pos) displays screens of positioning. They are used to input the provisions of the drill.

217


Event 2 of 2 Bytes: 78 out of 198 508 544Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express]Coordinates [Cartesian]

The X axis X [1]The axis Y Y [2]The axis Z Z []

Mesh openings [---]Openings to the intervals [---]

The screen shown above - is the screen of one of the holes for drilling. One hole will be drilled or cut in the (1,2). If the field Z is entered in this screen size, will be drilled at the depth of the new (1.2) and subsequent holes. If only the size of the typed appears in the Z, Z-axis move to this position, the hole is not drilled and the depth of Z does not change. This can be useful for cleaning fixtures or fasteners.

218


Event 3 of 5 Bytes: 395 608 064 187 of Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express]Coordinates [Cartesian]


The grid of holes [yes]The number of columns [6] The number of lines [5]The interval between the columns [1] The interval between the rows of [.75]

The figure above shows the screen position when drilling with option grid holes. Grid will be drilled holes 6 x 5 with an interval of 1 "X-axis and 0.75" along the axis Y. The first hole at (1,2). Below is a grid pattern of holes created by this phenomenon.

219


The following shows the screen positioning for drilling holes with the option at intervals. Will be drilled or cut six holes, including a hole at (1,2). If in the interval X is 0, the line of holes will be drilled vertically. If the interval Y is 0, the hole will be drilled on a horizontal line.

Event 3 of 5 Bytes: 151 3956440832Positioning for drilling The feed rate [Express]Coordinates [Cartesian]


Openings to the intervals [yes] The number of holes [6] The interval between the columns [1] The interval between the lines [.75]

With the above screen will be created following the grid holes.

220


Pressing the F3 (Misc) (Options) screen is displayed with additional features that makes it possible to program these functions during the drilling cycle. Screen F4 (Call) (Call) provides the ability to call routines during the drilling cycle. These routines typically include provisions for various drilling operations.

Note: See more details about the extra features on page 244, Section 3.

See more details about the call on page 245, Section 3.

F5 (End) (End)

Below is an interactive screen for decontamination of the group cycle.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,434,368 Decontamination of drilling cycle

In this screen does not need anything to enter, but it must be stored in the program to stop the cycle of active drilling. If the screen is not saved, every action will cause the loop drilling on the axis Z.

F6 (CAD) Drill-CAD (Drilling - CAD)

Importing CAD files in the devices CNC milling machines Milltronics.The control unit has the ability to import files to CAD (. Dxf or. Cdl) directly in the interactive program. With this feature imported circle defining the position for drilling.

Creating a CAD drawing to be imported.From CAD file is imported to drill only a circle.

221


The following is an entry screen for file Drill CAD.

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Drill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Drilling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

Route CAD fileCAD File NameEnhanced CAD file

Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Gap:Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Input = input; Menn = menu; Strip = delete; Esc = exit;

According to the introduced above route CAD file DXF file will be imported from the "C: \ CK19 \ DXF". You can specify any valid path to the file allocation drawings CAD. Use the F2 (Menu) (Menu), you can select the item from the list of all files stored in the control unit or on any of the disks. When the light is the key F3 (Strip) (Delete), the control unit will delete the file from Z CAD. To import the depths of the Z key to switch from F3 (Strip) (Delete) that it has not been activated.

The only valid option for the field of file extensions CAD - a. DXF and. CDL. This field is set by default DXF. If you want, you can adjust the MISC (optional) so that the default standing CDL.

222


Drill CAD sorts hole size. This allows the operator to select what you want to drill holes. After selecting the F1 (Input) (Enter) comes a list of openings:

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Conv-Drill-DXF = Main Screen-Program-Interactive Mode-Drilling-DXF Editing = Editing Current = current next Next = Distance = the distance

Diam. = Diameter ofHoles = hole

Choose the hole that you want to drill.

Correction: canceled Instrument: Length: Diameter: Plane: Gap:Interpolation: linear (feed) Submission: (ipm = inches / min)Units: absolute / English system Cycle: canceledPause: (sec = seconds) Spindle: (rpm = r / min) Coolant: Disabled Number details:

Start = start; Set = setting; Reset = Reset; All = all; None = no; Togle = shift; PgUp = Page Up; PgDn = page down; Abort = end; Drive = CD

Use the function keys to select the desired holes. After pressing the F1 (Start) (Start) are included in the selected hole drilling cycle. The operator can change the feed rate for drilling depth and drilling cycles are different.

223


Example of drilling program

Event 0 out of 17 Installing the software

The name of the program [Example of drilling programs]

Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

Installation Notes: [ ] [] [] [] [] [] -------------------------------------------------- -Event 1 of 17 Change of tool

Tool [Cut] The situation in the tool change X []

Y []

Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [DRILL] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [irrigation] -------------------------------------------------- -

224


Event 2 of 17 Activation of drilling cycle [Drilling cycle]

The feed rate for puncture F [20] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [] Return point [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2 ]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 3 of 17 Positioning for drilling

The feed rate [Faster] Coordinates [Cartesian]

The X-axis X [1] The Y-axis Y [1] (Z to 2 ")

The Z-axis Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 17 Positioning for drilling


The X-axis X [2] The Y-axis Y [] (Z to 2 ") The Z-axis Z []



The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [] The Z-axis Z [3] (Z to 3 "to go to clip)

225




The X-axis X [4] The Y-axis Y [] (Z to -1 ") The Z-axis Z [-1]



The X-axis X [5] The Y-axis Y [] (Z to -1 ") The Z-axis Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---] -------------------------------------------------- - Event 8 of 17 Decontamination of drilling cycle -------------------------------------------------- - Event 9 of 17 Change of tool


Y []

Number of tools T [2] Description of instrument [BORING] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise]

226


Coolant [irrigation]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 10 of 17 Activation of drilling cycle [Boring Cycle]

The feed rate for puncture F [20] Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [] Return point [Gap] Gap R [.1] The final depth of [-2 ]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 11 of 17 Positioning for drilling


The X-axis X [1] The Y-axis Y [1] (Z to 2 ") The Z-axis Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---]-------------------------------------------------- -

Event 12 of 17 Positioning for drilling


The X-axis X [2] The Y-axis Y [] (Z to 2 ") The Z-axis Z []



The X-axis X []

227


The Y-axis Y [] The Z-axis Z [3] (Z to 3 "to go to clip)



The X-axis X [4] The Y-axis Y [] (Z to -1 ") The Z-axis Z [-1]



The X-axis X [5] The Y-axis Y [] (Z to -1 ") The Z-axis Z []

Mesh openings [---] The holes at intervals of [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 16 of 17 Decontamination of drilling cycle-------------------------------------------------- - Event 17 of 17 End of program

Spindle off [Yes]Coolant off [Yes]Z to the tool change [No]

Regulation X (relative to the original) []Regulation Y (relative to the original) []

Note: See more information about the group cycles on page 340, Section 4.

228


229


F4 (Bolt) (Bolt)

The following shows the dialog screens for drilling holes for screws that are displayed when you select the corresponding cycles. In the first part of the screen contains the information used to set the appropriate drilling cycle, while the second part - the information used to set the cycle of drilling holes for bolts.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 385 056 768 115 ofThe cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of drilling holes for screws]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2]

Center bolt hole [-1] [1]The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counter-clockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0]Number of openings carried out [6]Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 385 056 768 115 ofThe cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of drilling holes for bolts with a pause]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2] Pause P [1]


230


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 229 385 056 768The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of drilling bolt holes / drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25]The increment in Q [.25]Gap the periodic output bits D [.1]


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 229 385 056 768The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of drilling bolt holes with periodic withdrawal of the drill]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2] The first deep V [- .25]The increment in Q [.25]Gap the periodic output bits D [.1]The increment of the periodic output bits U [.2]Center bolt hole [-1] [1]The radius of bolt holes [2] (-R, if the counter-clockwise) Angle of 1st hole [0]Number of openings carried out [6]Number of holes at 360 degrees. [6]

231


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 344 of 385 056 768The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of boring bolt holes with a pause]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.5]


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 344 of 385 056 768The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of boring bolt holes]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2]


232


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 396 of 385 056 768The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Fast boring]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2]


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 446 of 380 862 464The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Fine boring]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2] Pause P [.7]


233


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 380 862 464 500 ofThe cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Contact boring]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]The initial depth of the R [.1]The final depth of [-2]


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 548 of 380 862 464The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of boring bolt holes 2] [Boring manual]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2] Pause P [1]


234


Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 105 644 032 197 ofThe cycle performance of bolt holes [The cycle of boring bolt holes 2][Tsekovanie]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-1] The first deep V [- .25]The increment in Q [- .3] Feed rate XY [7] correction [inc.]Radius tsekovki [1]


235


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 380 862 464 821 ofThe cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [The soft tapping on the left]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2]

Pause before turning in [.2]Pause after the turn of P [0]


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 601 of 380 862 464The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [The soft tapping on the right]The feed rate puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [1000]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2]

Pause before turning in [.2]Pause after the turn of P [0]


236


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 877 of 380 862 464The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [Rigid Tapping on the left side (optional)]Threads per unit of P [10]Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [400]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]Depth [-2]

Pause after the turn of P [0]


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 713 of 380 862 464The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of tapping on the bolt holes] [Rigid Tapping on the right (option)]Threads per unit of P [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [400]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]Depth [-2]

Pause after the turn of P [0]


237


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 929 380 862 464 ofThe cycle performance of bolt holes[Rigid Tapping on the right (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill]Threads per unit of F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S [400]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]Depth [-2]The first deep V [-1] The increment of Q [1]Pause after the rotation R [0]


Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 988 of 380 862 464The cycle performance of bolt holes[Rigid Tapping on the left (option) with periodic withdrawal of the drill]Threads per unit of F [10]Spindle incl., Counter-clockwise, rev / min S [400]Point of Return [Gap]Gap R [.1]Depth [-2]The first deep V [-1] The increment of Q [1]Pause after the rotation R [0]


The example program execution bolt holes

Event 0 of 3 Installing the software

The name of the program [The example program execution bolt holes]

Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] []

-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 3 Change of tool


Y []

Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [DRILL]

238


Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [2000] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise] Coolant [Irrigation]

-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 3

The cycle performance of bolt holes[The cycle of drilling holes for screws]The feed rate for puncture F [10]Spindle incl., Clockwise, rev / min S []Return point [Gap]Gap R [.1]The final depth of [-2]

Center bolt hole [-4] [2]The radius of bolt holes [-3] (-R, if

counter-clockwise) Angle of 1st hole [90]Number of holes running [8]Number of holes at 360 degrees. [14]

-------------------------------------------------- - Event 3 of 3 End of program

Spindle off [Yes]Coolant off [Yes]Z to the tool change [No]

Regulation X (relative to baseline) []Regulation Y (relative to baseline) []

239


Notes: See more details about the program execution bolt holes in the p 346, Section 4.

And drilling cycles, and cycles run bolt holes dialog entry screens will be different versions of the software below # .116. They also translated into other languages and in English translation # .110. The input fields are the same in all versions of the software, but the appearance and the stages of transition to the input screen is slightly different. For each cycle in older versions of some keys appear to the programmer can choose the type of cycle to be done, and not the field to the desired switching cycle, which is available in more modern versions. If the interactive program is created in an older version of the drilling cycle or run bolt holes, it can be edited in the new versions of software. However, if the interactive program is created in a more modern version of the drilling cycle or run bolt holes, it can not be edited using older versions of software. Fatal Error 100 "Disk read error" (error reading disk) will appear when trying to run a series of drill holes or run under the bolts of a new type of interactive program using an older version of the software. If the program is interactive with the cycles of drilling holes for bolts execution of a new type is edited in older versions of software, and a fatal error 100 is issued, the control unit will incorrectly change the text in the program. It will destroy the event, which contains a series of drill holes or run a new type of bolt. The control unit generates program text corresponding to the input data in an interactive program, and the text program will run machines. Time is a program that creates a control device is identical for both types, so you can edit and execute in the new and old versions of software, no matter in which it was created.

240


F5 (TChng) Change Tool

If the machine you want to install a new tool to use screen tool change. The two screens of the tool change is the screen calling and screen tool tool changer. Call Screen tool used to launch a new set of corrections to the tool without the physical shift. Screen Machine tool changer sets the mode and the tool change is a new tool. When you change or correction tool call H and D, which are activated will be the same as the number of the instrument. For security purposes, when you change the machine tool manually always should be in the mode of the tool change. Showing below displays the tool.

Dialog screen to display the tool is as follows. Tool change is not carried out. Caused by the correction of the instrument. Commands are executed, and the spindle coolant.

Event 1 of 3 Bytes: 209 out of 1,023,932,928Change of tool

Tool [Challenge]

Tool number T [1]Description of the tool [1/4 "drill bit]

Spindle speed S [600]The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise]

Coolant [irrigation] Screw [---]

Interactive screen for changing tools.

241



Tool [Change]Position Tool Changer X [-10] Y [-10]Tool number T [1]Description of the tool [1/4 "drill bit]Number of the next tool []Spindle speed S [600]The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise]

Coolant [irrigation]

If you make a tool change position Z-axis is in the tool change position or higher, moving XY is produced before any movement on the axis Z. If Z is lower than the position tool changer, Z moves to the position of the tool changer, and then will move X and Y. If the number of X and Y are not introduced during the tool change will only move Z.

The field numbers next tool is used to change the device for instruments installed in any slot. The holder of the instrument will produce a next-indexing tool during the cutting of the active tool.

Note: See more information about the tool change on page 384Section 5.

If the machine is equipped with a chip removal system, the option will be available to enable (or disable) the screw, and while it is running.

242



Tool [Challenge]Position Tool Changer X [-10] Y [-10]Tool number T [1]Description of the tool [1/4 "drill bit]Number of the next tool []Spindle speed S [600]The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise]

Coolant [irrigation] Screw [inc.]Screw Time incl. [10] minutes

243


F6 (Misc) (Additional Functions)

When you create a program may need to add some additional features, such as command and stop the coolant. This is done through a screen F6 (Misc) (Additional Functions).

The following shows the dialog screens for extra features. The additional line is used to enter any M-code is not included in the standard list.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Additional Features

Spindle speed S []Team spindle [---]Team coolant [OFF]. Correction [off].Stop command [the program]The team return [from XYZ to 0]Cutting [---] Programming mode [absolute]Working coordinate [---]The feed rate F []Additional line: []

244


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Additional Features

Spindle speed S [2000]Team spindle [clockwise]Team coolant [irrigation] Correction [left]Stop command [---]The team return [---]Cutting [ongoing] Programming mode [---]Working coordinate [---]The feed rate F []Additional line: []

F7 (Call) (Call)

The screen program call is used to transfer the program to another program for a certain number of cycles.

Below is a dialog screen to invoke the program.

Event 2 of 4 Bytes: 105 644 032 291 ofCalling the program

Program number [900]Options [cycles]Number of cycles [2]

If the number of cycles in the field is empty, the routine is called once.

Note: See more information about the calling routine on page 396Section 5.

245


Calls to subroutines can be used to create multiple identical parts in a row or grid. The screen shown below, can be used to call a subroutine for cutting grooves.

Event 2 of 3 Bytes: 108 of 105 578 496Calling the program

Program number [900]Options [Grid]1st position of the X [2] Y [3]Number of columns [5] The number of rows [4]Intervals X [3] The intervals Y [3]

F8 (Spec) (Specifications)

These screens are designed to install or configure various parameters of the CNC Centurion. The parameters control various functions such as tool offset, scale factors, rotation angles, mirroring, floating zero and the parameters listed in Appendix A. The following keys.

246


F1 (Parms) Spec-Parms (Specifications - Options)

Below is a dialog screen to adjust the parameters.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting

Installation Type [control]The parameter P [97]The value of [.25]

When loading a parameter set to the specified amount. When adjusting the parameters specified value is added to the current configuration.

F2 (Tools) Spec-Tools (Specifications - Tools)

Below is an interactive screen for setting tool offset.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Installing the tool offset

(Note: This will affect only a tool, currently active)Type of installation [download]Correction of the instrument D [.25] H [.75]

Note: See more details about the correction of the length of the tool on page 326, Section 4.

247


Below is a dialog screen to adjust the tool offset.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Installing the tool offset

(Note: This will affect only a tool, currently active)Installation Type [control]Correction of the instrument D [.1] H [.15]

248


F4 (Scale) Spec-Scale (Specification - Scale)

Below is a dialog screen to activate the zoom.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the scale factor

Scale [On].The scaling factors [regulation]Correction of the instrument D [.1] H [.15]

Below is a dialog screen to turn off the scale factor.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the scale factor

Scale [Off].

Note: See more information about installing and cancel the zoom to page 327, Section 4.

249


F5 (Rot) Spec-Rot (Specifications - Turn)

Below is a dialog screen to activate the turn.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Set the angle of rotation

Turn [On].The angle of rotation of AA [45]Start turning X [0] Y [0] Z [0]

Note: See more details about the rotation of the coordinate system on page 333, Section 4.

Below is an interactive screen for setting the angle of rotation in three dimensions.

250


Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Set the angle of rotation

Rotate the [3D]

The plane of the [XYZ]The angle of AB [45]Sinus scale [20]Note: Do not work function correction to the cutting tooltrigonometric aid chamfering (, C) and rounded corners (, R).

Rotation in three dimensions is used to rotate the parts out of the plane.

251


F6 (Mirr) Spec-Mirr (Specs - Mirror)

Below is a dialog screen to enable mirroring.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the mirroring

Mirroring [On].Axis mirroring X [0] Y [0] Z [0]

Below is a dialog screen to disable mirroring.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Setting the mirroring

Mirroring [Off].

Note: See more information about installing and cancel mirroring on page 339, Section 4.

252


F7 (Flz) Spec-Flz (Specifications - Floating zero)

Below is a dialog screen to install a floating zero.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080 Install a floating zero

The axis X [0] Y [0] Z [0]

Note: See more about navigating the zeros of p 369, Section 4.

253


F8 (Text) Spec-Text (Specifications - Text)

Below is an interactive screen for text.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 105 of 229 900 288Text [Solid]The position of the text X [1] Y [2]

Clearance R [.1]The depth Z Z [- .03]

The feed rate puncture ZF [20]Feed rate XY F [20]Text size X X [.25]Text size Y Y [.5]A string of text [PART V-36-16]

254


Interactive screen for the text on the arc:

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 225 705 984 113 ofText [On the arc] direction [clockwise]Center the text X [1] Y [2]The radius of the text [1]The initial angle [200]Clearance R [.1]The depth Z Z [- .03]

The feed rate puncture ZF [20]Feed rate XY F [20]Text size X X [.3]Text size Y Y [.3]A string of text [MILLTRONICS]

F9 (Subs) (Sub)

These screens are used to define and call subroutines. Displays the following keys:

255


F1 (Gosub) Subs-Gosub (Sub - Jump to a subroutine)

The function uses Gosub to subroutine call. The screen below is called a sub-15 times. If the number of cycles is not filled, the subroutine will be called one time.

Event 1 of 2 Bytes: 62 220 725 248Go to subroutine

Number of sub [1]Options [cycles]Number of cycles [15]

Another option is to go to the sub-screen is used to call a subroutine and its repetition in a right manner.

Event 1 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 ofGo to subroutine

Number of sub [1]Options [Grid]1st position x [0] Y [0]Number of rows [4] The number of columns [3]Intervals X [3] The intervals Y [2.5]

256


Note: Another option - a subroutine call with the interval between each XY. Functions of the grid and the intervals are similar to those functions in the drilling cycles on page 214, Section 3.

F2 (Start) Subs-Start (Sub - Run)

Start-up screen subroutine defines the beginning of the subroutine.

Event 2 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 ofStarting routines

Number of sub [1]

F3 (End) Subs-End (Sub - Conclusion)

Complete screen subroutine determines the end of the subroutine.

Event 6 of 7 Bytes: 371 220 659 712 ofThe completion routines

257


Example programs using subprograms

Interactive Program C: \ CNC \ PARTS \ P0523 Event 0 out of 12 Installing the software The name of the program [ ] Dimensions The absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 12

Change of tool Tool [Cut]The situation in the tool change X []

Y [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [600] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise]

Coolant [irrigation]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 12 Go to the subroutine

Number of subroutines [1]

Options [Grid]

1st position X [0] Y [0]

Number of rows [4] Number of columns [3]

The interval X [3] The interval Y [2.5]-------------------------------------------------- -

258


Event 3 of 12Change of tool Tool [Cut]The situation in the tool change X []

Y [] Number of tools T [2] Description of instrument [] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [1200] The direction of rotation of the spindle [Clockwise]

Coolant [Fog]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 12 Go to the subroutine

Number of subroutines [2]

Options [Grid]

1st position X [0] Y [0]

Number of rows [4] Number of columns [3]

The interval X [3] The interval Y [2.5]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 5 of 12 Starting routines

Number of subroutines [1]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 6 of 12 Installing the software milling of deep cavities

Center recess X [0 ] Y center of the notch [0 ]

Feed rate XY [10 ] The feed rate puncture Z [5 ] Return point [Gap] Gap [.1 ] The final depth of Z [- .4 ] First the depth Z [- .1 ] The increment of Z [.1 ]-------------------------------------------------- -

259


Event 7 of 12 Internal finishing the round cut-outs

The radius of notch [1 ]

Z down [incision] Direction of cut [counter-clockwise (counter-

milling)] Correction [inc.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 8 of 12 The completion routines-------------------------------------------------- - Event 9 of 12 Starting routines

Number of subroutines [2]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 10 of 12 Text [On the arc] direction [clockwise] Center the text X [0] Y [0] The radius of the text [1 ] The initial angle [180 ] Gap R [.1] The depth Z Z [- .03]

The feed rate puncture Z F [20] Feed rate XY F [30] Text size X X [.3] Text size Y Y [.4]

A string of text [MILLTRONICS]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 11 of 12 The completion routines-------------------------------------------------- - Event 12 of 12

End of program

Spindle off [No]Coolant is turned off [no]Z to the tool change [No]


260


-------------------------------------------------- -

With the above program is executed as follows:

End of program

Below is a dialog screen to complete the program.

Event 1 of 1 Bytes: 47 out of 85,422,080End of program



261

PART 4 - PRE-FUNCTION (G-CODES)

These codes are used if the operator programs the Centurion in text mode or in manual data entry. They are also generated from the interactive program. It should be noted that most programmers, especially beginners, use interactive programming mode. If you plan to use the text-mode programming, you need to pay special attention to this section as it explains the codes. If you plan to use the interactive programming mode, you can skim this section and concentrate on the section of the dialog programming.

Preparatory function code is a two-digit number preceded by the letter G. Preparatory functions are used to determine the mode of operation of the program and are divided into two types: one-time and modal. One-time G-codes are only valid during the execution of the block in which they are located. With the help of modal G-code set operating modes, which act as long as they do not replace other modes in the same category. If the G-code is less than 10, enter zero is not necessarily (G2 or G02).

The table below lists the G-codes adopted by the CNC Centurion. A detailed explanation of each code is given below in this manual.

G-codes

Active power- Modal Disposable

00 Fast positioning X

01 Linear interpolation X X

02 The circular / helical interpolation clockwise X

03The circular / helical interpolation counterclockwise

X

04 Pause X

09 Exact stop X

10 Data Set incl. X

11 Installing the data off. X X

12 Cleaning the floating zero X

17 The XY plane X X

18 The plane XZ or ZX X

19 The plane YZ X*20 Input in inches X X

*21 Input in metric units X

*22 How to disable the safe zone X

*23 Enable checking the safe zone X X

24 Cleaning the deep recesses of round X

* G20, G21, G22 and G23 are selected on the parameters at power on.

263


25 Internal finishing round of deep grooves X

26 Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves X

28-30 Return to the zero point X

31 Z to the gap X

32 Z to the tool change X

33 The processing cycle ends X

34 Cleaning deep rectangular grooves X

35Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves

X

36 Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves X

39 Thread milling cycle X

40 Cancel correction on the cutting tool X X

41 Correction of the cutting tool on the left X

42 Correction of the cutting tool on the right X

43 Correction of H added X

44 Correction H be deducted X

45Automatic correction of the cutting tool on the left

X

46Automatic correction of the cutting tool on the right

X

47 Automatic correction of the cutting tool off.

49 Cancel the correction H X X

50 Cancel zoom X X

51 Setting the zoom X

52 Setting the local coordinate system X

53 The coordinate system of the machine X

54Operating a system of coordinates (G540. .. G549)

X X

55-59Working Coordinate System 2-6 (G5 # 0 ... G5 # 9)

X

60 Unidirectional positioning X

61 Exact stop mode X

63 Tapping mode X

64 Cutting X X

65 Blocking traffic / Call Program X

68 Setting the rotation X

69 Cancel turn X X

264



70 Cancel mirroring X X

71 Setting the mirroring X

72 Execute bolt holes X

73 Drilling with periodic withdrawal of the drill X

74 Tapping the left X

75 Tsekovanie X

76 Fine boring X

77 Specialized drilling cycle X

78 Boring manual X

79 Specialized drilling cycle X

80 Cancellation of group cycle X X

81 Boring X

82 Drilling / pause X

83 Periodic withdrawal of the drill / drill X

84 Tapping on the right X

85 Boring X

86 Accelerated boring X

87 Contact boring X

88 Rigid tapping X

89 Boring / pause X

90 The absolute size of X X

91 Incremental dimensions X

92Changing the working position (Set floating zero)

X

93 Filing delayed X

94 Serve in a minute X X

95 Feed per revolution X

98 Return the group cycle at baseline X

99Return of the loop group on the level of the point R

X

271 Cleaning the deep recesses X

666 The cycle performance of polygons X

990 Saving the settings X

991 Reading parameters X

995 Read byte parameters X

265



996 Set byte parameters X

997 Calling the error X

998 Sound signal X

Note: Unresolved G-code cause an error 549.

Interpolation functions

There are four types of interpolation:

G0 Rapid traverse, linearG1 Submission, linear Fits G2, clockwise G3 arcs counterclockwise

Positioning (G00) with rapid movement (modal)

For example: G0 X3 Y2

G00 indicates the positioning during fast movement. You do not need to program the speed of fast moving, because the rate parameters are given in advance. You can adjust speeds to quickly move through the switch feedrate override button on the machine operator.

G00 moves the tool with the increased speed in the working position on the coordinate system for both incremental and absolute for the teams.

Format: G00 ~ -;

Where ~ - is: a combination of optional addresses axes (X, Y, Z, A, B, C), such as XYZA-...

266


The programmed feed rate remains in the magazine and feed rate can be activated by removing the G00 command with the command G01. Movement of all axes in the G00 will be interpolated mode, all axis will reach the end point at a time.

Note: Rapid traverse in the G00 command is set separately for each axis of the machine manufacturer. Thus, the rate of rapid movement can not be specified in the address F. In positioning mode that is activated with G00, the tool is accelerated to a predetermined level at the beginning of the block and slowing at the end of the block. Execution continues in the next block after the confirmation of a given situation. Given position means that the position of the axis is within the specified limits. (These limits are defined by the manufacturer of the machine.)

In the G00 acceleration and deceleration occur automatically, linearly, which provides a smooth start and stop controlled axis. The intensity of the acceleration / deceleration can be changed by the manufacturer of the machine.

Positioning (G01) Movement of feed (modal)

For example: G1 X5 Y2 (control unit at the beginning of each program is the default mode in the G1.)

This command mode is activated by linear interpolation. The feed rate is set at the address work through F and is modal. Here is an example.

(G91) G01 X20 Y10 F20 The feed rate specified by the address F, is the vector velocity on trajectory, it is not the speed of each axis.

Commands for flow rate of the linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02, G03) are sent using the numbers after the address F (FXXX.X).

Location F can appear anywhere in the block, it indicates the velocity in inches or millimeters per minute.

267

Endpoint

The tool path

The Y-axis

The X axisSTARTING POINT


Tangential feed speed control:

Office workers are fed in such a way that the velocity along the tangent path is always controlled feed rate. Adjust the feed rate:

Feed per minute can be adjusted by pressing the correct feed rate on the remote machine operator from 0 to 140% (for each 10%). Correction of filing can not be applied to the functions for which the correction is not allowed (for example, the cycle of tapping).

Determination of polar

The polar radius is determined by the polar / length (R), angle (AB) and polar center (AA or I, J, K, or XC, YC, ZC).

Definitions are valid in any of the polar plane. Position "3 hours" is always 0 °. Positive angles cause counterclockwise rotation (0 °) with respect to the polar radius, while negative angles lead to a rotation in a clockwise direction (0 °) with respect to the polar radius. Polars can be used in determining the length of time, using the trigonometric. If the polar radius / length (R) or angle (AB) is not specified, will use the previous values. If the polar center is not specified, it is taken as the current state of the machine. Below is a few examples.

The Y-axis(Endpoint)

The X axis

(Starting Point)

268


Circular interpolation (G02, G03)

Below is the general format of commands to move through an arc of a circle.

G17 G02 X Y I Jor XC YC R or R or AA R FG18 or X Z I K or XC ZC R or R or AA R FG19 G03 Y Z J K or YC ZC R or R or AA R F

or AB R

* (1) * (2) * (3 or 6) * (4 or 5) * (7)

* These numbers are given as references in the following diagram.

Plane Choose Direction Radius and / or center End point The feed rate G17 G2 R XC YC (or ZC) XY (or Z) F G18 G3 R AA AB G19 I J (or K) XY (or Z) WC R or-R

269

POLAR ANGLE OF THE CENTER NON-POLAR CENTER

POLAR CENTER OF THE CURRENT MACHINE

ABSOLUTE CENTER OF POLAR Incremental POLAR CENTER


Circular interpolation

Inputs TEAM VALUE

A The choice of plane G17 Specify an arc in the XY plane

G18 Specify an arc on the ZX plane

G19 Specify an arc on the YZ plane

2 Sense of rotation G02 Clockwise

G03 Counterclockwise

3 Position the end point

G90 mode

One, two or three X, Y and Z

Status endpoint in the working coordinate system

G91 mode

One, two or three X, Y and Z

The distance from the start and end points

4 Distance from start point to the center

Two I, J and K The observed distance from initial point to the center R = √ (I2 + J2)

The radius of the arc R The radius of the arc (if the center is not specified, it is calculated from the start and end points) (-R is a long-arc)

Two XC, YC, ZC Reported absolute coordinates of the center of the arc

Determination of polar

Inputs TEAM VALUE

5 The radius of the arc R The radius of the arc

The initial angle AA The angle from the center to start

6 The final angle AB The angle from the center to the end point in a clockwise direction

7 The feed rate F Speed along the arc

8 By the line W, C Angle

270


Clockwise and anticlockwise

View from above, before the positive direction of axis Z, Y or X to the negative direction in the plane XY, XZ, YZ or ZX in the right-handed Cartesian coordinate system.

Method IDescription of the arc with the center of the incremental

The end point of the arc indicates the address X, Y or Z, and expressed as absolute or incremental value, depending on the G90 or G91. In incremental mode, the coordinate of the end point is the starting point of the arc. Center of the arc is defined by I, J and K for the X, Y and Z. The numeric value that follows the I, J or K, is the distance from the starting point to the center of the arc from X, Y, or Z. I, J and K are always incremental values are independent of the G90 and G91.

The sign of I, J and K depends on the ratio of the center to the starting point, as shown below.

Method IIDescription of the arc with radius

In describing an arc with radius values are several existing formats. Here are the formats of the various teams.

G17 G02 X____ Y____ R____G18 or X____ Z____ R____G19 G03 Y____ Z____ R____

271


The endpoints of the arc

The radius is always listed as the true value. Endpoints incremental or absolute, depending on the G90 and G91. If the radius is used without a central point, we can generate two types of arcs. One less than 180 °, and the other - more than 180 °, as shown in the following figure. When the arc is greater than 180 °, the radius must be specified as a negative value.

Examples:

For an arc (less than 180 °) G2 X6 Y2 R5 F30

For the two arcs (180 °) G2 X6 Y2 R-5 F30

Note: If the arc can not override the start and end points, you get an error 505 "Radius too small to span given points" (the radius is too small to cover the data points).

Method IIIDescription of the arc through the center and the absolute trigonometric aid

G17 G02 X___ Y___ XC___ YC___ R___G18 or X___ Z___ XC___ ZC___ R___G19 G03 Y___ Z___ YC___ ZC___ R___

End point The central point Radius

Endpoint

STARTING POINT

272


A trigonometric aid allows a programmer to define both the initial and end points of the arc. The control unit calculates the true start and end points based on the actions of the preceding and following the arc. Where there are two possible correct answers, the control unit selects the point closest to the calculated one. If the slope of the line, incoming or outgoing from the arc, such that no intersection occurs, the line will be made tangent to the arc.

The following are examples of trigonometric aid.

Program 1

Programmed trajectory

G1 X0 Y0X4 Y4 (the estimated start point)G2 R2 XC7 YC2 X10 Y4 (estimated end-point)G1 X15 Y0

The trajectory generated by a program

273

Programmed path

ESTIMATED STARTING POINT ESTIMATED

FINAL POINT


Program 2


G1 X0 Y0X2 Y1 (the estimated start point)G2 R1.5 XC4 YC2 X5 Y6 (calculated You are Hereth point)G1 X5 Y0

The trajectory generated by the program two

274


Program 3


G1 X0 Y0X7 Y6 (calculated starting point)G2 R1.5 XC4 YC2 X5 Y.2 (calculated You are Hereth point)G1 X5 Y0

The trajectory generated by the program three

In general, when working with lines and arcs, if the line is programmed, not reaching the arc, it will be stretched to the arc. If the line is programmed for the arc, it will be reduced to the arc, and if the line does not intersect the arc tangent is to be done.

275


Program 4


G1 X0 Y0X2.5 Y2 (calculated starting point)G2 R1 XC5 YC4 X5 Y5 (calculated You are Hereth point)R2 XC7.5 YC5 X9 Y8 (calculated You are Hereth point)G1 X9 Y0

The trajectory generated by the program 4

276


Program 5


G1 X0 Y0X2.5 Y2 (design point)G2 R1 XC5 YC4 X5 Y3 (calculated You are Hereth point)G3 R2 XC7.5 YC5 X9 Y5 (calculated You are Hereth point)G1 Y0

The trajectory generated by the program 5

In general, when determining the intersections of the arcs with the arcs of the easiest to find one of the points of a quarter circle (0 °, 90 °, 180 ° or 270 °).

277


What is important to keep in mind when determining the points

Identification can be used with the trajectories of the line to a circle, circle to circle and circle to the line.

Center and radius of the arc can not be determined.

For the line to the circle and the circle to the line calculated start and end points have lie on a line, ie slopes lines, incoming and outgoing arc must be true.

If the line intersects the arc at two points, the calculated point should be closer to the desired point of intersection.

If the above conditions are met, there are no limits on how far from the calculated point correct.

In determining the intersection of the arc on the other one is easiest to find on the arc of one of the points a quarter circle (0 °, 90 °, 180 ° or 270 °).

The following briefly describes the correction to the cutting tool and the trigonometric help when trigonometric aid is used for the tangent line to arc.

The sample program:

G41 D1G65 X1 Y8X0Z-1X0 Y0 X2 Y6 (This line is made of the tangent.)G2 R3 XC7 YC3 X12 Y6G1 X15 Y0Y8X0G65 X0 Y0Z0

278


Block X2 Y6 derived tangent to the arc. When correcting for the cutting tool has been taken into account the previous two lines and calculated on the basis of the adjusted point of the baseline, not a tangent. When using the corrected trajectory for this program will not be stripped right thing. To avoid this problem, you should check off the program with the correction on the cutting tool (Or radius of the tool set to 0). Mark the actual point of contact (X4.8276, Y5.0690). Replace this point the calculated point (X2 Y6).

This is not a problem for the other tangent line in the program.

Method IVDescription of line with the definition of polar

Definitions polar do not change from absolute to incremental. Center of the arc is always considered a pole, and all the angles refer to it. The basic definition polar the following.

G17 G2G18 or AA_____ AB_____ R_____G19 G3 start angle end angle range

279

Center of the radius

Finite angle

RADIUS

The initial angle


Format for polar arcs can be mixed with Cartesian formats. Here are the official formats.

G17 G2 X_____ Y_____ AA_____ R_____end point the initial angle

G17 G2 AB_____ XC_____ YC_____ R_____ endpoint is the central point

G17 G2 I_____ J_____ AB_____the central point

The above formats are written to the plane of XY, but act in any plane or direction. A trigonometric aid is effective only when used in the polar arc to the current center point and radius.

Program 1

With all of these programs is the same thing. The method of programming is completely optional.

A. The absolute coordinates (polar, trigonometric No aid)

G90G1 X0 Y0X4.2929 Y4.2929G3 R3 AA295.53 AB357.59G2 R4 AA77.56 AB318.59G1 Y0X0

280


Two. The absolute coordinates (polar, trigonometric aid)

G90G1 X0 Y0R1 AB45G3 R3 XC3 YC7 AB0G2 R4 XC5 YC3 X8 Y.5G1 Y0X0

Note: When using a trigonometric care must be valid and center of the arc radius. Therefore, lines G2 and G3 have a fixed format.

Three. The absolute coordinates (Cartesian, with no trigonometric)

G90G1 X0 Y0X4.2929 Y4.2929G3 R3 XC3 YC7 X5.9973 Y6.8737

orG3 I-1.2929 J2.7071 X5.9973 Y6.8737

orG3 R3 X5.9973 Y6.8737G2 R4 XC5 YC3 X8 Y.3542

orG2 R4 X8 Y.3542G1 Y0X0

4. The absolute coordinates (Cartesian, trigonometric aid)

G1 X0 Y0X1 Y1G3 R3 XC3 YC7 X6 Y7G2 R4 XC5 YC3 X8 Y.5G1 X8 Y0X0

Note: Most sizes are approximate, the control unit calculates the exact size.

281


Five. Incremental coordinates

G91 G1 X0 Y0X4.2929 Y4.2929G3 I-1.2929 J2.7071 X-1.7044 Y2.5058

orG3 R3 XC3 Yc7 X-1.7044 Y2.5808

orG2 I-.9973 J-3.8737 X2.0027 Y-6.5195G2 X2.0027 Y-6.5195 I-.9973 J-3.8737

orG2 R4 X2.0021 Y-6.5195

orG2 R4 XC5 YC3 X2.0027 Y-6.5195G1 Y-.3542X-8

Note: The system of incremental coordinates trigonometric aid can not be used at each point associated with the current position.

Trigonometric support can be disabled by setting bit 2 of parameter control more flags. It may be desirable for applications that are created from some systems Cad / Cam.

Corner rounding (, R)

Adding, R___ the end blocks, control of linear or circular interpolation, you can automatically insert rounding corners.

G91 G01 X0 Y0 X1, R.25X1 Y1

282


Bevel angle (, C)

Adding, C___ the end blocks, linear interpolation control, you can automatically insert the bevel angle.

G91 G01 X0 Y0 X1, C.25X1 Y1

283

SKEW ANGLE MAY BE USED ONLY FOR THE TRACKS OF LINE TO LINE.


Contact Line

The function return line can be used on any command line. This function changes the direction of the programmed line. Usually it is used, if known to the end point line, and not the starting point. The end point will be programmed, and the line will be increased in the opposite direction to the starting point. All trigonometric functions are help by using this function.

X0 Y0X3 Y1G2 R1 XC3 YC0 AB270G01 X0 Y0 BACK C2 W165

Back Increases line in the opposite direction from (0,0)C2 Uses the intersection with the arc, the most distant from the (0,0)W165 Increases line from (0,0) at an angle of 165 °

X0 Y0X3 Y1G17 G2 R1 XC3 YC0 AB270G01 X0 Y0 BACK C0 W165

C0 Uses near the intersection of X0 Y0X3 Y1G2 R1 XC3 YC0 X3 Y-1G01 X0 Y0 BACK C0 W135

284


W135 This line does not intersect with the arc, so the line will be rotated until, until it becomes a tangent.

X0 Y0X3 Y1X4 Y0X0 Y0 BACK C0 or C2 W165

In this example, the return line is used between the two lines for programming an unknown point.

285


Notes on the milling of circular and linear feed

The feed rate in the circular and linear mode equal to the rate specified by the address F. This flow rate is the tangential velocity along the arc and feed supply in the vector of linear displacements.

Note 1: I0, J0 and K0 can be omitted.

Note 2: If X, Y and Z are left out - or if the endpoint is located in the same position as the primary, and the center is managed by I, J and K - may be an arc 360 ° (full circle).

G02I _____; (full circle)

When only R, the arc programmed 0°.

G02R _____; (The cutter does not move.)

Note 3: The feed rate is measured along the arc after applying the correction to the cutting tool.

Note 4: If the addresses I, J, K and R are specified at the same time, the radius of the arc defined at I, J, K has the advantage, and R is ignored.

Note 5: Teams XYZIJKR AA AB supports device control. If the block is interpolated on incomplete, missing information about the axis will be added to the default values previously entered.

Screw cutting (G02, G03)

Helical interpolation is activated by specifying a different axis, which moves in sync with the circular interpolation. That is, the tool can move in a spiral.

G02 R____ G17 or X____ Y____ or Z____ F____;

G03 I____ J____

286


G02 R____ G18 or X____ Z____ or Y____ F____;

G03 I____ K____

G02 R____ G19 or Y____ Z____ or X____ F____;

G03 J____ K____

The above format for helical milling illustrate the overall concept. Any of the previous format of the arcs can be used for screw cutting simply by adding a third axis endpoint of the arc to the team.

287

The tool path


Address F determines the feed rate along the arc of a circle. Therefore, the feed rate of the linear axis of the next.

The length of linear axis F x ______________________

The length of arc

Determine the feed rate so that the feed rate on a linear axis does not exceed any of the thresholds.

The team paused (G04)

Code G4 should immediately follow the instruction FXXX.X. This statement will then stop or pause the program at XXX.X seconds.

The general format:

G4F2.5 cause a pause in the program in 2.5 seconds.

G4F25 cause a pause in the program for 25 seconds.

Note: A, P or X can be used instead of F after the command G4.

Exact Stop (G09)

Displacement, which are given to the team in blocks with G09, slowed at the end point, and checks in the operating position. This function is used when sharp edges are required to work the angles of the workpiece when applying.

Data Set incl. / Off. (G10, G11)

This feature allows you to load all the configuration settings, table settings and adjustments CNC axes with the program rather than through the front panel. (This feature - the only way to change the parameters of 700 and above from the program.). Below is a format for downloading options.

G10 Installing the data included P *** = significanceP *** = significance P *** = number of loadedP *** = significance parameterP *** = significanceG11 Setting data is disabled

Teams, in addition to P *** = value in the mode of G10 will cause an error 543 "Illegal G10 statement." (Invalid operator G10).

When you run a G11, the CNC will use the new settings. See the destination parameter in the Appendix.

288


Cleaning the floating zero (G12)

With this function, removed floating zero. (G12 in the program cancels the floating zero, but they are restored at the end of the program. G12 in manual data entry removes floating zeros.)

The plane XY (modal) (G17)

Selects the XY plane for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G17 command can appear anywhere on the line. The control unit is always included in the mode of G17. The control unit is set to the default G17 at the beginning of each program.

The plane XZ (modal) (G18)

Selects the XZ plane or ZX for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G18 command can appear anywhere on the line.

The plane YZ (modal) (G19)

Selects the YZ plane for all the polar and arc movements. This command is valid until the other team off the plane. G19 command can appear anywhere on the line.

Inch size mode (Modal) (G20)

With this function, the system goes to the inch mode. In this mode, the system receives the size in inches.

You can select active at power on.

G20 cancels the G21.

Metric size mode (Modal) (G21)

With this function, the system goes into metric mode. In this mode, the system will accept sizes in millimeters (mm). In the metric system, the actual state of the machine may not exactly coincide with the position of the program because of the conversion. The feed rate in metric mode, expressed in millimeters per minute (mm / min).

Note: CNC is able to convert - from metric to inch out of the system and inch to metric - for all corrections to the instrument. This means that the correction 1.0 in. changes to 25.4 mmWhen the system switches to the metric mode. The reverse occurs for metric values.

Enable / disable the safe zone (G22, G23)

This unit is equipped with a programmable control safe zone. Any area of movement of the machine can be designated as safe. This is an area in which the machine can not enter. If the machine is programmed for the area, when the checking is enabled the safe zone, an error will be displayed "Attempted to move into safe zone" (attempt to penetrate the security zone.) Safe Zone is defined in the parameters of the coordinates. Checking is turned off using the G22, and included - with the G23. You can select active at power on.

289


Automatic standard programs

With these G-codes are selected basic models that are used repeatedly in most applications, milling. These models are circular and rectangular cuts Finishing, cleaning round and rectangular deep recesses, and polygons. In these programs, the standard settings are used for entering a variety of CNC cutting and size differences found in various applications. Below are explanations of each G-code and an example of its use in the program.

All the internal standard automatic program to be activated when the tool is in the heart of the program. Automatic external standard programs can use the G65 (blocking traffic) for the determination of the center.

Cleaning the round deep recesses (G24)

Automatic routine G24 is used to clean a deep circular groove from the center and moving spiral of programmed diameter.

Cleanup round of deep grooves

G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity)S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1)F25 (feed rate X-Y)P150 = 1 (the radius of the cavity)P153 = .015 (finishing allowance X-Y)P154 = .005 (finishing allowance Z)P155 = .25 (cutting width)G24 G99 G42 G2 R.1 P199 = 0 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F10 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8 * 9

* 1 Performs automatic cleaning program standard round of deep grooves* 2 Returns the Z in the area of safe return* 3 Clockwise from the right or "G3 G41" counter-clockwise to the left *** 4 0.1 Zone safe return* 5 P199 = 0 for all immersion programs, automatic standard, except for the

processing cycle ends * 6 -Final depth of 0.5 Z * 7 -0.3 Depth first Z **** 8 0.2 increment of Z, a marked increment of Z will use the absolute value of * 9 10 inch / min feed rate Z

** For all automatic programs G41 and G42 do the same thing: they include a correction to the cutting tool. In the example shown in the right direction for correcting the cutting tool. The control unit will adjust the appropriate standard in all automatic programs, if the correction is included in the cutting tool (G41 or G42). Counter / normal milling indicated G2 or G3.

*** If the first is less than the depth Z final depth of Z, Z depth of the first set to a final depth of Z.

290


Note: You can also use the following.

P140 = zone for the safe returnP141 = depth Z for final P142 = entry-level Z P143 = for the increment of Z P144 = 1 for the first depth Z P145 = feed rate to Z

Purification of circular recesses of hours. Cleaning the round cut-outs against the hours with.

Block # Information on entering the block Block # Information on entering the block

N9 G2 G42 N9 G3 G41Block 9 Selects a circle in a clockwiseBlock 9 Selects the circle

direction and includes an adjustment to the against clockwise and cutting tool to the right includes an adjustment to the

cutting tool left

Internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25)

If the specified radius of the tool, adjust the cutting tool can be used in all standard automatic programs. The control unit automatically reduces or increases the tool path with tool radius.

291

TOOL DOWN

TOOL DOWN

TOOLING UP

TOOLING UPHOME /END

HOME /END


The figure "Internal finishing a clockwise circle" below shows the tool path following the program. The figure "Internal finishing the circle counter-clockwise" below shows the same program with the change indicated in the line N9.

The program of internal finishing the round cut-outs

G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity)S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1)G99 (Z returns to the zone safe return)F20 (feed rate X-Y)P522 = 3 (the angle of the bevel)P150 = 1 (the radius of the cavity)P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y) **P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z)G25 G42 G2 V-.3 R.1 P199 = 1 F5 Z-.5 Q.2 * 1 * 2 * 2 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8

* 1 Performs internal finishing the round cut-outs* 2 Clockwise from the right or "G41 G3" counter-clockwise to the left* 3 First the depth Z* 4 Area safe return* 5 Bevel down the Z * 6 Feedrate Z * 7 The final depth of Z* 8 The increment of Z

Finishing allowance ** XY and Z finishing allowance is reset at the beginning of each program.

Internal finishing with a range of hours. Internal finishing the circle against the hours with.

Start / End Start / End

292


N9 G42 G2 selects the circle in a clockwise N9 G41 G3 selects a range of

clockwise and adjust the cutting counterclockwise and tool on the right correction on the cutting

tool left

Note: Parameter P150 - is the radius of the recess. If you do not need finishing allowance, P153 and P154 parameters must be set to zero. F20, programmed in the N5, a feed rate of XY, and F5 in N9 affects only the flow on the axis Z. If the settings on the value, they do not change and can be used in the program in the future. When you call the automated routine, any parameters that are not reinitialized, the default will be on the previous parameter value.

Outdoor finishing round of deep grooves (G26)

Automatic routine is identical to the G26 on the basis of the program G25, except for the fact that it produces cutting round the outside of the tide, rather than inside. Since the G26 requires positioning the outside of the tide, will apply the following formula to calculate the distance from the center of the tide to the point of puncture / removal.

Distance = 0.1 + Circle + [3 X tool]radius of the radius

Program outside of finishing the round of deep grooves

G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1)F20 (feed rate X-Y)P150 = 1 (tidal radius)P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y)P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z)G26 G98 G41 G2 R.1 P199 = 0 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5

293


* 1 * 2 * 3 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8 * 9

* 1 Performs exterior finishing the round cut-outs* 2 Return to the starting point * 3 Clockwise from the left or "G42 G3" counter-clockwise to the right * 4 Area safe return* 5 Crossings * 6 The final depth of Z * 7 First the depth Z * 8 The increment of Z * 9 Feedrate Z

The outer circle on the finishing part of. Outer finishing the circle against the hours with.

Center TIDE Center

TIDE

TOOL UP / DOWN

TOOL UP / DOWN

R + 0,1 +(3X tool radius)

294


N7 G2, G42 selects the circle in a clockwise N7 G3 G42 selects the range of clockwise and adjust the cutting counterclockwise and tool left correction on the cutting

tool on the right

Return to the zero point (G28, G29, G30)

These commands provide the administration of the machine to a fixed point (zero point) with the passage through the first intermediate point on the way to zero. First, a fixed zero point in XYZ is inserted through the front panel of the parameters the zero point. The zero point corresponds to the zero point of the machine. When this point is set, it remains unchanged as long as no other team will be replaced by the front panel. Each time you issue the command G28 or G30 machine will be returned to the designated zero point. Positioning in the intermediate and the zero point is made during fast movement. If the G28 or G30 is executed without specifying the axes, they will not be influenced. If one or two axes are controlled as intermediate points, only the steering axis will move to an intermediate point and the zero point. If the intermediate point is programmed, the program will remember it until the next G28 will not run (ie for use in the G29).

The command format.

The zero point is set to X-10Y 0Z-0.1

Example 1: G28 (No movements of the axes)

Example 2: G91 G28 Z = 0 (from Z to -0.1 relative zero point of the machine)

Example 3: X1 Y0 Z-2G28 X3 X3, then the X-10 (Relative to the zero point of the

machine)

Example 4: X-3 Y2 Z-8 ZG28 Z-7 -7, Then Z-0.1 (Relative to the zero point of the machine)

G29 from Z to -7

The command G29 - this transformation G28. G29 machine returns to the programmed point through the last waypoint, saved command G28. The command format.

G29 X____ Y____ Z____

programmed point

295


In general, G28 is used for the tool change position or loading / unloading of parts. Usually it is used to move only in the zero point. For example, the movement of G91, G28, Z0, Z to the zero point.

When G29 is executed by itself, only the axle, which sent teams to previous G28/G30, becomes the starting point.

An example of G28 and G29:

X1 Y1 Point A G28 X3 Y2 Point B, then the point R G29 X6 Y1.5Point B, then point C

G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point

This function works similarly to return to the starting point G28, except that you can call the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point. The command format.

G30 P2 X____ Y____ Z____ G30 P3 X____ Y____ Z____ G30 P4 X____ Y____ Z____

zero point intermediate point

Unless otherwise specified P, may be P2. P 1 and P> 5 are not valid, and lead to error 542 "G30 illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block" (G30 invalid return to the zero setting on the block G30).

ZERO POINT

INTERMEDIATE POINT

ZERO POINT ON THE SET X4 Y4 WORKING WITHOUT CORRECTION

296


Z to the gap (G31)

With the help of the functions assigned to the G31 Z position of the gap. By default, this is the last position of the gap, but it can be changed by editing the parameter set 140 or the group of cycles by using the "R".

Z to the tool change (G32)

With the help of the functions assigned to the G32 Z position tool changer. This position is set by the manufacturer of the machine, but can be changed by editing the parameter coordinates of the tool change.

The processing cycle ends (G33)

Automatic sub-G33 is used for processing the ends of a rectangular surface. It always starts in the upper right corner of the rectangle moves back and forth along the long sides of the rectangle and moves to the short side of the recess. Consistent depth of the tool to lift 0.1 "above the current depth and quickly moved into the top right corner for the next depth.

The program loop ends

G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1)G0 X1 Y2 (rapid movement in the center of the notch)F20 (feed rate X-Y)P151 = 1 (Size X)P152 = 3 (the size of the Y)P155 = .1 (cutting width)G33 G99 G41 R.1 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.1 F5 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8

* 1 Perform loop ends* 2 Returns the Z in the area of safe return* 3 Correction of the cutting tool (G41 or G42 do the same thing)* 4 Area safe return * 5 The final depth of Z* 6 First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe

return minus the increment of Z)* 7 The increment of Z* 8 Feedrate Z

Cleaning deep rectangular grooves (G34)

Automatic routine G34 is used to clear deep rectangular grooves, starting from the center and paving the way to the final size. Jobs similar to the work program of the automatic processing programs circular cut-outs, except for the fact that the cut out a rectangle with rounded corners. In the program for rectangular grooves added parameters P151 (the size of the excavation X) and P152 (the size of the excavation Y). Parameters P150, P153, P154 and P155 retain the same meaning as in programs for circular cut-outs. Dimensions X and Y are the dimensions seizure, and if the radius is set to 0, the corners will be cut along the radius of the tool.

297


Cleanup of deep rectangular grooves

G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 rev / min, calls for correction tools # 1)G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity)F20 (feed rate X-Y)P522-2.5 (bevel angle)P150 = .75 (radius)P151 = 4 (the size of the excavation X)P152 = 2 (the size of the excavation Y)P153 = .015 (finishing allowance X-Y)P154 = .005 (finishing allowance Z)P155 = .5 (cutting width)G34 G99 G42 G2 R.1 P199 = 1 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8 * 9

* 1 Cleans deep rectangular grooves * 2 Returns the Z in the area of safe return* 3 Clockwise from the right or "G41 G3" counter-clockwise to the left* 4 Area safe return* 5 Bevel down the Z * 6 The final depth of Z* 7 First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe

return minus the increment of Z)* 8 The increment of Z* 9 feed rate of Z

298


If the N11 - G42 G2, the direction of the cut in a clockwise direction. If the N11 - G41 G3, the direction of the cutting counter-clockwise.

Internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves (G35)

Automatic routine G35 is used for removal of finishing allowance remaining after the cleaning program of deep rectangular grooves, or it is used for removing a certain amount of allowance around the inside of the rectangle. Automatic software works similarly to the program G35 G34. It starts in the center. The circumference of the middle to the end of the program will always go along the longest side of the recess.

The program of internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves

G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 r / min, calls to corrections to the tool number 1)G00 X0 Y0 (accelerated move to the center of the cavity)F20 (feed rate X-Y)P522-2.5 (bevel angle)P150 = .25 (radius)P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y)P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z)P151 = 4 (the size of the excavation X)P152 = 2 (the size of the excavation Y)G35 G99 G42 G2 R.1 P199 = 1 Z-.5 V-.3 Q.2 F5 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8 * 9

* 1 Performs internal finishing of deep rectangular grooves* 2 Returns the Z in the area of safe return* 3 Clockwise from the right or "G41 G3" counter-clockwise to the left* 4 Area safe return* 5 Bevel down the Z* 6 The final depth of Z* 7 First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe

return minus the increment of Z)

299

TAKING A SIZE (R151)

SIZE OF TAKING Y

(R152)

Start / End

The radius of curvature (P150)

Cutting width (R155)


* 8 The increment of Z* 9 feed rate of Z

300


Block # Information about the input line Block # Information about the input line N10 G2 G42 selects N10 G2 G42 selects

in a clockwise direction in a clockwise directionclockwise and adjust the cutting clockwise and adjust the cuttingtool on the right tool on the right

Internal finishing of CS Internal finishing of CSA rectangular recess X <Y A rectangular recess X> YP151 <P152 P151> P152

Block # Information about the input line Block # Information about the input line N10 G3 G41 selects N10 G3 G41 selects

counter-clockwise direction counter-clockwise directiondirection and correction to the cutting direction and correction to

the cuttingtool left tool left

Internal finishing against the CS Interior. clean. treatment against CSRectangular Rectangular with rounded notches

Angles and X < Y angles and X> YP151 <P152 P151> P152

301


Outdoor finishing deep rectangular grooves (G36)

Automatic routine G36 is used for removal of finishing allowance around the outside of the square of the tide. The program works similar to G36 G34 manner. It starts in the center, performs a quick move to the outside of the details, then submit the tool down. The circumference of the edge is always at the bottom of the tide. CNC uses the following formula to calculate the distance from the center to the point of the bottom feeder.

Y = (3 X tool radius) + .1 + ½ the width of the groove Y

Program outside of finishing deep rectangular grooves

G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)S1000 M3 D1 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise -1000 r / min, calls to corrections to the tool

number 1)G00 X0 Y0 (rapid movement in the X0 Y0)G98 (Z returns to the initial level)F20 (feed rate X-Y)P150 = .25 (radius)P153 = 0 (finishing allowance X-Y)P154 = 0 (finishing allowance Z)P151 = 4 (frame size X)P152 = 2 (frame size Y)G36 G41 G2 V-.25 R.1 Z-.5 Q.25 F10 P199 = 0 * 1 * 2 * 2 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8

* 1 Performs exterior finishing of deep rectangular grooves* 2 Clockwise from the left or "G42 G3" counter-clockwise to the right * 3 First the depth Z (If V is not specified, the 1st depth Z - is the area safe

return minus the increment of Z)* 4 Area safe return* 5 The final depth of Z* 6 The increment of Z

The radius of curvature (P150)

1/2 TIME-MEASURE Y

DIAMETER TOOL

The tool radius Point of Puncture /

DRAINAGE

CONCERNING THE ARC The tool radius + .050

(P150)

The tool path

SIZE Y

SIZE A

302


* 7 Feedrate Z * 8 Crossings Z

Block # Information about the input line Block # Information about the input line N11 G3 G42 selects the direction of N11 G2 G41 selects the direction of

counterclockwise and clockwise and correction correction on the cutting cutter lefttool on the right

Outdoor finishing against the CS Outdoor finishing of CS

Tapping (G39)

Automatic routine G39 is used for threading. You can program the internal or external thread. G39 works with the same principles as the G25, interior finishing round of deep cuts, and G26, exterior finishing round of deep grooves. If programmed with an internal thread, the program automatically starts in the center of G39 and moves, as shown in the following diagrams.

303

CENTER

CENTER

TOOL UP / DOWN TOOL UP / DOWN


Inner / Inner Right / Left

For internal thread starting point is the center of the thread when switched on and off at the correct cutting tool. If programmed with external thread, it starts in the center and moves rapidly to the point of low feed using the following formulas for the correction off the cutting tool.

X = radius of the thread + [2 X radius of the tool] + 0.1

When correcting for the cutting tool at the control device using the following formula to calculate the point of reducing the supply.

X = radius of the thread + [3 X radius of the tool] + 0.1

For external thread the machine moves, as shown in the figures below.

Male / Male Right / Left

The cycle performance of the polygons (G666)

Automatic G666 standard program used for cutting out polygons (shapes with the same parties), such as triangles, squares, pentagons, hexagons, etc.The cycle performance of the polygons can be used for indoor or outdoor cutting. The internal implementation of the polygons in the middle and begins to spiral turns to the form, then cut in a spiral polygon and returns to the center. Outer polygons have positioned in the center (or use

HOME /ENDHOME /

END

Start / End

304


G65 X___ Y___ to specify the center). To move from the center out using the same formula as in the outer finishing the round recesses or outdoor finishing of rectangular grooves, to create an execution cycle of the polygons.

Execute internal polygonsG0 X2 Y3 (center)F20 (feed rate of XY)P126 = 2 (radius of curvature of)P127 = 0 (the angle of curvature of the 1 st)P125 = 6 (number of sides)P128 = .3 (radius of curvature)P132 = 0 (inside / outside)G666 G99 G3 G41 R.2 P199 = 1 Z-1 V-.1 Q.2 F10 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8 * 9

* 1 Performs a series of polygons * 2 Returns the zone of safe return* 3 A counter-clockwise milling / left * 4 Area safe return* 5 Bevel down the Z* 6 The final depth of Z* 7 First the depth Z * 8 The increment of Z * 9 Feedrate Z

With the above program creates the following item.

305


Execute the outer polygonG0 Z2G65 X2 Y3 (Center)F20 (feed rate of XY)P126 = 3 (The radius of curvature of a)P127 = 60 (Corner of 1st rounded)P125 = 3 (number of sides)P128 = .1 (radius of curvature)P132 = 1 (inside / outside)G666 G98 G2 G41 R.1 P199 = 0 Z-1 V-.2 Q.2 F5 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6 * 7 * 8 * 9

* 1 Performs a series of polygons* 2 Returns the Z in the original position * 3 A counter-clockwise milling / left* 4 Area safe return* 5 Incision down the Z * 6 The final depth of Z* 7 First the depth Z * 8 The increment of Z* 9 Feedrate Z

With the above program creates the following item.

306


G20 G90 (inch absolute)N2 G0 X0 Y0 (Fast positioning of the center X, Y Center for Inland) (use the G65 for outdoor)

F100 (feed rate)P121 = 0 (The angle of the cone half-angle, or defined by the angle

with the center line, 0 for a cylindrical thread)P122 = 10 (Threads per unit)P123 = 1 (1 for internal threads, 2 - exterior)P125 = .03 (The increment / decrease in diameter, zero for a single

pass)P126 = 2 (The final diameter for multiple passes) **P127 = 0 (Center X)P128 = 0 (Center Y)P150 = 1.91 (The diameter of the cylindrical thread pitch diameter for

tapered threads and multiple passes)G39 G42 G2 Z-1 V0 R.1 * 1 * 2 * 3 * 4 * 5 * 6

* 1 Runs thread milling cycle * 2 Correction of the cutting tool [Off. (G40), left (G41), right (G42)] **** 3 The direction of the thread (G2 right, G3 left) **** 4 The final depth of Z (P141)* 5 First depth of Z [(P144, if V is not specified, the control unit calculates the

1st depth of P140 (Zone safe return) minus the P143 (the increment of Z)]* 6 Area safe return (P140)

** For multiple passes on the inner diameter of the thread must be less than the final start. On the contrary, for multiple passes on the outer diameter of the final carving must be less than the initial one.

The right combination of *** and correcting the direction of the cut on the cutting tool:G42 G2 for domestic right-hand threads.G41 G3 for the internal left-handed threads.G41 G2 for the outer right-hand threads.G42 G3 for the outer left-handed threads.

Correction of the cutting tool (G40, G41, G42)

G40 Correction off. G41 Correction of the left G42 Correction to the right

This section explains how the correction of the cutting tool, and provides advice on its optimal use.

Correction of the cutting tool - the offset tool paths - perpendicular to the programmed path - an amount equal to the radius of the cutter. The programmed path may be defined by the

307


programmer for the zero-range instrument. If the program is written for the machining tool with zero radius, ie directly from the printout, then, with the introduction of the actual tool radius in the system and the activation of the correction on the cutting tool, the operator can make the control device calculated the trajectory of the displaced.

During program execution, the control unit records the previous preset point, the current programmed point and the next point along the trajectory of a programmable instrument.

Two geometric parameters such as line and arc, the radius of the tool, the correction to the right or left, the control unit can be corrected to calculate the current point. The control unit also uses its own function using trigonometric described above, to connect the lines and arcs during the correction of the cutting tool.

After each successful calculation of adjusted terms, the current point becomes the previous programmable preset point, the next programmed point becomes the current programmed point, and a new programmable read point to become the next programmed point. This mechanism is repeated until, until you reach the end of the program. This sequence must be aware of, because it clarifies many points which will arise in the future as to how the correction.

Correction in the control unit intersecting. Taking into account the three above-mentioned points, the control unit calculates the intersection of the corrected trajectory between the previous and current programmed point and corrected path between the current and next programmed point. These trajectories can be a mixture of straight lines and arcs.

Because of the crossover nature of the correction package for the system to work there must be the intersection of the shifted trajectories. If the two trajectories do not cross, the control unit will produce an error 507 or 509.

Note: All examples in the correction of the cutting tool shown without displacements along the axis Z.

308


In order to see how the correction of the cutting tool, select the key F6 (Both) (Both) when checking the details.

An explanation of how the offset tool paths may not have the intersection

(A) The trajectory of the tool with (B) The trajectory of the tool with

diameter of 0 " non-zero diameter

The solution shown above for the details - is the introduction of the bevel or rounded angle 00.0001 "point 5 between disjoint surfaces.

An explanation of how to be introduced facet 00.0001 "to solve the problem of non-intersection Note: ", C", used for chamfering, can only be applied between the two lines.

In some cases, the system detects the intersection, but it will be too distant from the details. Again, in such cases to address must be entered chamfer or a rounded corner of 00.0001. "

309


The outer "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool

Note: A point of correction (4 ') is shifted to a greater extent than the radius of the tool (4).

The figure below shows how the chamfer or a rounded corner of 00.0001 ", added to (4), prevents unnecessary deviations.

The solution for the outer "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool

The figure below shows how the adjusted point for the inner "V"-shaped cavity is programmed to point at a distance exceeding the radius of the tool.

TOOL

START

ADDED CHAMFER 0.0001

310


The inner "V"-shaped correction to the cutting tool

Note: The tool is separated from the programmed point (2) at a distance exceeding the radius of the tool. If the adjusted point (2 ') was closer to (2), the tool would be plied by the details.

Test sample details

Because the system requires three points to determine the adjusted points, caution should be exercised when the correction is on the cutting tool is enabled or disabled.

Magnitude to move the axis at the exit or entrance to the detail of to be greater than the expected value of the correction on the cutting tool. Figure 1 shows under the stage that the position of the machine at the point (1) is the same as in the corrected and uncorrected trajectories of the tool. This is because the first point can not be corrected because it does not have a previous point to form a group of three points needed for the correction program. Therefore, the correction should be included to how the tool will enter the work area.

For ease of programming tools to enter and leave the details of the zone perpendicular surface of the part. This is not a strict requirement, but it simplifies the understanding of how the correction of the cutting tool will operate at the entrance and exit from the zone of the workpiece. If there is doubt as to how it will look offset tool path, we recommend hand-drawn sketches of lines parallel to the surface of the part from start to finish or use a press F6 (Both) (Both) for verification. The most common problems are detected immediately.

311

DETAIL

TOOL


The definition would look like the trajectory of the adjusted

Step 1. Draw the actual item and note the point in the sequence.

Step 2. Draw a line shifted from the surface of the radius of the tool parts from point 1 to point 11.

START

EndpointSTEP 1

STEP 2

312


Step 3. Check whether all trajectories intersect in the sequence. If so, then (except for the start and end points) to connect the displaced trajectory and note the points of intersection. If at least one crossing can not be detected, the item will not be processed until the error is corrected.

Step 4. Since points 1 and 11 have adjacent points on one side, they will not be adjusted. Therefore, you should connect them to neighboring points adjusted to get to the actual trajectory of the displaced incisor.

313

STEP 3

STEP 4


Step 5. The above trajectory is biased - it is a trajectory that will comply with the system for processing details. However, the problem was identified with the help of a sketch.

Note that the lower-left corner will be left untreated as a tool, moving from (1) (2), leave a small groove nesrezannogo material. A similar case is evident in the trajectory of the tool (10) to (11). Again, the angle will be left nesrezannym.

The solution can serve as a redevelopment of the start and end points, the angle was cut properly.

Step 6. Notice how the points 1, 2, 10 and 11 gradually shifted. The result is as follows.

Note: Now we see that when the tool is moved from (2) (3) and (9) (10), the angle will be cut properly.

STEP 5

STEP 6

314


In step 6 the correction in the cutting tool has been included using the G41 to include the correction of the cutting tool to the left at the point (2) and disabled using the G40 at the point (11).

Notes on the steps of 6.1

Note 1: Points (1) and (11), which start and end points were chosen in such a way that they were far enough away from the workpiece surface. Suffice means the distance greater than the total expected correction.

Note 2: The circle at the points (9) and (8) for the complications that can arise if the radius is too large. As the radius increases, (9) and (8) will move closer together until, until, at one point of the radius, they will not be identical. If the radius increases more, the radius of the tool is too large to form a circle, and the system will generate an error, informing the operator that the intersection can not be found on this line.

Note 3: If a path can be successfully adjusted to draw by hand, it will work in the system. However, if the sketch shows the intersection of the missing, the control unit generates an error message 507 or 509.

Note 4: While the operator is not familiar with the principles of correction of the cutting tool is recommended to perform sketches for the corrected trajectory before the item will be processed under the program.

Note 5: Correction of the cutting tool is turned off at the beginning of each program.

315


How to make a correction to the cavity

If the item is a cavity, the start and end points must be changed. A simple change in the G41 G42 (right cut) will not help. This will occur because the tool will still go down to the detail. The reason for this, as explained above, the following: the system uses the previous, current and next programmed point for the calculation of the correction. This procedure does not occur at the point 1 and point 5.

The displacement of points 1, 2, 10 and 11 for oral

In the figure above, the tool should be lowered to a point 1, and then raised back to the point 5.

Point 1a is added to the system of providing preliminary information on the line 4-5. Length from 1a to 1 may be in the range 00.0001. "It is important to note that preliminary information correct angle 1a to 1 should be the sameAs the angle 4 to 5. In this case, the angle is zero.

Similarly, the point 5a is added to provide a system previous information on the line 1-2. Again, the angle of 5 to 5a should be the sameAs the angle of 1 to 2.

Regardless of the radius of the cutter, the tool can now be lowered to the corner at (2) and raised back at 5.

316


Programming with the correction of the cutting tool

When programming with the correction in the radius of the cutting tool first and last movements performed by the tool, must be performed according to figure out the details below. Moving to be performed before the cut should be equal to a minimum distance of the diameter of the tool used.

Block # Information on entering the block

N1001 G0 X-1 Y-1N1002 G41 X0 D1 (D = correction tool radius)N1003 G1 Y3 F10N1004 X3.5N1005 G3 R.5 XC4 YC3 X4.5 Y3N1006 G1 X6.8N1007 Y2N1008 X4.5 Y0N1009 X-1N1010 G40 Y-.5

Blocking the movement (G65)

G65 is used to start and complete correction of the cutting tool. Through code G65, located on a line with coordinates, these coordinates will be used for the correction of points on the cutting tool, but will not be taken into account during the movement of the machine.

G65 X___ Y___ Z___ The machine will not move to the coordinates XYZ.

Note: G65 can be used as the polar and Cartesian coordinate system.

G65 R____ AB____

317

Programmed path CUTTERS

ADJUSTED REAL TRAJECTORY


G65 allows a programmer to include the correction of the cutting tool for lowering or removal of the instrument at a certain point without performing additional movements. In general, the point of no movement on the details of the selected point, just before the point of lowering the tool. If you challenge a point without moving the tool will be a point at the details behind the point immediately after the lifting tool. The point of the lack of movement should not be based on the details, but point to the parts usually work better. The figures under the heading "The beginning and end of the correction to the cutting tool" shows the various provisions of the start-up and removal tool on the basis of different points of locking movements, which are shown by the dashed line (---). Point 2 - this is a desirable starting point or the removal tool. Point 1 - is the point of blocking traffic when the correction is on the cutting tool is turned on (flat), and point 3 - point locking this movement, when the correction in the cutting tool is disabled (removal). If the correction is on the cutting tool is enabled or disabled by using this format, the upper and lower position of the tool is easy to predict.

318


The beginning and end of the correction on the cutting tool

G41 Tool Left D1 = radius of the tool (pre-installed in D1)

Puncture EVACUATION1 = point on the details before the puncture point A =the last position before

outlet2 = point of puncture 2 =challenge the position of the tool3 = first movement of the cutting 3 =point after removal

319

TOOL DOWN TOOLING UP ON.

ON.

ON.

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON.


G42 right toolD1 = radius of the tool (pre-installed in D1)

Puncture EVACUATION1 = point on the details before the puncture point A =the last position before

outlet2 = point of puncture 2 =polozhenie removal tool3 = first movement of the cutting 3 =point after removal

ON.

ON.

ON. PREVIOUSLY

ON.

ON.

TOOL DOWN TOOLING UP

320


Sample Program to enter the tool offset and exit

G0 X-5 Y1 point of load / unload partsG41 D1 F10 correction in the dir. the tool is enabled, the correction of a

numberG65 X0 Y1 point of blocking the motion correctionX0 Y0G1 Z-1 Down Tool X1 Y1X0 Y0G65 X1 Y0 correction in the dir. the tool is turned off, the point of

blocking traffic at the exitG40 G0 Z0 tool up

Note that the tool enters and leaves the details of the area, touching both walls because of the line G65.

Notes on the correction of the cutting tool

Note 1: Inclusion of the correction can be made both in the block without moving along the axis and in the block containing the axis movement.

Note 2: There is no limit to how many consecutive blocks may not have information about the axis.

Note 3: There are no restrictions on how the line and out of the zone edges. They can have any angle of intersection until the intersection there.

321

TOOLING UP AND DOWN


Note 4: On the basis of regular points and the radii of two intersecting circles, the system automatically checks and corrects the programmed point of intersection, ie trigonometric function is performed by.

Note 5: All programs are standard automatic position of the axis is used as the center. For this reason, you should make sure that the correction to the cutting tool off Playing with these standard programs, so that the axis can be programmed to position the center. If you use the correction center, all excavation will be biased.

Note 6: If you want to preset point, and not corrected, you should add a command in the G40 block containing this point. G40 could be part of the previous block, provided that this unit is no information about the axis.

Note 7: Similarly, if the point when the desired pre-programmed points should be adjusted, should be added to the G41 or G42 block containing this next point, or in any block, not related to the commands for the axes between the two.

Note 8: Roughing and finishing passes can be easily implemented by introducing the value of the tool radius greater than the actual measured radius of the tool on the amount of allowance that should be left to the details for the finishing pass.

When a program is executed, the resulting item will be oversize. However, the actual radius of the tool by typing in and running the program again, you can get the size of the finished part.

So, if you enter more or smaller tool radius size of the details can be more or less.

Note 9: In general, when using the correction to the cutting tool, none of the internal characteristics of the parts can not be less than tool radius. This includes features such as grooves, arcs, and V-shaped depression. If the item has such characteristics, they should be replaced by straight lines, the correction of the cutting tool should be disabled or to be used a smaller instrument.

Note 10: Correction of the cutting tool should be disabled by setting the parameter of a special flag to 4.

Note 11: G41 with a negative radius of the tool is the same as the G42 with a positive radius of the tool.

322


Note 12: G42 with a negative radius of the tool is the same as the G41 with a positive radius of the tool.

In the above cases, the tool will move in the opposite direction, as he tries to settle down, touching the walls of the groove or V-shaped depression.

In this case, the error will be issued "Compensated line / arc do not intersect" (Adjusted line / arc does not intersect.)

Automatic correction of the cutting tool (G45, G46, G47)

Commands for automatic correction of the cutting tool, G45 (automatic correction to the left), G46 (automatic correction to the right) and G47 (automatic correction off.) Act mainly as a normal correction commands to the cutting tool, using the previous, current and next programmed point to calculate the adjusted current point. They differ only by way of correction of the first and last pre-programmed points. The control unit automatically calculates the previous programmed point for the first points of the adjusted and the next programmed point for the final adjusted points. These points are calculated in such a way that adjusted the trajectory starts and ends at the points where the radius of the tool is removed from the first and last programmed point on the left (G45) or on the right (G46) side of the programmed path.

323


Examples of programs

Correction of the cutting tool incl. with G41

X-1 is Y1G41 X0 Y0X1 Y.2X0 Y1.5

Correction of the cutting tool incl.

324


325


Tool length compensation (G43, G44, G49)

(

or

orA234

G17 XY H-plane to add to / subtract from the Z-axis plane G18 XZ H added to / subtracted from the Y-axis plane G19 YZ H added to / subtracted from the X-axis

If the correction is activated in H-plane G17 XY, and then switches to the plane of the plane G18 XZ, correction will act, and still added to the axis Z. However, if another adjustment is activated by H is still in the plane of the G18 XZ, it will be added to the axis Y. Both the correction will act on an axis Z, and the other on the axis Y, until they are canceled with G49 or changed to another correction H.

326


Correction table H of the instrument H01 = 1.5H02 = - .5H03 = -1.25H04 = 5

Various lines of code and results

G17 G43 H1G90 Z0 Z moves to 1.5 (from the starting position)Z1 H3 Z moves to -0.25 (from the starting position)G44 H3Z0 Z moves to 1.25 (from the starting position)H4Z0 Z moves to -5 (from the starting position)G19 G43 H2X0 X moves to -0.5 (from the starting position)H0X0 X moves to 0 (from the starting position) G49 X0 Z0 Z moves to 0, and X is moved to 0 (from the

starting position)

In the G90, and G91 modes there is no aspect of how the correction of H added to the final position of the axis or subtracted from it.

Cancel scaling (G50) Set scaling (G51)

You can send a command to scale at any time during the program using the G51.

The command format is:

G51 I____ J____ K____ X____ Y____ Z____

I, J, K - is the center of scaling. If I, J, K are not in line G51, the center will scalability last used by default center. Center Zoom is set to 0 at the beginning of each program and after the G50.

X, Y, Z are the scaling factors for each axis. The range of each of the scaling factor is up to ± 999,9999 ± 000,0001. After installing the scaling factors are as long as the will not be changed or canceled with G50. At the beginning of each program, all scaling factors are set to 1.

327


P1 - P4 original program, lack of scalability P1'-P4 ' scalable software P0 Center Zoom

Notes on Scaling

Note 1: After installing the scaling is valid until until canceled with G50.

Note 2: If you scale the arcs using a scaling factor of the primary axis.

Note 3: At G27, G28, G29, G30 and G92 are not influenced by scaling factors.

Note 4: For the scaling of the axes of the same coefficient is used G51 P.

Note 5: G50 sets the scaling factors of 1, and centers on the scale zero.

328


Coordinate Systems

The zero point of the machine - is a fixed point on the machine. Usually, the zero point of the machine determines the manufacturer of the machine. It is set by the limit switch and encoder marker pulse on each axis.

The zero point of the machine is turned on when the team F1 (Home) (starting position) is performed for the first time. When the machine zero point is defined, it does not change when you reset, call the coordinate system (G54-G59), the displacement of the coordinate system (G92) or the installation of a local coordinate system (G52).

Programmed limits set by the zero point of the machine.

The coordinate system of the machine (G53)

Code G53, prior to any movement of XYZ, leads to the fact that these dimensions are related to the zero point of the machine.

XA Y1 moving to P2G92 X0 Y0X1 Y1 movement in P1X-1 Y-1 displacement of P3 orG53 X0 Y0 displacement of P3

329

G92 or G54-REFERENCE SYSTEM 59

REFERENCE SYSTEM

ZERO POINT MACHINE


The coordinate system used to align the size of the workpiece in accordance with the programs of the machine, called work coordinate system. Working coordinate system is established using one of the following methods.

A. using the G92 Two. using the G53 Three. using the commands G54-G59 4. using the G52

Work coordinate system (G54 - G59) (G5 # 0 ... G5 # 9)

Dimensions of working coordinates is always dependent on the floating zero points G92. To install the operating system of coordinates to press the F7 (Parms) (Options) - F2 (Coord) (coordinates). A menu of working coordinates, giving the opportunity to enter the shifted coordinates for each working coordinate system. Correction of the original - it's parameters, displacing all of the coordinate system relative to the zero point of the machine. Usually, the zero point of the machine and the same starting position.

The following extensive work coordinate system.

G540 - G549.

. (60 general working of corrections)

.G590 - G599

Note: G540 - G590 - the same as the G54 - G59

G55 X1 Y1 moves to the X1 Y1 in the labor of correction 2G59 X1 Y1 moves to the X1 Y1 in the labor adjustment 6G54 always food on the coordinate system

Note: Correction of G54 - G59 are not reset during power-up or after reduction to the original position. The control unit will remain in the chosen coordinate system, as long as you run your other G54-G59.

The local coordinate system (G52)

The command G52 is similar to the G92 is that it uses a zero current coordinate system as its starting point instead of the current status of the machine (G92). When you use the G52 should be taken as a "shift position working with" X____ Y ____ Z____.

Notes on the local coordinate system

Note 1: G52 - a modal code, so after installation it will affect all systems of coordinates.

330


Note 2: To cancel the G52 to introduce G52 X0 Y0.

Note 3: At the G52 correction does not affect the position of the machine. At the G92 correction affects the position of the machine.

Note 4: Correction G52 reset during power-up, after the installation to its original position, after installing the operating manual correction mode or jog feed, as well as any team after the G92.

Note 5: The initial values of corrections G52 restored after the completion of the program.

G55X2 Y2 moves in P3G52 X1 Y1 establishes a zero in the amount of P2 relative to P1X1 Y1 stops in P3X2 Y2 moves in P4

With the G92

G55X2 Y2 moves in P3G92 X1 Y1 establishes a zero in the amount of P2 relative to P3X1 Y1 stops in P3X2 Y2 moves in P4

331

CURRENT SITUATION IN THE BEGINNING OF THE MACHINE

Local coordinate system

WORKING SYSTEM 2

STARTING POSITION

ZERO POINT MACHINE


One-way or one-time accelerated positioning (G60)

To perform precise positioning with no gaps there is a function of position in one direction.

G60 X___ Y___

G60 - is a single G-code, it is used instead of the G00.

Notes for unidirectional positioning

Note 1: The degree of departure from the pre-specified by the manufacturer of the machine.

Note 2: At the direction of the transition is not affected beyond the mirroring.

Note 3: If the manufacturer of the machine was set to "one-sided supply of G00» ("G00 unidirectional approach"), the same sequence position will be respected at every movement of G00.

Exact stop mode (modal) (G61)

When the command is issued to G61, is slowing down the block to the end point of cutting and installing the operating position is relative to the next block. G61 is valid as long as there is no command is issued by the G63 (tapping mode) or G64 (cutting mode).

Tapping mode (modal) (G63)

When a command is issued G63, feed rate and the correction of spindle speed is ignored (always considered as 100%), and the mode of the block and stop filing do not apply. G63 is valid as long as there is no command is issued by the G61 (exact stop mode) or G64 (cutting mode).

Cutting mode (modal) (G64)

G64 is the default at the beginning of each program. When a team is slowing G64 on the basis of the angle between the blocks at the end point of each subsequent block, and the mode of cutting over to the next block. This command is valid for as long as no command will be G61 (exact stop mode) or G63 (tapping mode).

Calling the program (G65 P)

G65 can also be used to invoke the program. The called program is determined by P.

Endpoint

STARTING POINT

Going beyond

332


For example: *G65 P4371 (program number is 4371, and sets the number 16 in 4371, and the parameter number 7 of 65)

To pass parameters to the program to a block can be added to other addresses.

For example: *G65 P1402 A500 (program number is 1402 and sets the number 1 to 500, the parameter number 16 in 1402, and the parameter number 7 of 65)

* Unspecified parameters are set to -999.Addresses refer to the parameters as follows.

Addresses The parameter number

A A B 2 C 3 . . . . X 24 Y 25 Z 26

Notes on a call using the G65 program

Note 1: If the program specified location P, does not exist, an error.

Note 2: The called program is rounded address value R. For example: G65 P12.75 (program number is 13)

Note 3: If in block G65 is not P, the block is not considered to block the move.

Note 4: Unspecified address set to -999.

Rotate the coordinate system (G68) Cancel the rotation (G69)

G68 can be used to rotate the model around a programmable predetermined central point. The plane of rotation is determined by the G17, G18, G19; the center of rotation is determined by the IJK, a turning angle - with the help of AA. The command format.

G68 AA + _____ I____ J____ K____

AA + means anticlockwiseAA-clockwise means

333


IJK determine the center of rotation in the plane the selected G17 G18 G19. Center of rotation is installed by default on the zero point of the current coordinate system at the beginning of each program. If IJK are not present in block G68, the center of rotation will be the last mentioned center. The angle of rotation and the center of rotation are set to zero at the beginning of each program.

G69 resets the rotation angle and the center of rotation.

It should be used with caution in combination with the rotation of the other functions. We must carefully consider the use of features such as mirroring, scaling and correction of the cutting tool, along with the rotation. Here are some basic rules.

A. Correction of the cutting tool should be disabled (G40), when the function is called rotation. (After the call to turn the correction on the cutting tool can be included).

Two. If scaling is included before the call rotation, the center of rotation will be scaled, if the function is called before the turn of the zoom, the center of rotation will not be scaled.

Three. The procedure to enable or disable: the first inclusion, the last stop.

G51. . . . Scaling incl. G68. . . . On a turn.G41. . . . correction in the cutting tool incl.

. . .

G40. . . . correction in the cutting tool off.G69. . . . turn off.G50. . . . scaling off.

ANGLE OF ROTATION

CENTERTURN

334


4. If the center of rotation is scaled, it will be scaled up since then, until the new center will be replaced or canceled with G69.

Five. Rotation is always performed in the active plane.

6. X, Y and Z can be used instead of I, J and K to the center of rotation.

7. R can be used instead of AA for the rotation angle.

335


Turn in 3 dimensions (G0, G1, G2, G3, G68 and G69)

G0, G1, G2 and G3 refer to the turn in 3 dimensions, if introduced G68 ABm.

G68 ABm

ABm indicates rotation in 3 dimensions. The angle in degrees m - a turn of the first axis of the third. For example, G17 G68 AB30 causes the rotation of the X coordinate of 30 degrees over the coordinates of Z.

Sample Program: G31P1 = 0 G69N1 G0 X0 Y0G1 Z0G17G68 AB [P1](piece for rotation)X1 Y2G3 R1 AA0 AB45G1 X3 Y5Y6G69G31P1 = P1-5IF P1> = -180 GOTO 1

With the above program yields the following detail:

336


Note: Any AA to turn the plane is ignored. Correction of the cutting tool and the trigonometric aid is not fully supported as a function of rotation in three dimensions.

With the G69 cancels all corners, including the turn in 3 dimensions.

Scalable and then turns the part

G51 I4 J1.5 X.7 Y.7G68 I3 J1 AA45X3 Y1X5Y2X3Y1G69G50

337

SCALABLE /ROTATED PIECE

ROTATED PIECE

Center of rotation Scale the center of rotation

CENTER FOR SCALING

BACKGROUND DETAIL

Scale DETAIL


Rotatable and scalable, then the item

G68 I3 J1 AA45.00G51 I4 J1.5 X.9 Y.9X3 Y1X5Y2X3Y1G50G69

338


Cancel mirroring (G70)

Install a mirrored display (G71)

Commands allow you to receive mirroring mirroring any midline. In the mirrored midline has no effect, on or off scaling or rotation. Mirroring is disabled at the beginning of each program.

The team is as follows. G71 X____ Y____ Z____

X, Y and Z axis is determined to be mirrored. Their values determine the distance from the zero current position to create a mirrored center line. After the G71 command must be at least one X, Y or Z.

G71 X3.5X4 Y1.5X5 Y2.25X4 Y3Y1.5G70

339

MIRROR SECONDARY LINE

BACKGROUND DETAIL

Mirroring DETAIL


G70 cancels mirroring.

Mirroring on the same axis changes the counter and conventional milling. Mirroring the same axis scaling by -1.

Group cycles

The group makes the program loop, using a block to G-code to determine the processing operations are usually defined by several blocks.

G70NORMAL

(Not mirroring)

G70 Y0Mirroring Y

Mirroring

G71 X0 Y0Mirroring the X and Y

G71 X0Mirroring X

340


Group cycles

G-code Boring

-ZOperation at the bottom

of the hole Challenge

+ Z Application

G73The intermediate

flow -The accelerated

movement of

The cycle of high-speed drill bits with a

periodic output

G74 Feed Pause

rotation of the spindle clockwise

FeedThe cycle of tapping

on the left

G75 Feed -The accelerated

movement ofTsekovanie

G76 FeedPause orientation of

the spindle movement in the X Y

The accelerated movement of movement

in X Y

Cycle finish boring

G77Drilling cycle of your

choice

G78 FeedPause spindle stop

flywheel The accelerated

movement of

The cycle of boring manual

G80 - - - Cancellation

G81 Feed -The accelerated

movement ofDrilling cycle,

zasverlovki loop holes

G82 Feed PauseThe accelerated

movement ofDrilling cycle, the cycle tsekovaniya

G83The intermediate

flow -The accelerated

movement of

Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of

the drill

G84 FeedPause

rotation of the spindle clockwise

Feed The cycle of tapping

G85 Feed - Feed The cycle of boring

G86 Feed Stopping the spindle The accelerated

movement ofThe cycle of rapid

boring

G87 Feed Moving in the XY

Feed The accelerated

movement ofFeedback loop boring

G88 Feed Pause Feed Rigid tapping

G89 Feed Pause Feed The cycle of boring

As a rule, group cycle consists of a sequence of six operations, as shown below.

341


Stage 1: Positioning axes X and Y (or the 4th and 5th, if activated) Stage 2: The accelerated movement of the point RStage 3: Handling holes Stage 4: Operation at the bottom of the hole Step 5: Challenge to the point RStage 6: Fast moving to the starting point

The work of the group cycle

The positioning is usually performed on the plane XY, and processing of the holes made by means of axis Z. When positioning and handling of the holes should be using this plane, and a combination of axes. Group cycles can be used in any plane.

The operations of the group cycle consists of three basic modes, which are specified by certain modal G-codes, as shown below.

(1) The data format G90 Absolute G91 Incremental

(2) The level of the cusps G98 level of the initial point G99 R-point level

(3) drill mode G73G80G81 .

Operation 1

Operation 2

POINT R

Operation 3

Operation 4

STARTING POINT

OPERATION 6

Step 5

Accelerated movement

WORK FLOW

342


. .G89

Note: The initial level assumes the value of the Z-axis when you first start the cycle group.

The figure below shows how to specify the data in G90 or G91.

Absolute and incremental programming

If the tool is returned to the R point or the initial level, it is indicated by G98 or G99. (See the figure below.) Use the G99 to the first hole, and the G98 - for the latter. When the cycle is repeated in a group mode, G98, the tool returns to the initial level after each hole.

In the G99 initial level does not change, and the tool returns to the R point after each hole.

343

ENTRY-LEVELENTRY-

LEVEL

POINT RPOINT R

POINT ZPOINT Z

Incremental ABSOLUTE


WORK FLOW


The initial level and the level of the point R

Data on drilling indicated after the G73, G74, G76, G77, G78, G81 - G89. The data is stored in the device management, as modal values for future use in other cycles.

Data on the processing cycle in the group are indicated as shown below. G ____ X__ Y__ Z__ R__ V__ Q__ P__ F__ Drilling mode The data on the status of the holes Data on drilling

Drilling mode. . . See G__ __ table of the group of cycles. The data on the situation X Indicates the position of the holes on the

incrementalopenings or the absolute value Y. The trajectory and speed of delivery are

the same as in the positioning of the G00.Data on drilling Z. . . Denotes the distance from point R to the bottom of the hole

with an incremental value or the position of the bottom of the hole with the absolute value. R. . . Denotes the distance from entry level to point R with the incremental value or the position of the point R by the absolute value. V. . . Indicates the first depth Z in the G73 and G83.Q. . . Represents incremental value for the G73 and G83.P. . . Denotes the time spent at the bottom of the hole. The relationship between time and the specified value is the same as for the G04.F. . . Refers to the feedrate. B. . . Denotes the exposure time to reverse the spindle in the soft mode, tapping the left or right.

ENTRY-LEVEL

ENTRY-LEVEL

LEVEL POINTS R

LEVEL POINTS R

RETURN TO THE POINT OF RETURN TO ENTRY LEVEL


WORK FLOW

344


For the drilling cycle can be used:

P140 for Zones of safe returnP141 for The final depth Z P142 for The entry-level ZP143 for The increments of ZP144 for ATh depth ZP145 for Feed rate of ZP146 for The increments of the periodic output bits P147 for Output gap in the periodic drillsP148 for Pause before reversing the spindle threading cycles P149 for Pause

Drilling mode (G__ __) remains unchanged as long as there is no other mode is specified, or a group drilling cycle will not be canceled with G80. After specifying the data on drilling in the group cycle, they persist as long as there will not be changed. All necessary data about the drilling must be specified when starting the cycle group, only the variable data must be specified at the time of the cycle.

Group cycles are canceled at the beginning of each program.

G73 - G78, G81 - G89 without moving along the axis will not perform drilling holes. G-codes include only the drilling cycle.

345


Uniformly distributed holes can be programmed with the address L.

G81 R___ Z___ F___G91 X___ Y___ L___

X___ Y____ represent the first and subsequent position openings in the incremental mode (G91). In absolute mode (G90) hole will be drilled repeatedly in the same position. K can be used instead of L to denote the number of holes.

Execute bolt holes (G72)

Automatic routine execution bolt holes can be used with any of the drilling cycle. Drilling cycles, if they apply to this automated program, characterized in that the hole positions are not specified. Line G72 indirectly identified all the provisions of the holes on the basis of special entry: the number of holes at 360 °, the number of reams holes, the radius of the circle center of bolt holes, the initial angle of the first hole and the center of the circle bolt holes. The control unit then calculates the position of each hole and produce a rapid linear movement in every hole. Angle is the angle of the first hole of the position "at 3:00." Positive initial angle departs clockwise from the position "at 3:00." A negative start angle departs clockwise from the position "at 3:00."

Note: Holes are drilled in a clockwise direction from the first position if the radius of the bolt holes is positive. Holes are drilled counter-clockwise, if the radius of the bolt hole is negative.

LAST OF TREATMENT

FIRST OF TREATMENT

STANDINGS

346


Determination of the initial angle

Below is the format command G72.

G72 X___ Y___ R___ Q___ P___ K___ position radius number of holes number of holes angle circle in center of hole 360 ° Drilling first

bolt openings openings bolt

The program for the drilling of a circle with a 5 bolt holes with a radius of 1 "

N1 G20 G90 (Inch / absolute)N2 S1000 M3 G43 H1 (spindle clockwise, 1000 rev / min, activates the

correction to the length of the tool number 1)N3 G81 G99 Z-1 R.1 F10

G81 Boring G99 Return to point R Z-1 The drilling depth R.1 The plane R F10 Feedrate Z

N4 G72 X0 Y0 R1 Q5 P5 K0

G72 The standard program execution bolt holesX0 Y0 Center in X0, Y0 R1 Radius 1 inch Q5 5holes in the 360 °P5 Drilling of 5 holes K0 The initial angle of 0 °

347

E 1-HOLE K GOOD

E 2-HOLE K NEGATIVE


Notes on a standard program execution bolt holes

Note 1: If P is less than Q, the circle would be incomplete drilled holes for the bolt.

Note 2 To move counter-clockwise using a negative radius.

Note 3: If you do not want to move to the center of the bolt hole pattern, you can use the following scheme.

G81 G99 Z-1 R.1 F10G65 X0 Y0G72 R1 Q5 P5 K0

Note 4: G65 can not be in block G72, because the block is also P, which causes the program № 5.

You can also use:

G81 G99 Z-2.1 F10 1P156 = 1 (radius of the bolt holes)P157 = 45 (initial angle of bolt holes)P158 = 5 (number of holes at 360 °)P159 = 5 (number of holes to be performed)G72 G65 X0 Y0 (center bolt holes)

Note 5: The initial level corresponds to Z, where Z during the drilling of the code (G73 - G78, G81 - G89).

348


The cycle of high-speed drill bits with a periodic output (G73)

G73 G98/G99 Z___ R___ V___ Q___ U___ D___ F___

The command G73 represents the cycle of high-speed drill with a periodic withdrawal of the drill. With this cycle is executed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Filing down the point VThree. Fast moving up to a value of U 4. Fast moving down to the value of D Five. Filing down the value of Q is either a point Z (whichever is less)6. Repeat steps 3-5 until you reach the point Z7. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99

Note: Team V optional. If you miss it, the first depth is equal to R___ - Q___.

349

POINT RPOINT R

Z, ZERO Z, ZERO

POINT ZPOINT Z


WORK FLOW


The cycle of the soft tapping on the left (G74)

G74 G98/G99 Z___ R___ B___ P___ F___

The command G74 represents the cycle of soft tapping on the left. Each axis position in this cycle is executed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Filing down the point ZThree. Pause before the reversal (indicated by code B)4. Reverse spindle rotation (clockwise)Five. Pause after the reversal (indicated by code P)6. Submission to the point R7. Reverse spindle rotation (counterclockwise)Eight. Fast moving to the starting point, if you see code G98

Note: During the tapping switch feedrate and spindle speed adjustment is ignored. In block mode, the cycle does not stop until until it is finished carving. If you use a feed, or just stop stop, stop the tap when it is outside the hole.

The calculation of feed and speeds for threading

A STATUS =STEP

QTY / min X STATUS = feed rate


WORK FLOW

Spindle CCW Spindle CCW

STARTING POINT

Spindle clockwise Spindle clockwise PAUSE PAUSE

POINT RPOINT R

POINT ZPOINT Z

350


For example: 1/4-20 taps, the number of rev / min spindle 4001/20 = 0.05 (stroke)400 x 0,05 = 20 (flow rate)

For proper operation metchikoderzhatelya may need to adjust the feed rate. If you tap in the chuck is too drawn out, the feed rate should be increased. If the tap is pushed into the chuck, the feed rate should be reduced.

Tsekovanie (G75)

Tsekovanie identical to the cycle of internal finishing round of deep grooves (G25). It always performs a counter-milling (counterclockwise). It always performs infeed to the center (not linear). It can be used in schemes under the bolt holes and other drilling patterns.

F__ (Feed rate XY)P150 = __ Radius tsekovki P503 = __ O - correction of the cutting tool off., 1 - Correction to the cutting tools inc. G75 G98/G99 Z__ R__ V__ Q__ F__

351


WORK FLOW

POINT ZPOINT Z

POINT RPOINT R

Z, ZEROZ, ZERO


G75 represents Team tsekovaniya cycle. In the loop is executed as follows.

1. The accelerated movement of the point R.2. Filing down to the point V.3. Tsekovanie hole (radius up to P150).4. Filing down the value of Q or a point Z (whichever is less.)5. Repeat steps 3-4 until you reach the point Z.6. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99.

Note 1: The command is optional V. If you miss it, the first depth is equal to R__ - Q__

Note 2: You can cut normal (clockwise) with mirroring.

Cycle finish boring (G76)

The distance and angle are adjustable parameters to control the angle of the holes and the distance to it.

Accelerated movement WORK FLOW OSS - ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP OFFSET (acceleration)

Spindle clockwiseSpindle clockwise

POINT RPOINT R

POINT ZPOINT ZPAUSE PAUSE

STARTING POINT

ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP TOOL

The displacement

352


G76 F____ P____ R____ Z____ G98/G99

The team represents the cycle G76 boring finish. In each position of the axis, this cycle will be performed as follows.

A The accelerated movement of the point R2 Filing down to the point Z3 Pause at the bottom of the second P 4 The orientation of the spindle 5 Move to XY (the distance and direction parameters are CTRL «back corner

holes" and "distance to the rear corner of the hole")6 The accelerated movement of the hole at the point R / start point specified

G98/G997 Moving back to the original position of the XY

Specialized drilling cycle (G77)

This is a specialized drilling cycle. It can be used to loop specified by the user. The cycle must be set to G-code, G79.

For example:

G77 R.1 Z-2 X1 Y2 (does what and G79) Y-2 (does what and G79) . . . X3 (does what and G79) G80

Specialized drilling cycle can be used in the execution cycles bolt holes, equally spaced grid of holes or openings. If the G79 - no special code, you get an error 549, unrecognized G code (an unidentified G-code).

353


The cycle of boring manual (G78)

G78 F____ P____ R____ Z____ G98/G99

The teams represent the cycle G78 Boring manual. In each of the following axis position in this cycle will happen next.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Filing down the point Z3. Pause on P seconds4. Stopping the spindle Five. Log in flywheel mode (user can use the flywheel manually control axes, enable /

disable the spindle, take the tool, etc.) 6. Exit from the flywheel by pressing Enter or ESC7. The accelerated movement of the holes in the point R / starting point

Cancellation of group cycle (G80)

Group Cycle (G73 - G78, G81 - G89) is canceled, and then, work in normal mode.


WORK FLOW

POINT RPOINT R

POINT ZPOINT Z

Spindle clockwise

Spindle clockwise

STARTING POINT

PAUSE / STOP SPINDLE /

FLYWHEEL

PAUSE / STOP SPINDLE /

FLYWHEEL

354


Drilling cycle (G81)

G81 G98/G99 Z___ R___ F___

The team represents drilling cycle G81. In this cycle is executed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Filing down the point ZThree. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99

Drilling cycle / pause (G82)

G82 G98/G99 Z___ R___ P___ F___

355


WORK FLOW

POINT R

POINT Z

POINT R

POINT Z

STARTING POINT


WORK FLOW

POINT R

POINT Z

POINT R

POINT ZPAUSE PAUSE

STARTING POINT


The command G82 is similar to the G81; but pause (indicated by the command P) holds at the bottom of the hole. With this cycle is executed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Filing down the point ZThree. Pause for P___ seconds 4. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99

Drilling cycle with periodic withdrawal of the drill (G83)

G83 G98/G99 Z___ R___ V___ Q___ D___ F___

The command G83 drilling cycle stands with periodic withdrawal of the drill. This cycle is performed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Filing down the point VThree. Fast moving up to the point R4. Fast moving down to the value of D Five. Filing down the value of Q is either a point Z (whichever is less) 6. Repeat steps 3-5 to then, until you reach the point Z 7. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined G98/G99

Note: Team V optional, if omitted, the first depth is equal to R___ - Q___.


WORK FLOW

POINT ZPOINT Z

POINT R, Z, ZERO

POINT R, Z, ZERO

356


The cycle of the soft tapping on the right (G84)

G84 G98/G99 Z___ R___ B___ P___ F___

The team represents the cycle G84 tapping on the right. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Filing down the point ZThree. Pause before the reversal (denoted by team B)4. Reverse spindle rotation (counterclockwise)Five. Pause after the reversal (denoted by a team of P)6. Submission to the point R7. Reverse spindle rotation (clockwise) .Eight. Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98

Note: During the tapping switch feedrate and spindle speed adjustment is ignored. In block mode, the cycle does not stop until until it is finished carving. If you use a feed, or just stop stop, stop the tap when it is outside the hole.

Feed and speed for tapping

A STATUS = STEP

QTY / min X STATUS = feed rate

For example: 1/4-20 taps, the number of rev / min spindle 4001/20 = 0.05 (stroke)400 x 0,05 = 20 (flow rate)

357


For proper operation metchikoderzhatelya may need to adjust the feed rate. If you tap in the chuck is too drawn out, the feed rate should be increased. If the tap is pushed into the chuck, the feed rate should be reduced.

Boring Cycle (G85)

G85 G98/G99 Z___ R____ F___

The team represents the cycle G85 boring. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Submission to the point ZThree. Submission to the point R4. Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98


WORK FLOW

POINT R

POINT Z

POINT R

POINT Z

STARTING POINT

358


The cycle accelerated boring (G86)

G86 G98/G99 Z___ R___ F___

The team represents the cycle G86 boring fast. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows.

A. Starting the spindle (clockwise)Two. The accelerated movement of the point RThree. Filing down the point Z4. Stopping the spindle Five. The accelerated movement of the point R6. Fast moving to the starting point / point R, as defined by G98/G997. Starting the spindle (clockwise)

359


WORK FLOW

Spindle clockwise

Spindle clockwise

Spindle stop Spindle stop

POINT Z

POINT R

POINT Z

POINT R

STARTING POINT


Boring feedback loop (G87)

G87, G98 F____ R____ Z____

The distance and angle indicated by the control parameters of the "back corner holes" and "distance to the rear corner of the hole."

The team represents a feedback loop G87 boring. Each axis position in this cycle will be performed as follows.

A. The orientation of the spindleTwo. Accelerated movement in XY (with parameters CTRL, used in G76)Three. The accelerated movement of the point R (usually at the bottom of the hole)4. Move to the starting position XY5. Starting the spindle6. Submission of up to a depth of Z7. The orientation of the spindleEight. Move to XY (determined by the rear corner of the hole and the distance to the rear

corner of the hole)

POINT Z

POINT R

Early to a fixed point

NOT USED

Spindle clockwise

Spindle clockwise

Accelerated movement WORK FLOWORIENTED SPINDLE STOPOFFSET (acceleration)

ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP

TOOL

The amount of bias

360


9. Fast moving up to the starting point 10. Moving back to the starting position XY11. Restarting the spindle

361


Rigid tapping cycle (G88)

G88 G98/G99 Z____ R____ F____ P____ (Q____ V____)

The command G88 stands rigid tapping cycle. P (pause) may be used if the distance between the holes is too small to provide time for spindle reverse its rotation in the right direction. This cycle is performed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Submission to the point ZThree. Reversing the rotation of the spindle 4. Submission to the point RFive. Reversing the rotation of the spindle6. Pause for P___ seconds 7. Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98

362


Note 1: If the spindle is rotated in a clockwise direction when running G88, threading is performed on the right. If the spindle rotates counterclockwise when running G88, threading is performed on the left.

Note 2: The cycle will not stop tapping until it is complete, even if they are activated by stopping the flow, or block mode. If the shutdown is activated, tapping goes in the opposite direction and stopped at the exit of the hole.

Note 3: If Q__ indicated in block G88, threading is performed with periodic withdrawal of the tap. Q__ step indicates a periodic output metchika.V__ indicates the depth of the first tap.

F indicates the progress For example: ¼ - 20 tap

1/20 = 0.05, the course Use F.05

Rigid tapping - it is an option provided by the manufacturer of the machine, it should only be used if this option is set.

363


Boring Cycle / Pause (G89)

G89 G98/G99 Z___ P___ F___

The team represents the cycle G89 boring, with a pause. In each subsequent position of the axis in a given cycle will be performed as follows.

A. The accelerated movement of the point RTwo. Submission to the point ZThree. Pause at the bottom (indicated by code P)4. Submission to the point RFive. Fast moving to the starting point, if it is listed code G98

Example program for drilling holes in the plane YZ.

G19G81 R.1 X-1 F20 (the depth of X -1)Y3 Z2 (drilling holes in the Y3 Z2)Z5 (drilling holes in the Y3 Z5)Y-1 (drilling holes in a Y-Z5)G80


WORK FLOW

POINT R

POINT Z

POINT R

POINT Z

STARTING POINT R

PAUSE PAUSE

364


Notes on the specifics of the loop group

Note 1: The spindle must be included with the M-code, M3 or M4, before the marked group cycle.

M3 The rotation of the spindle clockwise...G ____ ...... Correctly

M5 Stopping the spindle . . .G ____ ..... Wrong (M3 or M4 must be specified before the data block.)

Note 2: If the block contains a moving X and / or Y, is produced in the drilling mode, the group of the cycle. If the unit does not contain the movement of the X and / or Y, drilling is performed. However, when specified "G4 X___", drilling is not performed, even if marked X.

Note 3: If the block contains a clause Z, drilling will be performed. However, the Z axis will move quickly at this point. It can be used to move the tool up and over obstacles without the deactivation of the group cycle.

G00 X____G81X____ Y____ Z____ R____ F____F (Drilling is performed. Updated feed rate X Y.)M (Drilling is performed. Performed only optional.)G4 P (Drilling is performed. Data on drilling P is not changed by G04 P__.)

365


Note 4: Specify the data on drilling in the block in which the drilling. The input data (V, Q, B, Z, R, F or P) is stored as modal.

Example of drilling:

G90G81 G0 R.1 Z-2 F10 (0.1 clearance for drilling, the depth of 2, Z 10 filing)X1 (drill holes at depths of -2 X1)X2.5 F5 (drill holes at depths of -2 X2.5, Z 5 flow)X3.5 Z-1 (drill holes at depths X3.5 -1)Z2 (Z to accelerate the movement to remove the 2 clips)X6 (drilling holes in the X6)X7 Z-2 (drilled hole at a depth of X7 -2)G80 (removal of drilling cycle)

Note 5: If you use G76, G78, G86, G87 and G88 the distance between the holes is too small to insert a pause (G04) between the movements, to allow time for reversing the direction of rotation of the spindle.

CLIP

PROCESSING

USED STILL, WAITING FOR NORMAL SPINDLE ROTATION

366


G00 M___G86 X___ Y___ Z___ R___ F___G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.)X__ Y___G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.)X__ Y___G04 P___ (Pauses, drilling is performed.) . . . . . .This can not be taken into account if the machine has the function of spindle acceleration.

Note 6: Precautions operator

a) A single unit When the cycle is carried out in a group mode, a single unit, the control unit stops at the end of Operations 1, 2 and 6. Therefore, it must run at least three times to drill one hole.

b) CorrectionAllowed correction of the feed rate and spindle speed adjustment, equal to 100%, during the execution of the group of cycles G74 and G84.

Absolute / incremental mode

There are two modes of movement notation: G90 (absolute) denotes a fixed position, and G91 (incremental) denotes the distance from the current position of the tool.

Absolute mode (modal) (G90)

This function causes the transition to the normal control devices Absolute mode. In this mode, all sizes are calculated from a base point. This basic point can be either the original zero point, which is a fixed point on the machine, or a point on the working coordinate system defined by the operator.

Due to the limitation table / slide XYZ dimensions relative to the original zero point can only be negative for the standard milling machines, manufactured by Milltronics. Size relative to the origin of workers may be negative or positive, depending on where the operator sets the origin.

G90 is active at the beginning of each program. G90 cancels the G91.

Note: The machine defaults to G90 (absolute mode) when the program starts.

367


Positioning in the absolute coordinate system

G90 X0 Y0 P1 X1 Y1.5 P2 X2 Y2 P3

Incremental mode (modal) (G91)

This function causes the transition of the control device in an incremental mode. In this mode, all the dimensions are entered on the status of the machine in the previous block. In the case of manual data entry dimensions refer to the current state of the machine. Dimensions in G91 may be positive or negative. G91 should be used with caution. When you activate the tool offset, size, or the installation plane R zeros floating through the G92 control unit should not be in the mode of G91.

XC, YC, ZC (center), AA (initial angle) and AB (end angle) is always in absolute mode.

G91 cancels the G90.

368


Incremental Positioning

G90 X0 Y0 P1G91 X1 Y1.5 P2X1 Y.5 P3

Floating zero (G92)

This command sets the working coordinate system. The situation becomes programmed tool position in the current work coordinate system. If you use this command G92 should take it as a "challenge of the provision» X_ Y_ Z_.

If the machine is positioned in the P2, which is the command X1 Y1, and then issued the command G92 X0 Y0, the next time you issue the command X.5 Y.5 machine will be positioned

369

New coordinate system G92

CURRENT WORKING REFERENCE SYSTEM


in P3. If the machine is positioned at P1, and given the team a G92 X-Y-1, the next time you issue the command X.5 Y.5 machine will be positioned in P3.

When using the G92 for the G92 subroutine call to the subroutine call is saved and restored when returning from the subroutine.

For example:

X0 Y0 O0002Challenge 2 (cut at 0.0) G92 X0 Y0X5 Y0 X__ Y__Challenge 2 (cut at 5.0) X__ Y__X5 Y5 X__ Y__Challenge 2 (cut at 5.5) M99 (return)

Applying this rule, you can cut the same form in several places.

For more information on calling subroutines using the G92 in the notes on the M98 (p 396.)

Notes on a floating zero

Note 1: When using the G92 Z__ correction to the length of the instrument should be removed or taken into account the fact that they will influence the new position of the floating zero on the axis Z.

Note 2: G92 must not be used when the correction is on the cutting tool is activated, the control unit must always be in the mode of G40.

Note 3: The distance shifted by one working in the G92 coordinate system will be applied to other operating systems of coordinates, when they are activated by using the commands G54 - G59. If this is undesirable, the new G92 should be installed when changing coordinate systems. G92 settings are reset when the power and after the installation of the machine to its original position.

Note 4: G92 X__ Y__ can be considered as a challenge to this position X__ Y__.

Note 5: At power-G54 coordinate system is activated.

Note 6: The original values are restored after the G92 program.

370


Feed mode with a time delay (G93)

G93 - is a modal G-code. In the G93 feed rate mode with a time delay given in inverse seconds (1/sec) or inverse-minute (1/min). Both units used depend on many parameters, which set the units for time-delay mode.

In the time delay the amount of time you want to move the block, is the inverse of the feed rate, regardless of distance traveled. To this there are two exceptions: 1) the accelerated movement and 2) moving, slow down, if any axis of a given movement is moving faster than the maximum setting for the supply of that particular axis. In the time-delay feed rate should be specified in each block transfer, otherwise an error will be issued 611.

For example:

G93X-10Y-2.4A-3F.25 (Provided that the unit feed rate equal to 1/sec, the movement takes

1/0.25 = 4 seconds, regardless of where the movement started on the machine).

X-5 (This line generates an error 611, because the rate is not specified filing.)

Note: Accelerated movement going on in the accelerated filing.

Submission of a minute (G94)

This G-code is a modal code, giving the device control instructions on how to interpret the commands of submission - in inches / min or mm / min for linear displacement degrees / minute for rotations and inches / min or mm / min for the combination of linear and rotary movements. When programming a combination of linear and rotary displacement curves correspond to the time required for the implementation of linear displacement. The only exception is that if the time for linear movement is too small, the axis of rotation will try to move faster than is possible. In this case, the movement slows down with the length of the rotation and the maximum flow rate for the axis of rotation. When you turn the control unit G94 is always expressed in the submission in a minute.

For example:

F100 X12 Starts at (0,0,0) and performs integer linear movement 12 inches, The movement is 12 x 60/100 = 7.2 seconds.

F28 X1Y3Z4 It starts at (2,5,1) and performs integer linear movement 3.74 inches, The movement is 3,74 x 60/28 = 8.02 seconds.

F600 A180 It starts with (0,0,0,0,0) and performs a rotation by 180 °, the rotation is 180 x 60/600 = 18 seconds.

F250 A200 B100 It starts with (0,0,0,120,300) and performs a turn at 215,41 °, the rotation is 215,41 x 60/250 = 51.70 seconds.

371


F100 X12 A180 It starts with (0,0,0,0,0) and performs a linear movement 12 inches, The movement is 12 x 60/100 = 7.2 seconds.

F28 X1 Y3 Z4 A30 B120 It starts with (2,5,1,0, -333), and performs a linear movement 3.74 inches, The movement is 3,74 x 60/28 = 8.02 seconds.

F10 X-1 A1800 It starts with (0,0,0,0,0), and since the axis of rotation will try to move faster than is possible, the control unit uses the parameters to the axis of rotation of the movement performed at 1800 °, which would take 1800 x 60/5000 = 21.6 seconds, with 5000 - this is the maximum flow rate for the axis of rotation A.

Feed per revolution (G95)

This G-code is a modal code, giving the device control instructions on how to interpret the commands of submission - in mm or inch per revolution of the spindle. G1 F.005 will cause the displacement of the axis of 0.005 "for each revolution of the spindle.

Note: To use this G-code on the machine should be optional rigid tapping.

Returning to the original level or the level of R (G98/G99)

These two G-code is used only when the control device is located in one of the group of cycles axis Z (with the G73 to G89), or automatic standard programs (G24-26, G34-36). G98 causes the return of the Z group cycle at the level at which it was activated during this cycle. G99 causes the return of the Z group cycle at the current level of R.

G98X1 Y1 Z1G81 X5 Y-4 Z-1.3 R.2 F10 X5 Y-4 then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z1X2 Y3 X2 Y3 then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z1G99 X3 Y-1 X3 Y-1 and then Z.2 then Z-1.3 and then Z.2G80 cancellation of the cycle

Here are a few specialized and non-G-code.

On. / Off. cylindrical display (G107)

G107 can be used when there is a rotary axis for cutting on the surface of the cylinder.

Before you apply this g-code, you must install two additional parameters (MISC) for valid values:

Cylindrical axis display its original position (set to 1 for X, 2 Y, 3 for Z)

372


CHEESE DISPLAY rotation axis (set of 4 for A, 5 for B)

When the cylindrical mapping is enabled, any movement that is specified for the "Axis in position" will be transformed into a movement for "a rotary axis." When a cylindrical display is activated, move the axis in the initial position is possible.

As for the other two linear axes, in addition to the original position of the axis, the axis on which the transfer is made to the cylinder or from him, sometimes called the "axis of supply", and the axis on which the transfer is made along the cylinder, sometimes simply called "linear axis."

Cylindrical mapping is included in determining the radius of the cylinder with the address of 'R' or the rotational axis of the corresponding address (or 'A', or 'B', depending on the parameter of the cylindrical rotary axis):

G107 R10 orG107 A10 (if A - rotary axis) orG107 B10 (if B - rotary axis)

With regard to the definitions of the planes, rotary axis is the axis of a place in the starting position.

When the cylindrical mapping is enabled, the radius can be re-defined by the recall G107.

Cylindrical mapping is disabled if you specify zero radius or the radius is not specified:

G107 orG107 R0 orG107 A0 (if A - rotary axis) orG107 B0 (if B - rotary axis)

Next, the description will be deemed to have A - a rotary axis, Y - axis in the initial position, and Z - axis of the serve.

When the cylindrical mapping is enabled, can use two modes of programming. In both modes the rotational axis of the shaft takes place in the starting position for the determination of the planes.

373


MODE 1 - ENTER STRAIGHT CIRCULAR MOVEMENTS

In this mode, use the address 'A'. To calculate the feed distance traveled in degrees, is converted to an equivalent distance on the surface of the cylinder.

Example 1:

G107 A10 (the radius of the cylinder 10 inches) (If we were in the plane of XY, we are now in the plane XA) G1 F50 X-5 A-5 (for the calculation of feed is converted to 5 degrees of arc length on the

cylinder) G3 X-25 R10 (R is always linear distance in inches) G1 Z-2 G107 A8 (after moving along the axis of filing typically requires re-definition of the radius of

the cylinder) | | G107 A0

MODE 2 - CHANGE OF LINEAR

In this mode, the address used by 'Y'. Addresses 'Y' will be converted to a similar address 'A'. Programmed trajectory, recorded for the plane XY, can "rotate" around the cylinder, without changing the program after you insert G107.

Example 2:

G0 X0Y0 Z0 G107 R10 (the radius of the cylinder 10 inches) (If we were in the plane of XY, we are now in the plane XA) G1 F50 X-5 Y-5 (the required displacement is computed A, equivalent to the Y-5) G3 X-15 Y-15 I-5 J-5 (even in the plane XA -5 in the J-5 is still in inches) G3 X-25 R5 (R is always linear distance in inches) G1 Z-2 G107 R8 (after moving along the axis of filing typically requires re-definition of the radius of

the cylinder) | | G107 R0

NOTES:

374


A. When a cylindrical map of activated at a certain radius, the axis of filing, as a rule, does not move. If the axis of the feed is moved, it usually moves in a block separate from the other movements of the axes, and then a re-definition of the radius of the cylinder.

Two. As noted above, the rotary axis is the axis of a place in the starting position for the determination of the planes. In general, only useful for the plane, including the linear axis and the rotation axis. Other planes include the displacement of the axis of filing in conjunction with the other axis, and not likely to give useful results.

Three. Allowed correction of the cutting tool.

4. Can be determined by the base position for the axis in position for use with the G28 or G30. Axis in the initial position can be directed to the transition team is the "original position" to start the G107.

G271 (cleaning deep cavities)

This cycle operates, working with the correction of the trajectory of the cutting tool using the tool radius, plus the finishing allowance.

The sample program:

P145 = 10 (Feedrate Z)F25 (XY feed rate to clear the notch)G271 P1234 Q1235 R.1 Z-1 D.1 I.05 ('R' - is the plane R, 'Z' - is the depth Z, 'D' - a cutting width, and the 'I' - a finishing allowance) N1234 ('P' indicates the start of excavation)G41 G65 X0 Y1X0 Y0X2Y1G3 R1 AA-90 AB90G1 Y4X0Y0G65 X1 Y0G40N1235 ('Q' denotes the end of recess)

375


This program clears cut that looks as follows.

Cutting width - the distance between a pass and the next.

Finishing allowance is not removed in the final pass. For removal allowance should be programmed another cycle of milling. Finishing allowance is not included in the option, if the correction is turned off in the cutting tool.

Note 1: For values of 'I' requires that the correction in the cutting tool has been included. If the correction of the cutting tool is included in the wrong direction (outward, not inward), a large excavation will be cleaned.

Note 2: If the endpoint does not match the primary, will be added to the line from the end point to the beginning.

Note 3: The feed rate and spindle speed in the geometry of the cavity is ignored during the cleaning cycle.

Note 4: If the trajectory has a geometry that intersects another geometry, the loop will be done everything possible to clean the recess, but most likely the work will be done poorly.

Note 5: The cycle may require that the holes were drilled at the points of penetration. To do this, to the point of incision observed and added to the drilling cycle.

376


This cycle can then be used to clean around the sites.

Example program areas:

P145 = 10 (Feedrate Z)F321 (XY feed rate to clear the notch)G271 P1234 Q1235 R.1 Z-1 D.1 I.05('R' - is the plane R, 'Z' - is the depth Z, 'D' - a cutting width, and the 'I' - a finishing allowance) N1234 ('P' indicates the start of excavation)G41 G65 X0 Y1G0 X0 Y0G1 X2Y1G3 R1 AA-90 AB90G1 Y4X0Y0G65 X1 Y0G40P516 = 1 (means island)G45 G0 X1 Y1G2 R.3 AA180 AB180G47P516 = 1 (means island)G45 G0 X1 Y2G2 R.3 AA180 AB180G47P516 = 1 (means island)G45 G0 X1 Y3G2 R.3 AA180 AB180G47N1235 ('Q' denotes the end of recess)

377


This program clears cut that looks like this:

RunTime = Period Main-Prog-Text-Edit-Verf-Graph = Home screen, program-text-edit-check-Graphical Active = Actively TextVer = Test textCorrection: canceled Instrument: Diameter: Length:Submission:Rotation: Coolant: Disabled Number details:Rot = rotation; Pan = Pan; Wind = creation of a window; Auto = automatic scaling; Zoom-= zoom out; Zoom + = zoom in; Limit = limits; Zone = safe zone; Coord = coordinate; Fresh = update; Exit = output; Clear = clear

The following will be discussed on a number of special and non-G-codes.

Save / Restore Settings (G990/G991)

Pp Ll Qq G990 (save settings)Pp Ll Qq G991 (reconstruction parameters) G990/991 allows you to save and restore the settings using the file name C :/ RAM/Q0000-Q9999. The parameters are as follows:

Pp (number of core parameters, default 0)Ll (number of parameters, the default is 10)Qq (identification of the file, the default is 0).

G990 and G991 have to follow the Pp, Ll, or Qq.

WARNING: The line should not be other teams.

378


For example: N0020 (my routines) P0 L10 Q20 G990 (Save Settings P0-P9)(Freely use and modify the parameters P0-P9)P0 L10 Q20 G991 (restore P0-P9)M98 (a return to the calling program with the original P0-P9)

Read byte parameters (G995)

P1 = b G995 (P0 sets the value of byte b)

For example:P1 = 79G995 (P0 sets the value of byte 79, G18 choice of the plane, XZ = 0, ZX = 1)Valid values of P1 - from 0 to 639

Valid values of P1 - from 0 to 639Valid values of P0 - 0 to 255

Note: G995 is identical to the P0 = PB # #.

Write byte parameters (G996)

P1 = b P0 = V byte parameter b sets the value of v.

For example:

P1 = 82P0 = aG996 (setting the parameter byte number 82, the correction on the walls of

the circular conical yes (yes), for example, 0 = no (no), 1 = yes (yes))

Note: G996 is identical to the PB # # = #

Full list of byte parameters, see Appendix.

379


Calling error (G997)

Forces display an error code. The generated code error is rounded (option number 1).

For example:P1 = 408G997 (Causes display of an error 408, error axis Y. The Y-axis does not cause a

mismatch error, it only displays the error).

Note: P1 = 0 is not an error.

All valid error codes in the control unit are in the range from 1 to 999.

Beep (G998)

G998 is a beep from the speaker if the speaker is installed.

Special G-codes

Special G-codes can be created for the execution of the loop defined by the user, for example, a non-existent drilling cycle. To install a new specialized G-code must first create a text program (numbered from 9010 to 9019), indicating the new G-code. Next, enter the number of new specialized section of the code in the parameter F3 (Power) (Power), newly established after the text of the program.

Time is a specialized program for G-code can be stored in the directory memory (RAM) or a directory of programs for processing details. The program in the directory memory (RAM) is preceded by the program in the software for processing details. When you call any custom code M or G of specialized code, it will perform its normal function. If the code is in a specialized syntax error at power up the following window appears.

For example: Set a special G-code O9014 - 005 parameter F3 (Power) (Power) and enter a program in C :/ RAM/O9014.

Each time a G5 it will be similar to calling C :/ RAM/O9014.

To refer to the newly created custom code can be used three-digit number. See the M-and G-codes on page 50, Section 2.

The error in the program or the program 09,013 specialized G-code not found. To continue, press any key ...

380

SECTION 5 - ADDITIONAL FEATURES (L-CODES)

These codes are used if the operator programs the CNC Centurion in text mode or manual data entry. They are also generated from the interactive program. It should be noted that most programmers, especially beginners, use interactive programming mode. If you plan to use the text-mode programming, you need to pay special attention to this section as it explains the codes. If you plan to use the interactive programming mode, you can skip or skim this section to read it and concentrate on the section of the dialog programming

Passage of additional functions - it is one or two digits, preceded by a letter of M. If the code is less than 10, the zero can be omitted (M02 or M2). These codes are used to perform many functions of the machine and control devices listed in the following table.

Note: Most of the M-code, working with the I / O, refer to the machines Milltronics; but they are flexible and can be adapted to the specific application. There may be other M-code is not listed here, relating to additional features on special machines.

381

M-codes

M-codes Function Performed prior to moving

Performed after the move

M00M01M02M30

Stopping the programOptional StopCompletion of the programCompletion of the program /Spindle off

XXXX

M03M04M05

Included spindle rotation in a clockwise directionIncluded spindle rotation counterclockwiseSpindle off

X *

X *

X *

M06 Change of tool X *

M07M08M09

Includes coolant in the form of oil mist Includes coolant splash Coolant off

X *

X *X *

M10M11M19

Clamp / Brake Decompression / brake The orientation of the spindle (optional Automatic Tool Changer)

X *X *X *

M31 Emergency Stop X *

M32 Check out the channel X *

M90 Graphic off X *

M91 Graphics included X *

M93 Scan in 3 dimensions include X

M94 Scan in 3 dimensions is disabled

X

M95 Cone Wall X

M96 Rounded wall X

382


M-codes Function Performed prior to moving

Performed after the move

M97 Cleaning the deep recesses X

M98 The operator of the subroutine call

X *

M99 Completion of the operator routines

Xbri

* These functions can be selected before moving, and after it.

Please note: The control unit receives more than one M-code line, but it is recommended to program only one M-code on the line. If a line has more than one M-code, the execution order is not defined in part, and the program can not run as expected. In general, the M-code will be executed in numerical order, "the first M00, the latest M99», if you have not specified that they run after the operators of the movement. (See the table following M-code on page 69, Section 4.)

After switching on coolant, it runs on and off the spindle, and it does not need to program, when running the spindle.

Stop the program (M00)

Program execution stops on the block, which contains the M00, and the operator is given a hint to click Cycle Start (Run cycles). After clicking on the button Cycle Start (Run cycles) program execution resumes. If the M00 in line with the team moving, moving will be executed before shutdown. If the M00 is a block comment, it will be displayed as a hint.

An optional stop (M01)

M01 - this is the same as the M00, except that it runs only when the switch is activated by an optional stop. If the M01 is a block comment, it will appear as a prompt to the operator.

Skipping the block (/)

Line of code can be omitted or ignored by the control device. Insert the sign "/" (oblique line) at the start line and the activation of F5 (BSkip) (Skip block) lead to the fact that the control unit will skip that line. In the example below, F5 (BSkip) (Pass Block) is deactivated, the machine will move in first, second and third points. When the F5 (BSkip) is activated, the machine will move in first, and then the third point. Block 2 will be skipped.

N1 X0 Y0/N2 X2 Y2N3 X4 Y0

383


Completion of the program (M02, M30, M99)

Any one of these codes can be used to refer to the completion of the program. However, M02 and M99 are left spindle and coolant included; M30 them off. All three codes are returned to the top of the program and run when you press the button Cycle Start (Run cycles). Completion of the program - the same as the M2 or M99.

Spindle incl. / Off. (M03, M04, M05)

With the help of these codes include the spindle: a clockwise rotation (M03), counter-clockwise rotation (M04) or disable (M05). Teams include the spindle will be executed before the command line. M05 will be executed after the command line.

Tool change (M06)

M06 moves the Z position tool changer.

This command sends a strobe signal to the M-bus functions and sends impulse to 150 milliseconds (ms) found M06. It then stops the program and gives the operator a hint about changing the tool. If the M6 is a comment block, it will be displayed as a hint to the operator. The control unit turns off the spindle and coolant, and then waits for a signal the completion of the tool changer. The spindle can not join until the tool change is not complete. After receiving the signal the completion of the tool change program execution resumes. If the settings tool changer mounted on a manual shift, after receiving a signal the completion of the tool change is necessary to press Cycle Start (Run cycles) to resume the program. For security purposes, never not attempt to change the tool manually, while the machine is not in command mode, the tool change M06.

If the machine is equipped with an automatic tool changer, it has the option F3 (Power) (Power), MACRO M6 (tool change) for the implementation of an automatic shift. A macro tool change points to a program that performs a tool change. These programs relate to the tool changer and its inputs and outputs. If a program has a bug or a program is not found in the specified directory, the power-error message.

Coolant inc. / Off. (M07, M08, M09)

With the help of these codes include coolant (M07 - oil mist, M08 - watering) before executing the command for the axis. Team off coolant (M09) will be executed after the command for the axis.

Clip for rotary table (M10)

This code is activated by clamping or brake for the optional rotary table.

Invalid path was not found either macro program for the tool change M6. To continue, press any key ...

384


Decompression on the turntable (M11)

With this code, released the brake option turntable.

Note: There is an option F9 (Ctrl) "auto rotary brake" (automatic brake rotary table), which automatically turns on and off the brake.

Tool changing device codes (M19-M28)

These functions are used with the optional automatic tool changer. With the M19 runs spindle orientation. Instrumental drum is controlled by M20 (starting position of instrumental drum), M21 (the rotation of the tool drum in a clockwise direction) and M22 (the rotation of the tool drum counter-clockwise). Hand tool change device control codes M23 (supply hand) and M24 (Rejected hand). Drive shaft is controlled by the M25 (the inclusion of the traction rod) and M26 (Disable the traction rod). Orientation video is controlled by M27 (orientation video included) and M28 (the orientation video is disabled).

Lock Drive (M31)

You might want to lock the drive (emergency stop) after the long program when the machine is not in service. With the M31 drives off (emergency stop of the machine).

Canal (M32)

This code leads to the fact that the control unit waits for the channel expectations, putting X 7, and then continues to run the program.

Various M-codes (M65/75, M67/77, M68/78, M69/79, M50/60)

Standard M-code is monitored by means of M65 (incl.) and M66 (off). These optional M-code control 4 extra functions. An additional feature is controlled by an M67 (incl.) and M77 (off). An additional feature is controlled by two M68 (incl.) and M78 (off). An additional feature is controlled by three M69 (incl.) and M79 (off). An additional feature is controlled by four M50 (incl.) and M60 (off).

Enable / disable graphics (M90, M91)

The function of graphics on the machines can be turned off to avoid excessive graphic display. When writing a program with the cycles of the operator can perform the M90 (the schedule is disabled) after the first cycle. This will prevent the construction of unnecessary lines in the graphics memory. After completion of the cycle can be carried out M91 (graphics included) to display the next section of the program. If the last executed command was M90 (the schedule is disabled), and the program started again, the control unit will restore the state of the M91 (graphics included). The size of the graphic file size is limited, established by the manufacturer of the machine. If the size is exceeded, the screen will update the chart.

385


Enable / disable scanning in 3 dimensions (M93, M94)

Scan function in 3 dimensions can be used to sweep the arc XZ or YZ in the geometry of XY (and Z). To determine these arcs, the following parameters.

P120-plane of the arc (8 plane = XZ, 9 = the plane YZ)Initial radius of the P127P128 initial angle P129 finite angle

Deployed along the arc geometry after command M94. The feed rate punctured Z - is the parameter number 145, the gap - is the parameter number 140, and the width of the passage - the parameter number 130.

The starting point is stored in the next parameter.

121 for the X-axis 122 Y-axis 123 for the Z-axis

To create the initial angle of covering the details must be greater than 180 ° and less than 360 °. For covering the details, starting at 0 °, you should use either -0,0001 ° 359,9999 °. For covering the details, starting at 180 °, you should use either 180,00001 ° -179,9999 °.

Initial angle of 0 º

Finite angle 180 º

The initial radius

STARTING POINT

STEP INCREMENT

386


Z can also be changed in geometry.

For example: P120 = 9 YZ planeP127 = 1 the initial radiusP128 = - .0001 initial angle, covering the partP129 = 180 finite angle P130 = .1 Width of passage P145 = 10 feed rate of ZF15 feed rate with a sweep P121 = 0 P122 = 0 P123 = 0 starting pointP140 = .1 the plane RM94 Scan in 3 dimensions includeX3 Z-1 gradual decrease to a Z-1, from X0 to X3M93 Scan in 3 dimensions is disabled

It creates a smooth rise, which falls from Z0 to Z-1.

Notes on the activation / deactivation sweep in 3 dimensions

Note 1: Scan in 3 dimensions requires the use of a spherical end mill.

Note 2: Scan in 3 dimensions will not work with a rounded or beveled corner.

Note 3: Correction of the cutting tool can be used by setting number 167 to 1. It works only in the XZ plane or YZ.

Tapered wall (M95)

M95 can be used to make the conical recesses in the walls or on the islands. In this command, as the parameters used by the angle of the wall, the first depth, the depth and the final increment of Z. M95 should be in the loop while-wend. The tool radius and the parameter number 160 (current depth Z) vary on the basis of the above parameters. Sets the M95 162 at 2, when the cycle is completed. To use the conical wall, correction of the cutting tool should be included.

M95 involves the use of a spherical end mill. The functions of the conical walls as you use the correct rounded / tapered walls to determine the location of the first cut.

387


Example 1: Correction of the cone section

The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes)

The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.

Example 2: The absence of correction of the cone section

The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no)

For the cutting of the details of the correction is not required.

388


Example 3: Correction of the cone cavity

The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes)

The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.

Example 4: Correction of the cone cavity

The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no)

For this part does not require correction tool.

Note: The first cut at the first depth Z is always adjusted to the range of the instrument.

First depth of Z should be on the surface to be cutting.

389


The angles of the walls are described as follows, irrespective of recesses or islets.

When used on the walls of the conical spherical cutters should be used M95 EO (or M95). When using the end mill should be used M95 E1.

Sample Program:

With this program runs the cavity 2 "x 3" with walls of 30 °.

P140 = .1 Gap P141 = -1 The final depth of ZP143 = .1 The increment of ZP144 = 0 A-I have the depth Z, the upper cut P160 = P144P162 = 0 To enter the while loopWhile P162 = 0 Start of cycle G41 G65 X0 Y1 Input correction on the cutting tool X0 Y0G1 F10 Z [P160] ZdownX2 Geometry Y3 Geometry X0 Geometry Y0 Geometry G65 X1 Y0 Breeding P163 = 30 The angle of the wallM95 Team conical walls Wend Completion of the while loop

HORIZONTAL WALL CAN NOT

ALLOWABLE WALL negative angles

VERTICAL

390


Rounded walls (M96)

M96 can be used for rounding the walls in the pits or on the islands. In this command, as the parameters used by the initial angle, radius walls, the first depth, the depth and the final increment of Z. M96 should be in the loop while-wend. To use the curved walls of the tool radius, the parameter number 160 (current depth Z) and the correction of the cutting tool must be activated. Sets the M96 162 at 2, when the cycle is completed. M96 requires the use of spherical cutters. The functions of the curved walls as you use the correct rounded / tapered walls to determine the location of the first cut.

Example 1: Correction of the rounded walls of the islandThe parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes)The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of excessive cutting of the vertical wall.

Example 2: The absence of correction of curved walls of the islandThe parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no)To cut this part does not require correction tool.

391


Example 3: Correction of the rounded walls of the cavity The parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = yes (yes)The first cut - this is the correction to the avoidance of cutting a vertical wall.

Example 4: The lack of correction of curved walls of the cavityThe parameter adjustment rounded / tapered wall = no (no)For this part does not require correction tool.

392


This program runs the island 2 "x 3" with rounded walls. The walls have a radius of 2 "and starts at an angle of inclination of 30 °.

P140 = .1 Gap P141 = -1 The final depth of ZP143 = .1 The increment of ZP144 = 0 A-I have the depth Z P160 = P144P162 = 0 To enter the while loopG0While P162 = 0 The beginning of the loop while-wend G42 G65 X0 Y1 Input correction on the cutting toolX0 Y0G1 F10 Z [P160] ZdownG1 X2 Geometry Y3 Geometry X0Y0 Geometry G65 X1 Y0 Output P163 = 30 The initial angle P164 = 2 The radius of the wall M96 The command to the rounded wallsWend

393


Notes on the rounded walls

Note 1: First cut at the first depth Z is always adjusted to the range of the instrument.

Note 2: First depth of Z should be on the surface to be cutting.

Note 3: If the radius of the initial angle of the walls and do not apply to the first depth Z and the final depth of Z, an error message.

The initial angles are determined and are shown in the following drawings. Allowed the initial negative angles.

When using either E0 if E is not used in block M95 (or M96), the control unit will use a spherical tool on the wall. Any other E № in the M95 (or M96) will inform the control unit that is used end mill. Correction rounded / tapered wall does not work with the option to end mill.

STARTING VERTICAL

STARTING VERTICAL

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS ISLET

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS ISLET

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS CAVITY

THIS TYPE OF DETAILS CAVITY

394


Cleaning the deep recesses (M97)

M97 can be used to clean the deep recesses, as well as removing material from the islands. It can also be used for finishing passes in non-standard cavities or islands. This team involves two parameters: the number of passes you want to accomplish, and the cutting width of each pass. The team must be within the loop while-wend. Cutting width is added to or subtracted from the radius of the cutter and go toward or away from the cutter. To use this function, cleaning grooves on the correction of the cutting tool should be included. If an error is compensated for the intersection of the arc radius of the modified instrument, the compensated line is replaced from the start point to the end point of the arc.

For example:G0 Z.1 Rapid traverse in 0.1 above 0D1 Download the tool radius number 1P1 = - .1 First the depth ZWHILE P1> - .3 The last depth Z = -0.3G41 G65 X1 Y2 Input correction on the cutting tool in the

absence of movement X1 Y1 starting point G1 F10 Z [P1] Z down X2G3 R.5 XC2.5 YC1 X2.5 Y .5G1 X5Y3X1Y1G65 X2 Y0 Turn off correction in the cutting tool in the

absence of movementG40 Turn off correction in the cutting toolP163 = 5 Perform 5 passesP164 = .1 Cut width = 0.1M97 Cleaning groove P1 = P1-.1 Next the depth ZG0 Z.1 The accelerated movement of the workpiece WEND Completion of the while loop

395


Next the program performs a tool with a radius of 0.1 ":

To clear the island of the same form should be changed to G41 G42.

To perform the finishing pass to download the table tool to tool radius greater than the radius of the actual instrument used.

P163 = 2 Perform two passesP164 = - .01 Adjustments to the actual size of the tool / finishing allowance for cleaning

Note: Cleaning the grooves are used to remove the allowance from the details. If programmed too many passes, you can damage the surface. It is best to use the M97 (clean grooves) to remove a few passes, and then use other means to remove the remaining material.

Subroutine call (M98)

The completion routines (M99)

Subroutine call command (M98) can be used to run any program that is constantly stored in the memory of another program. After the execution of the called program control device will transmit back to the calling program a block of commands after the M98.

1st pass TRAJECTORY DETAILS

Tool change is too great

396


When the main program calls a subroutine, it is considered an attachment with a single cycle. Attachment 2-cycles can be used as shown below.

When used with the M98 team L___ team can re-call the subroutine. Team L___ may indicate up to 999 repetitions of routines.

Attachments are allowed up to 50 levels.

M2 can be used instead of the M99. If the subroutine ends without M2 or M99, it will return to the calling program, as in a meeting with the M2 or M99.

Training routines

Sub-looks just like any other program.

Specifying the M99 at the end subroutine is optional. If the program was called with the M98, will return to the M02, M30 or M99. Subroutines are entered into memory in the same way as conventional programs.

397

HOME PROGRAM SUB SUB

ATTACHMENT C 1 CYCLE ATTACHMENT C 2 Cycle


Performing routines

Subroutine is executed when it is caused by the main program or another subprogram.

=A =

For example:

Team subroutine call and the team move can be made in one block.

For example: X1 M98 P0200

In this example, the subroutine 200 is invoked after the move in the direction of the axis X.

Sequence of the main program that calls the subroutine is as follows.

When the subroutine is called another subroutine, it is performed in the same sequence as shown in the example above.

Notes for subprograms

Note 1: If the specified number of routines can not be detected, an error message 603 "Program O # # # # does not exist" (program O # # # # does not exist).

HOME PROGRAM SUB

398


Note 2: Subroutine call M98___ can not run from the regime of manual data entry. In this case, you should write a short program to call a subroutine.

0XXXXM98PXXXM02 Then run it in run mode.

Note 3: If the routine changes the floating zero (as a rule, G92 X0 Y0 in the first block of subroutines), it will be restored by the same amount of correction, which was when entering the subroutine. This can be useful for cutting the same shape in different places.

For example:

0 # # # # O0002X1 Y2 G92 X0 Y0M98 P2 (to cut the part when X1 Y2) .X3 Y5 .

.M98 P2 (to cut the part with X3 Y5) .M2 M99

Note 4: When you use the call, you can call the subroutine with the full names of DOS.

For example: call C: \ Test \ Parts \ XYZ.PRG

Specialized M-codes

Specialized M-codes can be created for user-defined function. To install a new specialized M-code, you must first create a text program - with the number of 9020 to 9029 - which defines the new M-code. Then enter the number of new specialized section of the code in the parameter F3 (Power) (Power), after that you just created a text program. To enumerate the newly created special codes you can use three-digit number.

399


Time is a program may be stored in the directory memory (RAM), or or a catalog of programs to handle the details. The program in the directory memory (RAM) is preceded by the program in the software for processing details. When you call any custom code M or G of specialized code, it will perform its normal function. If the code is in a specialized syntax error at power up the following window appears.

Example 1: Establish a dedicated M-code parameter F3 (Power) (Power) O9025 at 014 and enter the program in C :/ RAM/O9025. Implementation of M14 is similar to calling in the C :/ RAM/O9025.

Example 2: Establish a dedicated M-code parameter F3 (Power) (Power) O9027 by 3 and enter the following G-program C :/ RAM/O9027.

Set 25 (to turn on the vacuum)G4 F1 (Pause for 1 second)M3 (Includes a spindle, like a normal M3)

The error in the program, or 09,020 in a program of specialized M-code not found. To continue, press any key ...

400

SECTION 6 - PARAMETRIC PROGRAMMING

Parametric programming is similar to the macro programming is that to specify the position of the axis of the equation can be used instead of decimal numbers. Centurion CNC does not limit the application of parametrics subroutines or macros. They can be used in the program anywhere. Parametric expressions can be used to refer to the functions M, G, F and S. When the parametric expression is used to position the axis, will first find its value, then the correction is applied to the cutting tool. All the usual rules for the correction of the cutting tool will be applied to a calculated point. When using parametric expressions used in the program options - a 100 user-defined parameters, as described above on page 95, Section 2. The values obtained from the equations will be displayed on the user settings screen. Other listed system parameters can be used as input for parametric equations, but in normal circumstances, these options should not be changed.

Parametric link

Parametric link indicated by the letter "P", followed by a valid parameter number. When a parameter reference is used to position coordinates, it must be enclosed in parentheses.

For example: X [P10]Y [-P145]Z [P2]

Parametric team assignment

Assignment - this is the main command in the application parameters. Symbol assignment - is an equal sign (=).

Assignment operators replace the current value of the new value.

For example: P1 = 1.234

In this example, the value of 1.234 assigned to the parameter 1. Therefore, each of the following commands performs the movement in the same position coordinates.

X1.234, or X [P1]

Note: If the assignment exceeds the number of parameters 699, it is necessary that the control device was in the mode of transmission (G10). See the list of numbers of parameters and their descriptions in the Appendix.

PB (byte option)

Byte parameters typically contain values that represent the configuration of the machine. For example, the parameter range of spindle PB50 is set to 1 for the low range, 2 - and 3 for medium - to high. Byte parameters can not exceed 255.

For example: PB50 = 2

401

Note: Byte parameters are not recorded in the test mode. See the list of numbers of parameters and their descriptions in the Appendix.

Arithmetic Operators

Below is a list of the available arithmetic operators.

Operator Operation

+ addition - subtraction * multiplication ** exponent / division DIV integer division MOD balance

Note: The value of A DIV B - a mathematical quotient A / B with a lowered fractional part or residue.

Examples: 3/2 = 1.5 3 DIV 2 = 124/5 = 4.8 24 DIV 5 = 472/8 = 9.0 72 DIV 8 = 9

5.46/2.1 = 2.6 5.46 DIV 2.1 = 2

MOD returns the remainder obtained by dividing two numbers.

3 MOD 2 = 1 remainder = 1 24 MOD 5 = 4 = 4 remainder 72 MOD 8 = 0 remainder = 03.57 MOD 2.1 = 1.47 Fract (3.57 ÷ 2.1 = .7)

(.7 x 2.1 = 1.47)

Relational Operators

Below is a list of the available relational operators.

Operator Operation

EQ or = equally NE or <> not equal LT or < less than GT or>more than LE or <= less than or equalGE or> = greater than or equal

402


The operators of functions

Calling a function is denoted by the name of the function (eg, SIN, ATAN, ...), followed by the argument in parentheses. When the function is used to position coordinates, it must be enclosed in parentheses.

Examples: X [SIN [45]]Y [ATAN [half]]Z [SQRT [9]]

The function returns a value and can be used interchangeably wherever decimal values are accepted.

The following functions.

Sine (SIN) returns the sine of the argumentSIN [90] = 1

Cosine (COS) returns the cosine of the argument.

COS [180] = -1

Tangent (TAN) returns the tangent of the argument.TAN [135] = -1

Arctangent (ATAN) returns the arc tangent of the argument. The argument must be specified in the form of fractions (eg, ½, 2/1 -5 / 6, ...).

ATAN [1/-1] = 135

The square root (SQRT) returns the square root of the argument. SQRT [9] = 3

The absolute value (ABS) returns the absolute value of the argument. ABS [-15] = 15

An integer (INT) returns an integer argument. INT [5.5099] = 5

A random number (RND) returns an integer random number between 0 and its argument. RND [25] returns an integer> = 0 and <= 24

The natural logarithm (LN) function returns the natural logarithm of the argument. LN [10] = 2.3026

Exponential (EXP) returns the exponential argument.EXP [1] = 2.7183

403


Rounding (ROUND) rounds the decimal value to an integer. Half-integer values are rounded.

ROUND [2.3] = 2ROUND [7.88] = 8ROUND [1.5] = 2ROUND [-1.5] = -2

Half-integer values (exactly half) are rounded to the nearest even number. ROUND [2.5] = 2ROUND [3.5] = 4

Mathematical expressions

Any combination of the previously described expression is an arithmetic function.

Examples: X [SIN [P123] * COS [P124]]Y [2.5 + [P2/P3] * SQRT [P4]]Z [[P2DIV3] + [P2MOD3]]

Conditionals

Centurion CNC supports two types of conditional statements. These operators are used to transfer program control from one point to another based on some condition, developed in the program. These statements - IF-THEN and WHILE-WEND.

IF-THEN

The operator IF-THEN - it's method of conditional execution block if the results of the expression evaluated as true. The expression must contain one of the relational operators, which can reduce the expression to true or false. If the expression is true, the THEN part of the operator IF. If the expression is false, the next line after the operator of IF-THEN.

An example of the general form:

[Any] (operator) [any]If [mathematical] (Relationship) [mathematical] That any action

[expression] [expression]

N20 IF P1 LT P2 THEN GOTO 15N21

or

N22 IF P1 <P2 GOTO 15N21

404


Two of the above statements do the same thing. If the assertion is true, the N15; if false - runs N21.

Examples: IF P1 * P3/COS [P90] GE TAN [P6] THEN X1

IF P4/P3 LT P6 GOTO 25

IF P1 = P2 THEN P4 = P5 - P6

Multiple IF statements can be used to test multiple conditions.

Examples: IF P36 <5 THEN IF P1 <> 0 THEN M5Defined, this means that if less than 5 P36, and P1 is 0, the spindle is turned off.

Note: Word THEN optional in all cases.

WHILE-WEND

The second type of conditional statements is WHILE-WEND. WHILE statement contains an expression that controls the repeated execution of blocks that are between the operators WHILE and WEND.

The expression that controls the repetition, must contain a set of relational operators, which reduces the expression to true or false. The expression is evaluated before the containing block. Contained units to re-run if the expression is true. If the expression is false in the beginning, the blocks are not executed.

For example: N20 WHILE [[P2 * P3] /COS[P6]] LT P2N21 P6 = P6 + 1N22 Y [P2] Z [P3]N23 X [P6]N24 X1 Y0 Z0N25 WENDN26 M30

In this example, the line of N25 with N20 will be repeated for as long as the WHILE expression is false. The string is then N26 will be executed instead of the N21.

Note: Admitted nested loops WHILE.

Operators of transfer

Operators of transmission transfer control from one program section to another. This is an unconditional transfer, as expressed in the fact that when the statement is executed, control is always passed. Operators GOSUB / RETURN and CALL return control to the block N +1 after its completion, and the GOTO statement transfers control to the specified block of no return.

405


GOTO statements

The operator N # # # defines the label. Operators GOTO / GOSUB can extend or transfer control to the blocks containing these tags. GOTO statement transfers the program into a block with a prefix of label block, said in the statement GOTO.

GOTO 30 (The next executed block - it is N30.)

Note: If there is more than one program N30, the transfer will happen in the first N30.

CALL statement

CALL statement transfers control to the program stored in the memory of the CNC. Upon completion of the program caused or M2, M99 or M30, control is returned to the main program in the block immediately following the statement CALL.

CALL format is as follows.

CALL XXXX LXXXNumber The loop counter

program (optional)

If L is omitted, the called program will run once. The operator calls the same as the M98.

Note: You do not need to subroutine calls in a separate program. You can call O # # # # in the same file. This eliminates the need for setting lessons programs.

For example: X1 Y1..Call 2 (call O0002)..M2 (M2 is optional)O0002 (O # # # # in the same file is preceded by a separate file, O # # # #.)X2 Y2..M99 (M99 is optional)

Notes on the operator to call

Note 1: Call subroutine allows attachments up to 50 levels.Note 2: See more details about using the G92 in the routines page 369, Section 2. Note 3: Allowed to call programs with the full names of DOS.

For example: CALL S :/ XYZ / PRG.X

406


GOSUB and RETURN

GOSUB transfers the program into a block whose number is specified in the statement GOSUB. Implementation will continue through until it encounters a block that contains the operator RETURN. RETURN returns control back to the block immediately following the statement GOSUB. To use the operator GOSUB, caused by a number of blocks to be part of the same program. Typically, the routines are at the end of the main program.

The format follows GOSUB.

GOSUB XXXX LXXXThe line number The loop counter

(optional)

If the missing L, GOSUB program will be executed once.

N1N2N3N4 GOSUB 100 The main program N5 . . .N90 M30N100N101 .

. Subroutine .N200N201 RETURNN202

When GOSUB is executed in the N4, the program will move to the N100 and begin execution until you reach the N201. In the N201 control will be transferred to N5, and will be performed with a string of N5 N90. M30 stops executing the main program and starts re-execution of lines 100 through 202. Note: permitted up to 50 levels of investment routines.

407


Computational functions

A. The tangent arc TANA2. The tangent line TANL3. Creating a 3-point circle CGEN

The three above-mentioned functions can be used anywhere in a program for solving various problems of the intersection. These features are input into the parameters of P90 to P96, and return a response with the parameters P80 to P85. The answer can then be used in the commands for the line and the circle to get the desired results. The following is the format for these three functions.

The general format for TANA, TANL

The input parameters

P90 = X1 center of the arc aP91 = Y1 center of the arc aP92 = R1 radius of the arc of aP93 = X2 center of the arc twoP94 = Y2 center of the arc twoP95 = R2 arc radius 2P96 = R3 radius of the arc tangent (used only in TANA)

The calculated output parameters

P80 = Xs X starting point of tangent arcs or lines P81 = Ys Y starting point of tangent arcs or linesP82 = Xe X endpoint tangent arcs or linesP83 = Ye Y endpoint tangent arcs or linesP84 = Xt X center of the arc tangent (only in case of TANA)P85 = Yt Y center of the arc tangent (only in case of TANA)

The general form for the function of the tangent of the arc or line following.

TANA C # or TANL C #

# - A number from 0 to 7 in the case of tangent arcs, and from 0 to 3 in the case of the tangent line. Through this number is chosen one of eight possible solutions, or TANA is one of the four solutions TANL. Values of C # are defined as the point of tangency, located on the right or left of the line and connects the centers of arcs and arcs connecting the center, when viewed in the direction of the tool. See examples of decisions regarding the following diagrams.

408


Cases of TANA 1st 2nd Center

C0 = right On the right LeftC1 = Left On the right LeftC2 = Right Left LeftC3 = Left Left LeftC4 = Left Left On the rightC5 = right Left On the rightC6 = Left On the right On the rightC7 = right On the right On the right

Cases TANL

1st 2nd

C0 = On the right On the rightC1 = Left On the rightC2 = On the right LeftC3 = Left Left

409


Example programs using TANA and TANL

N1 P90 = 0 XC arc aN2 P91 = 0 YC arc of aN3 P92 = 1.5 radius of the arc of aN4 P93 = 5 XC arc twoN5 P94 = 4 YC arc twoN6 P95 = 2 arc radius 2N7 P96 = 5 radius of the arc tangent

(is not used for the tangent line) N8 TANA C3 or TANL C3N9 G2 R1.5 XC0 YC0 X [P80] Y [P81]

The calculated end-point, or TANA TANL

N10 G3 R5 XC [P84] YC [P85] X [P82] Y [P83]

(Calculated center and endpoints TANA)

or

N10 G1 X [P82] Y [P83]

(Calculated endpoint TANL)

N11 G2 R2 XC5 YC4 X Yend end

410


With the function to create the circle center and radius are calculated arc passing through any three noncollinear points. The general format for the following functions CGen.

The input parameters

P90 = X1 P91 = Y1 coordinates of the first point P92 = X2 P93 = Y2 coordinates of the second pointP94 = X3 P95 = Y3 coordinates of the third point

Output parameters

P80 = XC P81 = YC the calculated center of the circleP82 = R calculated radius of the circle

Example programs using CGen

N1 P90 = 0 P91 = 0 first pointN2 P92 = 1 P93 = 1 second pointN3 P94 = 2 P95 = 0 the third pointN4 CGENN5 G1 X0 Y0 starting position of the arc N6 G17 G2 R [P82] XC [P80] YC [P81] Xe____Ye____

CGEN function can be used anywhere in a program to calculate the radius and the center of the arc. These calculations can be used in normal commands arc with the help of trigonometric, chamfering, rounding corners, back extension, and any other available options.

Note: The direction of the arc back to the P97, so the unit can be replaced by N6 G17 G [P97] R [P82] XC [P81] YC [P80] Xe___ Ye___

Time team

Centurion CNC team has the letter, which can be used to engrave serial numbers or other designations. Text cycles must be loaded by setting "Load text cycles" (Download text of cycles). After setting the parameter control unit must be reset. Bijective letter size - 1 "x 1", the printed text. All these letters can be scaled or rotated to achieve the desired size and orientation. Depth of cut is contained in the P141, the speed infeed Z - in P145, a zone of safe return - in the P140. A typical program would look like.

411


N1 P140 = .1 0.1 GapN2 P141 = - .2 Depth of cut 0.2 inchesN3 P145 = 5 Infeed speed 5 inch / minN4 G1 F10 Feed rate XY 10 inch / minN5 S1000 M3 The rotation of the spindle clockwiseN6 X-4 Y.5 The position of the first letter N7 Text [MILLTRONICS MFG] Desired TextN8 M30 End of program

With this program you will be the inscription "MILLTRONICS MFG" at a depth of -0.2 "to 1" in block letters 1 "from the provisions of the X-4 Y.5.

Text loop can also be used for engraving parameters, time and date.

For example: P28 = -6.77777TEXT [N = # 28 [34]]

With this will be engraved with "N = -006.7778" (3 senior level, four junior). If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format from the settings of the machine.

The serial numbers of items can be engraved as follows: TEXT [# 23 [30]] Etch the value of P23, 3 places to the left, right 0)P23 = P23 +1 (incremental counter parts)

If the senior and junior level equal to 0, will engrave ascii code parameter.

For example:P1 = 35 (Ascii for '#')P2 = 123TEXT [PART # 100] # 2 [30]]

With this will engrave "PART # 123". (Item number 123)

If the senior and junior level = -1, engraved time (parameter # is ignored.)

For example: TEXT [TIME IS # 1 [-1]] will be engraved "TIME IS 016:46:51". (Time of 016:46:51)

If the senior and junior level = -2, engraved date (option # is ignored.)

For example: TEXT [DATE IS # 1 [-2]] will be engraved "DATE IS 02/11/08" (date 11/02/08)

412


Additional commands

Gaps Gaps can be used anywhere in the program. For example, Z1.234 can be written as Z 1. April 23, if you want.

Blocks Blocks without valid information.

Comments Go to comments is any text enclosed in brackets, they are ignored by the control device. Comments can be anywhere in the program or unit. When a comment is in a block with M0 (stopping power), M1 (optional stop) or M6 (tool change), the comment will be displayed in the message window.

For example: M0 (MOVE THE CLAMP) (traverse)

For example: M6 (3/8 "DRILL) (drill 3/8")

PRINT Print to print the text on the screen. PRINT can (Seal) used to display text, values, time, date, etc.

For example: P87 = 32.45PRINT [N = # 87] shows "N = 32.4500"

413

WARNING: Detected stop the program. MOVE CLIP. Click on <Cycle Start> (Run cycles) to continue.

WARNING: Changing the tool. Insert the tool number 2 - DRILL 3/8 ". Click on <Cycle Start> (Run cycles) to continue.


# N [LT] #n [LT] displays the parameter n with leading digits L and LSB T.

For example: P100 = 1.235 P101 = 2.87656PRINT [P100 = # 100 [04] P101 = # 101 [33]] shows"P100 = 1.2350 P101 = 002.877"

If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format of the senior and junior categories of the settings of the machine.

If LT = 0 apply the exception.

If LT = 0, shows the ASCII code of the parameter.

For example: P1 = 72 (ASCII H)P2 = 105 (ASCII i)PRINT [# 1 [00] # 2 [00]] shows "Hi"

If LT = -1, the parameter is ignored. Time is shown in the format 0chch: mm: ss.

If LT = -2, the parameter is ignored. Date shown in the format year / month / day.

For example: PRINT [Time = # 1 [-1] Date = # 1 [-2]] shows "Time = 012:51:52 Date = 97/10/23" (time = 012:51:52, Date = 97/10 / 23)

POPEN Through team POPEN opens the file, or RS-232 output from the command DPRNT.

POPEN P0 Through team POPEN P0 opens the file for output. The file to be opened by the parameters specified in the MISC (more). If the file name in this parameter is omitted, the output will be recorded in REPORT.DAT.

POPEN P1 Through team POPEN P1 opens the serial port of an input-output to output.

POPEN P2 POPEN P2 opens the serial port input-output 2 to output.

PCLOS PCLOS closes the serial port input-output, which was opened by POPEN.

414


DPRNT DPRNT displays the text in a file or an RS-232, which specifies the command POPEN.

For example: DPRNT [PLEASE CLEAR THE WORK AREA] (Please clean the work area)

# N writes the value

For example: DPRNT [X # 208 Y # 209 Z # 210] displays the current position X, Y and Z in a file or an RS-232.

# N [LT] displays the parameter n with leading digits L and LSB T.

For example: P100 = 1.235 P101 = 2.87656DPRNT [P100 = # 100 [04] P101 = # 101 [33]] conclusions "P100 = 1.2350 P101 = 002.877"

If the field of senior and junior categories are not filled, the default format of the senior and junior categories of the settings of the machine.

If LT = 00, shows the ASCII code of the parameter.

For example: P1 = 40 (ASCII ()P2 = 72 (ASCII H)P3 = 105 (ASCII i)P4 = 41 (ASCII))PRINT [# 1 [00] # 2 [00] # 3 [00] # 4 [00]] displays (Hi)

If LT = -1, the parameter is ignored. Time is shown in the format 0chch: mm: ss.

If LT = -2, the parameter is ignored. Date shown in the format year / month / day.

For example: DPRNT [Time = # 1 [-1] Date = # 1 [-2]] shows "Time = 012:51:52 Date = 97/10/23" (time = 012:51:52, Date = 97/10/23)

DPRNT can be used to create the report files relating to the production of parts, check parts of the digitization of information, etc.

415


INPUT The operator INPUT (input operator) is used to enter data(ENTER) the front panel.

For example: INPUT (X START POSITION) P1

The operator will be given a hint about the data to be entered.

The operator can use the data that is displayed when you press ENTER (Enter). If ESC is pressed in the operator input, the program will be terminated.

Team HDW (flywheel) can be used to enter the flywheel during program execution. Maybe add a comment for a clue to the operator during the execution of commands HDW (flywheel). HDW is ignored when testing the program.

For example: HDW (TOUCH THE TOOL TO THE PART) gives the following message to the operator.

The operator presses the key <enter> after bringing the machine in the mode of the flywheel. If you click on <esc> flywheel mode, the program will be terminated.

For manual installation and cleaning / O pins, see the following.

CLR Remove the output pin.

For example: CLR X7 (pin eliminates the output X № 7)

SET Set the output pin.

For example: SET Z3 (sets the output pin Z № 3)

The initial position of the X

The display mode of the flywheel. To complete click on <Escape>. Touch TOOL.

416


PULSE0 Sends a pulse to the output pin.

Example 1: PULSE0 Z10 (removal of the output pin Z № 10, a delay by the number of milliseconds specified in the optional parameter PULSEx pulse delay (ms), then setting the output pin Z10)

Example 2: PULSE0 X2 P3.5 (removal of the output pin X № 2, a delay of 3.5 seconds, and then setting the output pin X 2)

PULSE1 Sends a pulse to the output pin

For example: PULSE1 X5 (setting the output pin X № 5, ut # 5, a delay by the number of milliseconds specified in the optional parameter PULSEx delay (ms), then setting the output pin X5)

STO STO is similar to the command SET, except that the output pins are adjacent to each other. On each axis there are 12 output pins.

For example: STO20 (setting the output pin Y № 8 or 20-th output pin)

CLO CLO is similar to the command CLR, except that the output pins are adjacent to each other.

For example: CLO25 (removal of the output pin Z № 1 or 25-second output pin)

PIN PIN refers to the pin. The axis X - is the 1000 values of the axis Y - 2000 values of the axis Z - values of 3000, etc.

Pin The X-axis The Y-axis The Z-axis 4th axis 5th axis 6-I axis an input 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000Input 2 1001 2001 3001 4001 5001 6001Input 3 1002 2002 3002 4002 5002 6002Input 4 1003 2003 3003 4003 5003 6003Input 5 1004 2004 3004 4004 5004Input 6 1005 2005 3005 4005 5005Input 7 1006 2006 3006 4006 5006Input 8 1007 2007 3007 4007 5007Input 9 1008 2008 3008 4008 5008Input 10 1009 2009 3009 4009 5009Input 11 1010 2010 3010 4010 5010Input 12 1011 2011 3011 4011 5011Output 1 1012 2012 3012 4012 5012 6012Output 2 1013 2013 3013 4013 5013 6013

off 3 1014 2014 3014 4014 5014 6014

417


Output 4 1015 2015 3015 4015 5015 6015Output 5 1016 2016 3016 4016 5016Output 6 1017 2017 3017 4017 5017Output 7 1018 2018 3018 4018 5018Output 8 1019 2019 3019 4019 5019

off 9 1020 2020 3020 4020 5020off 10 1021 2021 3021 4021 5021off 11 1022 2022 3022 4022 5022off 12 1023 2023 3023 4023 5023

Note: Operators PIN can be used in conditional statements such as IF-THEN and WHILE-WEND.

Examples: IF PIN [2017] EQ 1 THEN PB50 = 1WHILE PIN [1005] NE 0M62M63WENDP5 = P3 + PIN [2011]

IPIN

IPIN applies the input pin. The argument - is the number of input pins. IPIN [32] - 32-th input pin. Only 64 input pins. IPIN [32] - is the input pin Z № 8. IPIN [18] - the same as the PIN [2005], or input pin Y № 6. IPIN operators can be used in conditional statements, or to assign variables.

OPIN

OPIN refers to the output pin. The argument - is the number of output pins. OPIN [14] - is the 14 th output pin. Total of 64 output pins. OPIN [40] - is the output pin number 4 of the 4th axis. OPIN [4] - the same as the pin [1003], or output pin 4 axis X. OPIN operators can be used in conditional statements, or to assign variables.

Teams check details and digitizing

PROBE1 PROBE1 can be used with any movement of the axis for a team of stick-slip. The movement will be interrupted when the input pin down.

For example: PROBE1 F.01 X1.3 Y-2 Move X and Y in the direction of 1.3 and 2, respectively, for as long as the probe touches the part.

PROBE2 PROBE2 can be used with any movement of the axis for a team of stick-slip. The movement will be interrupted when the input pin is increased.

For example: PROBE2 F.01 X1.3 Y-2Move X and Y in the direction of 1.3 and 2, respectively, for as long as the sensor will not release the item.

418


Note: The input pin is used by teams of detector is selected in the advanced options.

Contact Line

The function return line can be used in any command line. This function changes the direction of the programmed line. Return line is typically used when the endpoint is known for the line, and not starting. The endpoint is programmed, and the line is extended in the opposite direction to the starting point. When using this function, all functions of Trig Help (trigonometric assistance) act.

Example 1:

X6 Y2X5X4 Y1.5G2 R1 XC3 YC1.5 AB270G1 X1 Y2 back C0 W145X0

Back - in the opposite direction of elongation of the (1,2)C0 - use the intersection of the arc that is closest to (1,2)W145 - elongation of the line from (1,2) at an angle of 145 °

Example 2:

X6 YZX5X4 Y1.5G2 R1XC3YC1.5 AB270G1 X1 YZ BACK C2 W145X0

C2 - Use the farthest intersection

Example 3:

X6 Y2X5X4 Y1.5X1 Y2 BACK C0 W-35X0

Note: In this example, the return line between the two lines for programming an unknown point. See more details about the return line in the section on page 4 284.

419


MOD (modulo operation)

MOD is used to shift the position axis. It is typically used to set the rotation axis in a positive position between 0 and 360 degrees. It can be useful after the rotary axis makes a few turns in one direction.

Examples:G0 A750

MOD A360 (A-axis position is now 30 °)

G0 A-100MOD A360 (A-axis position is now 240 °)

G0 A-500MOD A360 (A-axis position is now 220 °)

G0 A437MOD A20 (A-axis position is 17 °)

G0 A33.285MOD A2.1 (A-axis position are 1.785 °)

33,285 / 2.1 = 15.8515.85, the remainder - 0.850.85 * 2.1 = 1,785

Note: With a team of MOD can also shift the programmed limits. This is desirable for most rotary axes, but not desirable for a linear axis.

ORIGIN (start address)

Start address - this is another way to shift the axis of coordinates. It shifts the coordinates of the axis of the volume operator.

Examples:G0 A437ORIGIN A20 (A-axis position is now 417)

G0 A33.285ORIGIN A2.1 (A-axis position is now 31.185)

G0 A361ORIGIN A360 (A-axis position are 1)

G0 A-500ORIGIN A360 (A-axis position is now -860)

Note: The team also shifts the start address programmed limits.

420


HOME (starting position)

To bring the axis to its original position in the program should use the HOME.

For example: Home Z0 (Z-axis leads to the starting position, the number of "0 " does not mean anything)

Home X0Y0 (leads to the initial position of the X and Y)

Below is shown the parametric program for cutting the five 45 °-GOVERNMENTAL segments of the fan blades.

P2 = 0N2P1 = .5P140 = .1G31N1G0 X [P1] Y0G1 Z0G3 R [P1] AA0 AB45 Z [[.5-P1] / 5]G31P1 = P1 + .1IF P1 LE 2 GOTO 1P2 = P2 +72G68 AA [P2] I0 J0IF P2 LT 360 GOTO 2

421


In the above example, the tool performs 16 passes for each blade, starting at X.5 step up to the X2 0,1 ". Z is equal to 0 on the entire front edge of the blade and drops to 0 for the first pass and to -0.3" at the last pass . Each shift of the axis of the blade is 45 °. The cycle of N1-GOTO 1 - for each fan blade. The cycle of N2-GOTO 2 rotates each blade to the additional 72 °. P1 controls the displacement of the axis of the blade radius and depth Z. P2 controls the angle of rotation.

Example programs using some special operators

(Outdoor sampling program. Prospective Center - 0.0.)INPUT (diameter) P1INPUT (depth Z) P2INPUT (angle increment) P3TI M6 (sensor)H43 H1 D1G0 X [P1 / 2 + .5] Y0 (Moving to a diameter of 0.5)Z [P2] (at a depth Z)PB81 = 7 (Set special flags byte settings to disable the trigonometric

assistance and correction of the cutting tool)POPEN P0 (Open a file for output. Set the log file in the c :/ parts/O0100.)DPRNT [(Extract the file to the diameter number 1 @ Z # 2)]DPRNT [S1500 M3]DPRNT [X # 208 Y # 209]DPRNT [Z # 210]

P4 = 0 (degrees counter)N1G1 F20 PROBE1 X0 Y0 (Move to the center, until a touch sensor)DPRNT [X # 208 Y # 209] (Record current sizes of X and Y in the file)

PROBE 2 XC0 YC0 R [P1 / 2 + .5] AB [P4] (removal of parts, while the sensor will not be released)

P4 = P4 + P3 (Degrees increments)XC0 YC0 R [SQRT [P208 * P208 + P209 * P209]] AB [P4] (Dismissal)PROBE 2 XC0 YC0 R [P1 / 2 + .5] AB [P4] (remove the case if there is a

touch.)IF P4 <= 360 GOTO 1 (Perform 360 °)G0 Z1 (Z up)

DPRNT [Z1]DPRNT [M5]

A sample output of the parametric program (Extract the file to the diameter of 4.0000 @ Z-1.0000)S1500 M3X2.5000Y0.0000Z-1.0000

422


X1.0500Y0.0000X1.0360Y0.0906X1.1030Y0.1945X1.1301Y0.3028X1.0525Y0.3831X0.9516Y0.4437...X1.0149Y-0.3694X1.0301Y-0.3028X1.0242Y-0.1806X1.0560Y-0.0924X1.13000Y-0.0000Z1M5

423

SECTION 7 - EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS

The following example demonstrates the various problems associated with programming, and possible solutions to these problems by using CNC Centurion. The program, driven for each sample parts, in any case is not the only solution for this part.

A description of each part of the sample begins with the drawing, and then given standard codes EIA (G-and M-codes), followed by a explanation of the EIA program and, in conclusion, - interactive program for sample details. In the drawings, parts for the milling of the samples will be included starting and ending points of pre-programmed movements, the direction of the tool and the tool path, indicated by dotted lines running parallel to the edge of the details. The drawings also indicate where the float is set to zero for each detail. Feed and speed end mills are designed to mill 3/8 "for aluminum. Other instruments will be displayed. Before you cut any of the details of these samples, the operator must install a floating zero and tool offset.

When you enter the loop geometry milling interactive program last selected option at the bottom line and arc screens are the ultimate option. The final option allows the programmer to select the rounded corner or chamfer at this point the program. If you make a choice is required, the final option would be to miss.

Sample 1

425

Start / End

Sample programs one EIA

N1 G0 G17 G20 G32 G40 G50 G69 G80 G90N2 T1 M6N3 X-1 Y-1 S3000 M03N4 G43 H1 Z.1 M08N5 G01 Z-.375 F5N6 G41 D1 X0 F25N7 Y3.5N8 X1.5 N9 G3 R1 AA180 AB-45N10 G1 R.S AB45N11 G2 R1 XC5.9142 YC4.0858 AB0N12 G1 Y0N13 X-1 N14 G40 Y-1N15 G0 Z.1 M9N16 M5

Explanation of the EIA program, a

N1 The choice of accelerated movement, the plane XY, inch of change and movement in the Z position of the tool change, cancellation of the correction on the cutting tool, scaling, rotation, and the group of cycles, the choice of absolute measurements. (All programs default to G17, G40, G50, G69, G80 and G90. G20 is modal).

N2 Change the tool number 1

N3 Positioning in the X-1 Y-1 and the inclusion of the spindle (3000 rev / min)

N4 Calling correction "H" number one tool, the positioning of Z in the 0.1 and the inclusion of coolant

N5 Submission of Z-0.375 at 5 inches / minute

N6 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the left, call the correction "D" tool number 1 and submission to the X0 Y-1 at 25 inches / minuteNote: Correction to the cutting tool will increase during this movement.

N7 Moving the line X0 Y3.5

N8 Moving the line to X1.5 Y3.5

N9 The radius of an "arc counter-clockwise, starting at 180 °, ending with -45 °

426


N10 Move the line with the estimated endpoint, described using polar coordinates, an angle of 45 ° radius of 0.5

N11 The absolute center of the radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction XC5.9142 YC4.0858 and posterior angle of 0 °

N12 Move the line in Y0

N13 Move the line in the X-1 Y0

N14 Turn off correction in the cutting tool while moving the X-1 Y-1

N15 Rapid traverse Z in 0.1 and off coolant

N16 Turn off the spindle

An example of an interactive program


The name of the program [SAMPLE 1]

Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 11 Change of tool

Tool [Turn] The position tool changer X [] Y []

Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool []

427


Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 11 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle

The feed rate puncture Z [5 ] Return point [Gap] Gap [.1 ] The final depth of Z [- .375 ] 1st depth Z [- .375 ] The increment of Z [1 ] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [Automatic, left]

Options [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 3 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line


The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [3.5 ] The Z-axis Z [ ]

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line


The X-axis X [1.5] The Y-axis Y [ ] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

428


Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 5 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The polar] The radius of the arc R [1] The initial angle AA [180]

End point [The polar] The final angle AB [-45] Z []


The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Polar] Plane [XY] Type [current]

Length R [.5] The final angle AB [45] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- -

429


Event 7 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [5.9142] YC [4.0858]

End point [The polar] The final angle AB [0] Z []



The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [0] The Z-axis Z [ ]

End [---]



The X-axis X [0] The Y-axis Y [ ] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]


430


Event 10 of 11 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling

The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic]

-------------------------------------------------- - Event 11 of 11 End of program

Turn off the spindle [Yes] Disconnect coolant [Yes] Z in the tool change [No]

The position of X (with respect to the reference point) [ ] The position of Y (with respect to the reference point) [ ]-------------------------------------------------- -

Sample 2A

431

Start / End

The central point is necessary to calculate


The sample program EIA 2A

N1 T1 M6N2 G0 X-1 Y1 S3000 M3N3 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N4 G1 Z-.375 F5N5 G42 D1 X0 F25N6 Y-1.5N7 G3 XC1 YC-1.5 AB-45 R1N8 G2XC2.7071 YC-3.2071 AB-45 R1.4142N9 G3 XC4.4142 YC-1.5 AB0 R1N10 G1 Y0N11 X-1N12 G40 Y1N13 G0 Z.1 M9N14 M05

Explanation of the EIA 2A program


N2 Fast positioning in the X-1 is Y1; inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min)



N5 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, call the correction "D" tool number 1 and moving in X0 at 25 inches / minuteNote: Correction to the cutting tool will increase during this movement.

N6 Moving the line X0 Y-1.5

N7 The radius of a "counter-clockwise arc with XC1 YC-1.5 and the estimated posterior angle of -45 °

N8 The radius of 1.4142 arc in a clockwise direction with XC2.7071 YC-3.197 and the estimated posterior angle of 45 °Note: The central point must be calculated before the programming.

N9 The radius of a "counter-clockwise arc with CX4.4142 YC-1.5 and the rear angle 0 °

N10 Moving the line X5.4142 Y0

432



N12 Turn off correction in the cutting tool, the movement in the X-1 Y1



An example of an interactive program 2A


The name of the program [SAMPLE 2]



Tool [Turn] The position tool changer X [] Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 10 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle

The feed rate puncture Z [5 ] Return point [Gap] Gap [.1 ]

433


The final depth of Z [- .375 ] 1st depth Z [- .375 ] The increment of Z [1 ] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [Automatic, right]



The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [-1.5] The Z-axis Z [ ]

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [1] YC [-1.5]

End point [The polar] The final angle AB [-45] Z []


434


Event 5 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [1.4142] YC [-3.197] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [-45] Z []

The final option is [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 6 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4.4142] YC [-1.5] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [0] Z []


The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [0] The Z-axis Z [ ]

End [---]


435





End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 9 of 10

Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling

The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Automatic]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 10 of 10 End of program


The position of X (with respect to the reference point) [ ] The position of Y (with respect to the reference point) [ ]

436


Sample 2B

The same detail as in sample 2A, but programmed by using the tangent arc.

The sample program EIA 2B

N1 T1 M6N2 G0 X-1 Y1 S3000 M3N3 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N4 G1 Z-.375 F5N5 G42 D1 X0 F25N6 Y-1.5N7 P90 = 1N8 P91 = -1.5N9 P92 = 1N10 P93 = 4.4142N11 P94 = -1.5N12 P95 = 1N13 P96 = 1.4142N14 TANA C7N15 G3 XC1 YC-1.5 AB-45 R1N16 G2 XC [P84] YC [P85] R [P96] X [P82] Y [P83]N17 G3 R1 XC4.4142 YC-1.5 AB0N18 G1 Y0N19 X-1N20 G40 Y1N21 G0 Z.1 M9N22 M5

437

Start / End

CENTRAL POINT, calculated using the tangent arc


Explanation of the EIA program, 2B


N2 Fast positioning in the X-1 is Y1; inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min)



N5 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, call the correction "D" tool number 1 and moving in X0 at 25 inches / minuteNote: Correction to the cutting tool will increase during this movement.

N6 Moving the line X0 Y-1.5

N7, N8 - The central point of X, Y the first arc

N9 The radius of the first arc

N10, N11 - the central point of X, Y second arc

N12 Radius of second arc

N13 The radius of the arc tangent

N14 The function of the arc tangent

N15 The first arc with endpoint

N16 The tangent arc with the calculated center point and end point

N17 The radius of a "counter-clockwise arc with CX4.4142 YC-1.5 and the rear angle 0 °



N20 Turn off correction in the cutting tool, the movement in the X-1 Y1Note: Correction to the cutting tool will decrease during this movement.



438


An example of an interactive program 2B

0 of 9 Event Installing the software

The name of the program [EXAMPLE 2B]




Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 9 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle

The feed rate puncture Z [5 ] Return point [Gap] Gap [.1 ] The final depth of Z [- .375 ] 1st depth Z [- .375 ] The increment of Z [1 ] The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [Automatic, right]

439




The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [-1.5] The Z-axis Z [ ]

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 9 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY]

Milling of the first arc in the direction [clockwise]R1 [1 ]XC1 [1 ] YC1 [-1.5 ]

The second arc is to calculate: R2 [1 ]XC2 [4.4142] YC2 [-1.5 ]

The output of the 1st arc [right]Log in during the 2nd arc right]Connecting with [arc] From the center of [right]Radius [1.4142] The direction of the arc [Clockwise]-------------------------------------------------- -

440


Event 5 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4.4142] YC [-1.5] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [0] Z []



The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [0] The Z-axis Z [ ]

End [---]




End [---]


441


Event 8 of 9 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling




442


Sample 3A

The sample program EIA 3A

N1 T1 M6N2 G41 D1 S3000 M03N3 G65 X0 Y99N4 G0 Y0N5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N6 G1 Z-.375 F5N7 X1 F25N8 G2 XC2 YC0 AB135 R1N9 G1 AB45 R.5N10 G2 XC4 YC2 X5 Y2 R1N11 G3 XC7 YC2 X9 R2N12 G1 Y5N13 X0 N14 Y0N15 G65 X99 N16 G40N17 G0 Z.1 M9N18 M5

443

Start / End


Explanation of the program, EIA 3A


N2 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the left, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min)

N3 Installation of a "point to puncture» X0 Y99 Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position.

N4 Installing the "point of puncture» X0 Y0; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block



N7 Moving the line X1 Y0 at 25 inches / minute

N8 The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC2 YC0 and rear corner of the AB135

N9 Move the line with the calculated endpoint and described the polar angle of 45 radius of 0.5 "

N10 The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction using the XC-4 YC2 and endpoint X5 Y2

N11 The radius of 2 "arc counterclockwise with XC7 YC2 and end points of X9 Y2

N12 Moving the line X9 Y5



N15 Installation of the "points after a puncture» X99 Y0Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position.

N16 Turn off correction in the cutting tool



444




The name of the program [EXAMPLE 3A] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

Installation Notes:

[] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 12 Change of tool



The feed rate puncture Z [5 ] Return point [Gap] Gap [.1 ] The final depth of Z [- .375 ] 1st depth Z [- .375 ] The increment of Z [1 ]

The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0]

445


Correction [left] [Cartesian] X to the puncturing X [0] Y to puncture Y [99]




End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The polar] The radius of the arc R [1] The initial angle AA [180]

End point [The polar] The final angle AB [135] Z []


446



The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Polar] Plane [XY] Type [current]

Length R [.5] The final angle AB [45] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 6 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4] YC [2]

End point [Absolute]X [5]Y [2]Z []


447


Event 7 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [7] YC [2]

End point [Absolute]X [9]Y []Z []



The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [5 ] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]


The feed rate F [] Coordinates [Cartesian] The X-axis X [0] The Y-axis Y [ ] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]


448




The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [0] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 11 of 12 Removal of the instrument Complete cycle of milling

The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [99] Y [0]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 12 of 12 End of program



449


Sample 3B

450


The same detail as in the sample 3A, but programmed with the function of the tangent line.

The sample program EIA 3B

N1 T1 M6N2 G41 D1 S3000 M3N3 G65 X0 Y99N4 G0 Y0N5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N6 G1 Z-.375 F5N7 X1 F25N8 P90 = 2N9 P91 = 0N10 P92 = 1N11 P93 = 4N12 P94 = 2N13 P95 = 1N14 TANL C3 (See the explanation of the relative values TANL C.)N15 G2 XC [P90] YC [P91] R [P92] X [P80] Y [P81]N16 G1 X [P82] Y [P83]N17 G2 XC4 YC2 X5 Y2 R1N18 G3 XC7 YC2 X9 Y2 R2N19 G1 Y5N20 X0 N21 Y0N22 G65 X99 N23 G40N24 G0 Z.1 M9

451

Start / End


N25 M5Note: Lines with the N8 to N13 can be written as follows:

N9 P90 = 2 P91 = 0 P92 = 1 P93 = P94 = 4 2 P95 = 1

Explanation of the program, EIA 3B








N8, Center for the first arc N9

N10 The radius of the first arc

N11, Center of the second arc N12

N13 Radius of second arc

N14 The function of the arc tangent

N15 The first arc with endpoints calculated

N16 The line tangent to both arcs

N17 The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC7 YC2 and endpoint X5 Y2

N18 The radius of 2 "arc counterclockwise with XC7 YC2 and end points of X9 Y2


452










The name of the program [EXAMPLE 3B] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]



Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation]-------------------------------------------------- -

453


Event 2 of 11 Puncture tool - Start cutting cycle


The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [left] [Cartesian] X to the puncturing X [0] Y to puncture Y [99]




End [---]


454


Event 4 of 11 Connecting two arcs tangent line or arc in the plane [XY]

Milling of the first arc in the direction [clockwise]R1 [1 ]XC1 [2] YC1 [0]

The second arc is to calculate: R2 [2]XC2 [4 ] YC2 [2]

The output of the 1st arc [left]Log in during the 2nd arc [Left]Connecting with [line]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 5 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4] YC [2]

End point [Absolute]X [5]Y [2]Z []


455


Event 6 of 11 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [7] YC [2]

End point [Absolute]X [9]Y []Z []




End [---]




End [---]


456





End [---]





457


Sample 4A

The sample program EIA 4AN1 T1 M6N2 G41 D01 S3000 M3N3 G65 X99 Y0N4 G0 X0 N5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N6 G1 Z-.375 F5N7 Y-2 F25N8 G2 XC0 YC-3 AB-45 R1N9 G3 XC2.1213 YC-2.2929 AB-45 R2N10 G2 XC4.2426 YC-3 AB90 R1N11 G1 Y0N12 X0 N13 G65 Y-99N14 G40N15 G0 Z.1 M9N16 M5

POSITION piercing instru-Cops

458


Explanation of the program, EIA 4A








N8 The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC0 YC-3 and the estimated posterior angle of -45 °

N9 The radius of 2 "arc counterclockwise with XC2.1213 YC-2.2929 and the estimated posterior angle of -45 °

N10 The radius of an "arc in a clockwise direction with XC4.2426 YC-3 and the rear angle of 90 °




N14 Cancel correction on the cutting tool



459




The name of the program [EXAMPLE 4A]


Installation Notes: [] []

[] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 10 Change of tool


Number of tools T [1] Description of instrument [ ] Number of the next tool [] Rotational speed of spindle S [3000] The direction of spindle rotation [clockwise] Coolant [irrigation]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 2 of 10 Puncture Tool - Start cutting cycle


The point of puncture X X [0]

460


The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [left] [Cartesian] X to the puncturing X [99] Y to puncture Y [0]



The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [-2] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [0] YC [-3]

End point [The polar] Clearance AB [-45] Z []


461


Event 5 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [2.1213] YC [-2.2929]

End point [Polar] Clearance AB [-45] Z []

The final option is [---]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 6 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1] Center of arc XC [4.2326] YC [-3] End point [The polar] Clearance AB [90] Z []




End [---]


462





End [---]


The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [-99]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 10 of 10 End of program



463


Sample 4B

Programming of the arc with the formation of 3-point circle. The points X1, X2, X3 - a point used to program each axis.

The sample program EIA 4BN1 T1 M6N2 G41 D1 S3000 M03N3 G65 X99 Y0N4 X0 N5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N6 G1 Z-.375 F5N7 Y-2 F25N8 P90 = 0N9 P91 = -2N10 P92 = 1N11 P93 = -3N12 P94 = 0N13 P95 = -4N14 CGENN15 G2 XC [P80] YC [P81] R [P82] AB300N16 P90 = .1213N17 P91 = -2.2929N18 P92 = 2.1213N19 P93 = -4.2929

POSITION Puncture a tool

464


N20 P94 = 4.1213N21 P95 = -2.2929N22 CGENN23 G3 XC [P80] YC [P81] R [P82] AB300N24 P90 = 4.2426N25 P91 = -4N26 P92 = 3.2426N27 P93 = -3N28 P94 = 4.2426N29 P95 = -2N30 CGENN31 G2 XC [P80] YC [P81] R [P82] X [P94] Y [P95]N32 G1 Y0N33 X0 N34 G65 Y-99N35 G40N36 G0 Z.1 M9N37 M5

Explanation of the program, EIA 4B








N8- - The coordinates of three points on the first circle N13

N14 The calculation of the circumference on the basis of three pointsN15 Team of the arc, moving a point in the calculated

465


N16- - The coordinates of three points in the second circle N21

N22 Calculation of the second circle on the basis of three points

N23 Team of the arc, moving a point in the calculated

N24- - The coordinates of three points in the third circle N29

N30 The calculation of the third circle on the basis of three points

N31 Team of the arc, moving a point in the calculated



N34 Setting a withdrawal after the X0 Y99Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position.

N35 Cancel correction on the cutting tool





The name of the program [EXAMPLE 4B] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

Installation Notes: [] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- -

466


Event 1 of 10 Change of tool

Tool [Cut] The position tool changer X [] Y []



The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [left] [Cartesian] X to the puncturing X [99] Y to puncture Y [0]



The X-axis X [] The Y-axis Y [-2] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

467


Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 10 Generator 3-point circle Plane [XY] Direction [Clockwise] X1 [0] Y1 [-2] X2 [a] Y2 [-3] X3 [0] Y3 [-4]

Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [no] Clearance [300 ]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 5 of 10 Generator 3-point circle Plane [XY] Direction [counter-clockwise] X1 [.1213] Y1 [-2.2929] X2 [2.1213] Y2 [-4.2929] X3 [4.1213] Y3 [-2.2929]

Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [no] Clearance [300 ]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 6 of 10 Generator 3-point circle Plane [XY] Direction [Clockwise] X1 [4.2426] Y1 [-4] X2 [3.2426] Y2 [-3] X3 [4.2426] Y3 [-2]

Use the X3, Y3, as the end point [Yes]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 7 of 10 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line



End [---]

468





End [---]


The direction of the workpiece after the removal tool [Cartesian] X [0] Y [-99]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 10 of 10 End of program



469


Sample 5

The sample program EIA 5N1 T1 M6N2 G42 D1 S3000 M03N3 G65 X99 Y0N4 G0 X0 N5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N6 G1 Z-.375 F5N7 Y2 F25N8 G2 XC2 YC2 AB45 R2, R.0001N9 X5 YC2 AB0 R2N10 G1 Y0N11 X0 N12 G65 Y99N13 G40N14 G0 Z.1 M9N15 M5

Explanation of the EIA program 5


N2 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min)


HOME /END

470






N8 The radius of 2 "arc in a clockwise direction with XC2 YC2, the estimated posterior angle of 45 ° and the final option (rounded corner) radius of 0.0001"Note: The final option is the radius of 0.0001 leads to the intersection between the lines.

N9 The radius of 2 "arc in a clockwise direction with XC4.8284 YC2 and rear angle of 0 degrees



N12 Setting a withdrawal after the X0 Y99Note: The machine does not perform the movement in this position.




An example of an interactive program 5

0 of 9 Event Installing the software

The name of the program [EXAMPLE 5] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

471






The point of puncture X X [0] The point of puncture Y Y [0] Correction [right] [Cartesian] X to the puncturing X [99] Y to puncture Y [0]

Options [---]-------------------------------------------------- -

472





End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 4 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [2] YC [2] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [45] Z []

The final option is [Rounded corner] Radius [.0001 ]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 5 of 9 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [Clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [2] Center of arc XC [4.8284] YC [2] End point [The polar] The final angle AB [0] Z []


473





End [---]




End [---]





474


Sample 6

The sample program EIA 6N1 T1 M6N2 G42 D1 S3000 M3N3 G65 X0 Y0N4 X.5 Y1.5N5 G43 H1 Z.1 M8N6 G1 Z-.375 F5N7 X1 Y3 F25 N8 X0N9 G3 XC-1.2689 YC2.2 X-3 R1.5N10 G1 X-4N11 X-6.1 Y.5N12 Y0N13 X0 N14 X.5 Y1.5N15 G65 X1 Y3N16 G40N17 G0 Z.1 N18 M30

Explanation of the EIA program, 6


N2 The choice of the correction on the cutting tool on the right, the activation of correction "D" tool number 1 and the inclusion of rotation of the spindle in a clockwise direction (3000 rev / min)

475

Puncture POSITION TOOL



N4 Installing the "point of puncture» X.5 Y1.5; movement in his adjusted point, as determined by the previous block




N8 Moving the line to the calculated end point X0

N9 The radius of 1.5 "arc counterclockwise with XC-1.2689 YC2.2 and calculated end point X-3


N11 Moving the line in the X-6.1 Y.5

N12 Moving the line in the X-6.1 Y0


N14 Moving the line to X.5 Y1.5



N17 Rapid traverse Z in 0.1

N18 Completion of the program off the spindle and coolant

An example of an interactive program 6


The name of the program [SAMPLE 6] Dimensions [Absolute] Units [The English system] Working coordinate [---]

476


Installation Notes:

[] [] [] [] [] []-------------------------------------------------- - Event 1 of 12 Change of tool




The point of puncture X X [.5] The point of puncture Y Y [1.5] Correction [Automatic, right]



477


The X-axis X [1] The Y-axis Y [3] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]




End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]-------------------------------------------------- - Event 5 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Doug Plane [XY] The feed rate F [] Direction [counter-clockwise] Center [The absolute center] The radius of the arc R [1.5] Center of arc XC [-1.2689] YC [2.2] End point [Absolute] X [-3] Y [] Z []



The X-axis X [-4] The Y-axis Y [ ]

478


The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

Elongation in the opposite direction [off.]------------------------------------------------- Event 7 of 12 Geometrical parameters of milling - Line


The X-axis X [-6.1] The Y-axis Y [.5] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]




End [---]



The X-axis X [.5] The Y-axis Y [1.5] The Z-axis Z []

End [---]

479





End [---]





480


Sample 7

In this example, the program uses the rotary axis.

Axis "A" is programmed in decimal degrees format XXX.XXX.

An example of programming the rotary axis, a sample of seven

03,119 Moving along the axis A - Screw 4 screw slots G20 G90N1 G0 Z.1 The positioning of the workpiece Z N2 X0 Y0 A0 Positioning the X, Y and A in the starting pointN3 G1 F20 Z-.1 Submission to the depth ZN4 F15 X-5 A90 Displacement interpolation XA N5 G0 Z.1 The positioning of the workpiece ZN6 X0 Positioning the X back to the starting point N7 G1 F20 Z-.1 The second groove N8 F15 X-5 A180N9 G0 Z.1N10 X0N11 G1 F20 Z-.1 The third slotN12 F15 X-5 A270N13 G0 Z.1N14 X0N15 G1 F20 Z-.1 The fourth slotN16 F15 X-5 A360N17 G0 Z.1N18 X0 (End of 03 119)

481

APPENDIX

Error Messages

001 Invalid function number (Invalid function number)Pay attention to what happened and call for technical support. It was non-existent function call to DOS.

002 File not found (File not found)The name of the file labeled as outdated, does not exist. Use the MENU.

003 Path not found (Path not found)The specified disk or subdirectory does not exist.

004 Too many open files (Too many open files) Check whether the Config.sys file setting FILES = 20.

005 File access denied (access denied to file) The file can be opened only in read mode or on disk, write-protected.

006 Invalid file handle (file is invalid feed)

007 Memory control blocks destroyed (memory management units destroyed)

008 Insufficient memory (Out of memory) The downloadable program is too large for available memory. Performed or verified the program is too large for the memory control unit. Try to DNC mode.

009 Invalid memory block address (Invalid memory block address)

010 Invalid environment (Wrong Wednesday)

011 Invalid format (Invalid format)

012 Invalid file access code (Invalid access code to the file)

013 Invalid data (incorrect data)

015 Invalid drive specified (Invalid Drive) The specified disc does not exist.

016 Cannot remove current directory (Can not remove current directory) Pay attention to what happened and call for technical support.

017 Cannot rename across drives (not to rename specify different drives)

018 No more files (There are no more files)

483

100 Disk read error (Error reading disk) An attempt was made to edit the file that was somehow damaged, possibly during the editing power loss occurred or an error 101. Try to edit another file to see whether the problem is only one particular file. In this case, the program must be restored.

Note: This error occurs when you try to edit the dialog files created by the software SLS.

101 Disk write error - Parts memory is full (Error writing to disk - program memory to handle the full details) To avoid this error, remove the program from memory if they are not used (stored on a floppy disk). It is also necessary to monitor the amount of memory while programming. After deleting some programs from the program for the machining of parts is room for additional programs.

The procedure for recovering from Error 101(Error writing to disk - program memory to handle the full details)

Enter the commands shown in CAPITALS, then click on the button ENT.

1) ENTER (should see the C :/ RAM) 2) CD .. (Change directory) 3) CD PARTS (change to the directory of programs for processing details) 4) DIR (transfer files PART)5) DEL O # # # # (# # # # - Number of your details)

NOTE:You can recover your file O # # # # of the file dialog (P # # # #), re-sending it.

6) Turn off the machine, then on again to reset the control unit. Use the UTIL-FILES-ERASE to erase the programs that are no longer needed.

NOTE: You can check how much memory programs for the machining of parts is available on the home page using the UTIL-INFO.

102 File not assigned (The file is not named)

103 File not open (The file is not opened)

104 File not open for input (The file is not open for input)

105 File not open for output (The file is not open for output)

106 Invalid numeric format (Invalid number format)

484

APPENDIX

150 Disk is write-protected (disk is write-protected) Check whether there is a write-protect sticker used on a floppy disk.

151 Unknown unit (unit unknown)

152 Drive not ready (The disc is not ready)Check whether there is a disc in the drive.

153 Unknown command (Unknown command)

154 CRC error in data (error in the source data) Read the disk is damaged.

155 Bad drive request structure length (the length of the structure of the query is incorrect disk)

156 Disk seek error (Error positioning drive)Check the wire from the control unit to the drive.

157 Unknown media type (media type is unknown)

158 Sector not found (Sector not found)

159 Printer out of paper (the printer out of paper)

160 Device write fault (error writing to the device)

161 Device read fault (Error reading from device)

162 Hardware failure (hardware failure)Invalid format on a floppy disk. Try using a different drive or reformat the disk. Verify proper wiring of the drive.

163 Sharing Violation (Error Sharing)

182 Obsolete controller software for this system (Legacy software controller for the system)

183 Obsolete acroloop software for this system (Legacy software acroloop for this system)

184 Obsolete keyboard software for this system (Legacy software keyboard for the system)

485

APPENDIX

185 Obsolete bit access for ncb controller (Obsolete radix selection for the controller unit controls the network)

186 It also appears as an error 954. Control (NCB card) not detected (control unit (ECU network card) is not detected) - occurs when power All CNC Centurion 6 and 7. The control unit is not recorded in the correct signature dual-port memory, pointing out that she attended. Reasons: A. Defective unit network management card.Two. The motherboard is installed incorrectly, so the dual-port memory is also not functioning properly. For example, a motherboard with nakristalnymi drives require a jumper at which the address of the firmware nakristalnogo drive is not stored in the address D0000 hex, such as a dual-port memory.

187 It also appears as an error 955.Interface card not detected (interface card is not detected - there is a power-Only Centurion 7 CNC Version of the NC 206 and laterFrom the interface card has not been received by fiber-optic appropriate information which would indicate its performance. REASONS: A. Fiber optic cable is not attached at both ends. Two. Faulty interface board. Three. Defective unit network management cardBecause it must receive information from the interface board. 4. Defective fiber optic cable.

188 It also appears as an error 956.Interface card communication failure (refusal of a communication channel interface card) Only Centurion 7 CNCVersion of the NC 238 and laterBuilt-in network control block 3.19 or laterNot received any information from the interface board for 10 pulses of the control unit, about 0.01 seconds. REASONS:A. Fiber optic cable is weakened.Two. Faulty interface board.Three. Defective unit network management cardBecause it must receive information from the interface board.4. Defective fiber optic cable.

189 It also appears as an error 957.Watchdog Failure (Failure Watchdog)Only Centurion 7 CNC

486

APPENDIX

Version of the NC 238 and laterBuilt-in network control block 3.19 or laterBuilt-in interface 1.11 and later versionsInterface board reported that it removed the guard circuit, since there was no information from the network management card unit for about 3 pulses of about 0.003 seconds. REASONS:A. Fiber optic cable is weakened.Two. Defective unit network management card.Three. Faulty interface card, as it should be informed of the board of the control unit by the network. 4. If the software does not support error number 194, the release of power to the interface board called it resets (interface card comes with watchdog disabled by the system).Five. At a minimum, it is possible that the link will work in one direction and does not work in another. Especially when each area has an independent channel, including a separate fiber-optic cable. It is assumed that this error will be very rare, especially when the "Reset Interface" will give a single error.

190 It also appears as an error 958.Unexpected control (NCB card) reset (Unexpected reset the control unit (ECU network card)Only Centurion 7 CNCVersion of the NC 255 and laterBuilt-in network control block 3.23 or laterThe board of the control unit network is sometimes reset after power up, it's the only time when it should be dropped. REASONS:A. emission power in the board of the control unit by the network. Two. Noise on the bus reset your PC that is connected to the bus control unit reset board network. Fees keyboard version PLD AC hex (instead of the current B0 hex) allowed displacement of the tire reset the PC, making it susceptible to interference.

191 It also appears as an error 959.Unknown PLC (Hex file) failure (failure unidentified PLC (Hex-file))Only Centurion 7 CNCVersion of the NC 262 and laterBuilt-in network control block 3.27 or laterThe tasks of the control unit is not serviced by a network of the last 256 pulses board unit, about 0.25 seconds. REASONS:A. The task of network management unit is stopped, which indicates that it was not properly recorded in our department software. This problem has been due to an earlier file, network control unit on a lathe

487

APPENDIX

Two. Some early versions of the firmware of the control unit processor network overloaded, leaving no time to complete tasks.

192 It also appears as an error 960.Control (NCB card) Failure (Failure control unit (ECU network card)Centurion 6 and 7Version of the NC 268 and laterThe board of network management unit did not respond for a long time. REASONS:A. Defective unit network management card.Two. NC 268-279 false versions caused this error if the key on and off the block pressed in rapid succession.

193 Software Watchdog Error (Error Watchdog software) Only NC Centurion 8 - error described in this manual.

194 Unexpected interface (card) reset (Unexpected reset (board) Interface) Only Centurion 7 CNCVersion of the NC 289 and laterBuilt-in network control block 3.30 or laterBuilt-in interface 12.1Interface board is sometimes reset after power up, it's the only time when it should be dropped.REASONS:A. Release of power on the interface board called it resets (interface card comes with watchdog disabled by the system).

200 Division by zero (division by zero)

201 Range check error (Error checking bounds)

202 Stack overflow (stack overflow)

203 Heap overflow - Insufficient RAM memory (heap overflow area - not enough memory) If you are a great program, try to execute it via RS-232 in RUN.

204 Invalid pointer operation (operation with invalid pointer)

205 Floating point overflow (overflow in floating point operations)

206 Floating point underflow (disappearance of the order for floating point operations)

207 Invalid floating point operation (invalid floating point operation)

488

APPENDIX

208 TP Overlay Error (Error rassovmescheniya TR)

209 TP Overlay Error (Error rassovmescheniya TR)

210 TP Object Error (Error object TR)





300 Program already exists (program already exists) An attempt was made to use the name of an existing program. Use a different name.

301 Invalid program number (program number is invalid) The actual number of programs are in the range from 1 to 9999.*Non-modeling programs range from 1 to 15.

302 No programs to select from (No programs to choose from) This error can occur every time you create a menu to select the files when the file is not there. In the drive can be unformatted disk. Memory processing software components may be empty.

303 Problem saving program (s) to disk (Problem when saving program (s) on disk) There is no disk in drive. A disk can not be a place to store additional files. In the drive can be unformatted disk.

304 Problem loading program (s) from disk (Problem when loading program (s) to disk) The disk was removed from the drive after the installation files.

305 Not formatted for conversational. Try text editor. (Do not formatted for interactive mode. Try to work in a text editor.)

306 Conversational system has been corrupted (Interactive System has been damaged)

307 Illegal event number (event number is invalid) Number of events in the interactive program is negative.

308 Invalid tool number (Invalid number of tools) Tool number less than zero or greater than 99.

489

APPENDIX

309 Can't copy or rename a file to itself (can not rename or copy a file to itself) Try using a different file name.

310 File not formatted for conversational or parameters (The file is not formatted for the dialog mode or parameters) The problem in obtaining the file via RS-232. Check if there was sent the correct file.

311 Parameter file not valid (invalid parameter file) The problem in obtaining the parameter file via RS-232. Check whether the parameters are sent.

312 Insufficient parts storage (enough memory to store programs for processing details) Program memory is full of details to handle. Try to delete some programs from the catalog processing software components (UTILS-FILES-ERASE).Program on a floppy disk may be too large for the memory control unit.

313 Insufficient storage for compression, unable to post the file (not enough memory for file compression, you can not send a file) Delete some programs from the program for processing details.

314 Insufficient storage, post has been aborted (not enough memory to send interrupted) Delete some programs from the program for processing details.

315 Out of storage space on the floppy (Going beyond the amount of memory on a floppy disk) A floppy disk is full, or there are too many programs. There is a limit to 224 files can be stored in the root directory on a floppy disk. On the drive, you can create a subdirectory, and change the path to the disk to store files in a subdirectory. This allows full use of disk space.

316 Not enough storage to create a new file (not enough memory to create a new file) In the catalog of programs for the machining of parts is not enough space to create a new interactive program. Delete unnecessary programs to free up space.

317 Simulator allows only 15 events (simulator only allows 15 events)

319 Send file aborted (Sending a file is interrupted)

320 Invalid PLC program. (Invalid PLC program) One of the files ACRO.HEX (or NCB.HEX) in the directory memory is corrupt.

490

APPENDIX

321 Error in program O. (The error in the program O.) Specialized M-code or G-code contains an error.

322 or custom G code program not found. (Or a specialized program G-code not found)

323 or custom M code program not found. (Or a program of specialized M-code not found)

324 Invalid path or program not found for M6 tool change macro. (Path is invalid or not found a program for macro M6 tool change)In a macro tool change may include errors.

400 Home required (Requires installation of the original position)

The machine must be installed in its original position before it will happen any movement of the axes, ie MDI (manual data entry), JOG (Jog feed), HDW (flywheel), etc.

401 X axis software limit overtravel (Move the X axis for the programmed limits) 402 Y axis software limit overtravel (Move the Y axis for the programmed limits)403 Z axis software limit overtravel (Move the Z-axis for the programmed limits)404 A axis software limit overtravel (axis A for the transition preset limits)405 B axis software limit overtravel (Go B-axis for the programmed limits)406 C axis software limit overtravel (axis C of the transition-programmed limits)

These errors are the result of reaching the limits of the programmed axis move.

In the jog feed or flywheel reaches the limit of the axis of the control device will allow movement in one direction only.

The program may be a mistake. You may need to modify the G92 and / or G54.

Tool length is also a possible reason for the transition beyond the Z-axis.

407 X axis excess error condition (state the mismatch errors of the X axis)408 Y axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis Y)409 Z axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis Z)410 A axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis A)411 B axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis B)412 C axis excess error condition (Condition mismatch error axis C)

These errors are caused by the fact that the axis can not keep up with the programmed movement of the programmed speed.

This error occurs only when an accelerated move? Da__ Net__If so, check the voltage on the bus and the parameters of the accelerated filing.

Other reasons may include cutting of very thick material, worn tools, low voltage

491

APPENDIX

± 15, the parameters of deceleration / acceleration or refusal fee disk.

413 Attempted to move into safe zone (Trying to move into the security zone)

415 Can't establish DNC link while program is running (can not connect to DNC during program execution) You must stop a running program before you connect DNC

416 Out of position, arc end point is not on the arc (out of position, the end point of the arc is not on the arc)

417 Can't edit parameters while program is running (You can not edit the parameters at run time) You must stop the program before you edit the settings. The program is in a block or stop the supply?

418 Controller Card Error (Error controller board)

448 Air Pressure Error. Check air hose connection (Error air pressure. Check air hose connection)

449 Emergency stop: Axis drive fault. Reset servo drives or power down. (Emergency Stop: Do not drive axle. Restart actuators or power off)

450 Emergency stop condition. Reset drives or press <ESC> to clear this message. (State of emergency stop. Restart drives or click on <ESC>, to remove this message)

451 Lube fault, Check Waylube Level (Failure of lubrication system. Check

lubricant level guides) Float switch for automatic lubrication pump indicates that it is necessary to add oil to the reservoir of the automatic lubrication.

452 Tool not found in auto tool sequence (not found an instrument in a cycle of an automatic tool changer) Check the number of the instrument in UTIL-TLCHG-SLOTS.

453 Tool pot not up during turret movement (socket tool is not directed upwards while moving turret) Check if the switch POT UP (jack up) properly.

454 Not at tool change position (not in a position tool changer) Try to send a command before the command G32 M6.

455 ATC arm is not out, axis movement not allowed (Hand of the automatic tool change is not outside, moving along the axes are not allowed)

492

APPENDIX

456 Can't process auto tool change after switching to manual (can not perform automatic tool change when you switch to manual mode)

457 Move length too great for control (length of the displacement is too large to manage) (Divided into smaller segments move)

458 X axis is in the manual mode. Push reset to enable it (X-axis in manual mode. Click on Reset to activate it)

459 Y axis is in the manual mode. Push reset to enable it (Y-axis in manual mode. Click on Reset to activate it)

460 Feedrate too large for control. (The feed rate is too high to control)

501 Illegal address "#" encountered (detected an invalid address "#") The symbol in quotes ("") is not a valid address, such as X, Y, Z, R, G, etc. The block in which the error occurred is shown on the screen unit. Check this box for invalid addresses.

502 Undefined canned cycle (not a group defined cycle)

503 Return without gosub (Return without gosub) See the information on the return and gosub page 406Section 5.

504 Coincident points, the start point and end point are the same on an arc without a center (Coincidence points, starting and ending points are the same on the arc without a center) The starting and ending points are the same on the arc without a center.

505 Radius too small to span given points (radius is too small for the connection of these points) The starting and ending points are separated by a distance greater than "R".

507 After compensation, line to arc lacks intersection (after the correction is not crossing the line with the arc)

509 After compensation, arcs lack intersection (after correction is no crossing arcs)

515 Unexpected file size (Unexpected file size) The control unit reads the wrong size.

517 Parameter out of range (beyond parameter) The parameter number is less than zero. For parameters with numbers over 699, use data mode (G10, G11).

493

APPENDIX

518 Illegal program statement (Invalid operator of the program) The command in the statement of the program is not considered valid.

519 Feedrate out of range (feed rate beyond) The programmed feed rate exceeds the value of "maximum flow rate" in the settings of the machine. The programmed feed rate can be negative.

520 Spindle speed out of range (Spindle speed goes outside) The programmed spindle speed exceeds the value of "a range of spindle speed" in settings of the machine. The programmed spindle speed can be negative.

521 Negative arc radius (the radius of the arc negative) An attempt was made to generate a negative radius of the arc.

522 Negative polar radius (the radius of the negative polarity) Polar radius must be specified as a positive value.

523 Illegal tool number (Invalid number of tools)The actual numbers of T 0, from 0 to 99.

524 Illegal radius number (Invalid number range) The actual numbers of D - from 0 to 99.

525 Illegal length number (the number is invalidThe actual numbers of H - from 0 to 99.

526 Invalid access code (Invalid access code) The access code does not match the settings loaded into the machine.

527 Invalid access level (access level is invalid) Valid levels are: 0 - 4.

529 Duplicate address' encountered (detected duplicate address) The same address was found in the same block twice, for example, X0 Y0 X.5.

530 Colinear line to line in round corner (Collinear line to line in a rounded corner)

531 Colinear line to arc in round corner (Collinear line to an arc of the rounded corner)

532 Colinear arc to line in round corner (Collinear arc to a line in the rounded corner)

533 Colinear arc to arc in round corner (Collinear arc to arc in a rounded corner)

494

APPENDIX

535 Chamfer length is <0 (Chamfer length <0) The length of the bevel should be expressed as a positive number.

536 Can't chamfer and round the same corner (can not be chamfered and round the same corner) Select a chamfer or round the corner from him.

537 Can't chamfer to or from arcs (impossible with a chamfer arcs)

538 Loop counter out of range (cycle counter is outside) The maximum number of cycles to call - 999.

539 Dwell time out of range (Pause time beyond) Probably, it was indicated a negative number. Maximum time to pause - 999999999 seconds.

540 Illegal dwell time "#" encountered (found unacceptable pause "#") Try G4 F # #. # # # #; Specify X, P or F after the G4.

541 No axis moves are allowed on a G31 or G32 block (movements along the axes are not allowed in block G31 and G32) G31 and G32 are intended only for the displacement Z. Move X and Y move to another block.

542 G30 Illegal return to reference parameter on G30 block (G30 Invalid return to the basic setting in block G30) It should be P2, P3 or P4 for the second, third and fourth reference point.

543 Illegal G10 statement (Invalid operator G10)

544 Too many digits in number (too many digits in number) The number of digits exceeds the expected for a given address. For example, G100 should have only two digits.

545 Illegal K value for number of holes (not valid for the number of K holes) K must be a number from 1 to 1000.

546 Nested calls or gosubs too deep (level of nested calls or commands gosub too deep) Probably, the program calls itself. Limiting investments equal to 50 calls for the programs.

547 Comment not closed (not closed Comment) Always use "()" (double parentheses) for comments on the program.

495

APPENDIX

549 Unrecognized G code (unidentified G-code) The observed G-code is not recognized by the control device.

550 Bad numeric format (Invalid number format) Expected a numeric value or a parameter value enclosed in [], then enter X, Y, Z, R, etc.

551 Multiple decimal points (a few decimal points)A few decimal points were found in a single numerical value.

552 Missing "]" (missing "]") Always use brackets in pairs.

553 Missing "[" (No "[") Always use brackets in pairs.

554 Tangent function overflow (overflow function of tangent) Trying to find the tangent of a number close to 90 º

555 Missing "/" (There is no "/") The syntax of the arctangent "ATAN" - P # # = ATAN [# / #].

556 Negative SQRT argument (negative argument SQRT)

557 Unknown function (unknown function)

560 Illegal relational operator (Invalid relational operator)

567 Unresolved call (Indefinite call) The called program does not exist (Call # # # #).

568 Unresolved goto or gosub (Undefined command goto or gosub)N # # # # does not exist in the program (Goto # # # #).

569 The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "Compensated radius is too small" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "Adjusted the radius is too small")Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool.

570 The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "1st compensated radius in arc to arc is <0" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "1st corrected radius of the arc to the arc <0") Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool.

496

APPENDIX

571 The tool is too large to cut inside the arc "2nd compensated radius in arc to arc is <0" (Tool for cutting too much inside the arc, "2nd corrected radius of the arc to the arc <0")Remove the arc, or use a smaller tool.

572 Pocket clear is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop-(Cleaning the deep recesses is not in the loop Start / end milling)Cycle-WHILE WEND -Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling.

573 Round wall is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop-(Rounded wall is not located in a loop beginning / end milling)Cycle-WHILE WEND -Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling.

574 Round wall radius will not span 1st Z depth and final Z depth (radius of the curved wall is not connecting the 1st depth Z with a final depth of Z)

575 Tapered wall is not in a Start / End mill cycle -WHILE WEND loop-(Conical wall is not located in a loop beginning / end milling)Cycle-WHILE WEND -Use the START (Start) at the beginning of the cycle milling and END (End) to end the cycle of milling.

576 Z increment is 0 (Increment of Z is equal to 0)

578 Undefined text cycle (cycle of indefinite text) The symbol specified in the text command is not supported. Parameter Load Text Cycles (Download text of cycles) can not be installed in the PARMS-CTRL.

579 Compensated arcs do not intersect (disjoint arcs Adjusted)

580 Invalid floating point operation. The argument passed to the LN function was zero or negative. (Invalid floating point operation. Argument passed to the function LN, was negative or zero)

581 Invalid floating point operation. The Operand passed to the "**" function was zero or negative (Invalid floating point operation. Operand passed to the function "**", was negative or zero)

497

APPENDIX

588 Can't set tool offsets for tool # 0 (not set correct for the tool number 0)

601 Missing WHILE statement (Missing operator WHILE) Perhaps the end of the cycle without cutting cycle began milling.

602 Missing WEND statement (Missing operator WEND) Perhaps the end of the cycle without cutting cycle began milling.

603 Program N # # # # does not exist (Program N # # # # does not exist) The program, called as a subroutine does not exist. Check whether the called program in memory.

606 Program N # # # # is empty (Program N # # # # empty) Performed or verified the program text is empty. Try to edit and resend the file dialog.

607 Can't exit DNC run mode while program is running (can not exit the DNC run when the program is executed) DNC regime must be stopped before the release.

608 'P' expected in M98 block ("P" is expected to block M98)

609 G20/21 not allowed in DNC Fast (G20/21 is not admissible in an accelerated mode DNC)

666 Quill movement detected, reposition the quill to it's original position. (Moving quill was found, re-establishment of sleeve to its original position)

498

APPENDIX

Sampling error

800 Illegal probe block (the block is invalid sensor) Syntax error in file management. Check the format of the block. Blocks must begin with X, Y or Z, followed by one or two teams P.

801 Missing end of pick (There is no end of instructions) The border is not closed indication. Entered the file does not complete the block boundary definition guidelines.

802 Reversed scan segment (segment Scan Reverse) Multiple segments of the scan caused the change in the middle of the scan direction of the current scan.

803 Missing end of scan (There is no end of scan) Segment directions was stopped before the end of the scan was determined. Must be at least two blocks determine the boundary between each scan directions.

804 Reversed pick segment (segment reverse directions) Multiple segments indicate the direction of change caused instructions. Use multiple segments of the trial, if the desired goal.

805 Invalid probe setup (Incorrect installation of the sensor) The input file does not begin a comment that contains three stars. Also, the following three blocks must be X, Y, Z or Y, X, Z, depending on the scanning plane.

806 Scan origin expected (Waiting for the origin of scan) Multiple segments specifying started without specifying start scanning within a given segment.

807 Probe file not found (File not found the sensor) Can not find the selected input file.

808 Setup not selected (Setting is not selected) An attempt to measure without selecting a file input and output mode on the screen the sensor.

809 Bad Z limits encountered (found unacceptable limits of Z) The maximum height of Z is less than the maximum value of depth Z.

499

APPENDIX

810 Stuck digitizing probe (probe for digitizing Jam) Digitization could reach a maximum height of Z, and contact with the workpiece still fixed. If the sensor does not actually affect the item, you may need to have it serviced. If it relates to the details, it can be omitted or increase the maximum height of Z.

812 Input out of range (beyond entry)

900 RS232 overrun error (The system sending data may not have the same baud rate as the CNC.) (Overflow error RS232 (The system sends the data can have the same baud rate as NC))Check setting the baud rate with the RS-232 in the PARMS-CTRL.

901 RS232 parity error (The system sending data may not have the same parity as the CNC.) (Parity Error RS232. (The system sends the data can have the same parity as NC))Check the setting of parity for the RS-232 in the PARMS-CTRL.

902 RS232 framing error (Remote system and CNC may not have the same line settings or a loose cable.) (Error crop RS232. Remote system and the CNC may not be the same configuration line or cable can be weakened))Check the settings in the line of PARMS-CTRL for baud rate, parity and stop bits.

903 RS232 break detected (RS232 cable may be loose.) (RS232 discovered the gap.RS232 cable can be weakened))Check cable connections and connectors.

950 Obsolete controller software for this system (Legacy software controller for the system)

951 Obsolete acroloop software for this system (Legacy software acroloop for this system)

952 Obsolete keyboard software for this system (Legacy software keyboard for the system)

953 Obsolete bit access for ncb controller (Obsolete radix selection for the controller unit controls the network)

954 Control not detected. (The control device is not detected)

955 Interface not detected. (The interface is not found.)

956 Interface communication failure (refusal to link interface)

957 Watchdog failure (failure Watchdog)

500

APPENDIX

958 Unexpected Control Reset (Unexpected reset the control unit)

959 Unknown PLC Failure (Unknown refusal to PLC)

960 Control Failure (failure control devices)

Byte parameters

000 Parameter File Version (Version parameter file) 016 Cartesian Inch Leading Digits (Senior level Cartesian coordinate system

in imperial measurements) 017 Cartesian Inch Trailing Digits (junior level Cartesian coordinate system

in imperial measurements) 018 Cartesian Metric Leading Digits (Senior level Cartesian coordinate

system to the metric system of measurement) 019 Cartesian Metric Trailing Digits (Junior ranks of Cartesian coordinates

in the metric system of measurement) 020 Angle Inch Leading Digits (senior level in a corner of the inch system of

measurement) 021 Angle Inch Trailing Digits (junior level in the corner of the inch system

of measurement) 022 Angle Metric Leading Digits (senior level of the angle in the metric

system of measurement) 023 Angle Metric Trailing Digits (junior level of the angle in the metric

system of measurement) 024 Spindle Inch Leading Digits (senior level in the spindle-inch system of

measurement) 025 Spindle Inch Trailing Digits (junior level in the spindle-inch system of

measurement) 026 Spindle Metric Leading Digits (Senior spindle discharges in the metric

system of measurement) 027 Spindle Metric Trailing Digits (Junior spindle discharges in the metric

system of measurement) 028 Feed Inch Leading Digits (senior level supply system in imperial

measurements) 029 Feed Inch Trailing Digits (Low level supply system in imperial

measurements) 030 Feed Metric Leading Digits (senior level supply in the metric system of

measurement) 031 Feed Metric Trailing Digits (Low level feeding in the metric system of

measurement) 040 RS-232 Change Line-Feed to Carriage Return Linefeed In (Changing the

RS-232 line breaks to carriage return line feed)

501

APPENDIX

041 Send Carriage returns and Linefeeds at the end of each RS-232 block. (To send commands to the carriage return and line breaks after each block of the RS-232)

042 Key-Board code (Code keyboard) 045 Machine Version (Version of the machine) 046 Force Front Panel Spindle (Spindle Gain from the front panel) 047 Minimum Parts Space (minimum distance between parts) 048 use G92 instead of G54 in the Hand-Wheel and Jog screens (using G92

instead of G54 on the screens of Hand-Wheel (flywheel) and Jog (Express delivery))

049 Extract programs with O # # # # # in RS-232 and Files Load (Check out the program with O # # # # # to RS-232 Files Load (Download file))

050 Spindle Range (Range of spindle speed) 051 Number of ATC Pockets (The number of nests in the automatic tool

changer) 053 Resolve Programs in DNC (for GOTOs) (Identify program DNC (allows

GOTO)) 055 Disable 417 Errors (Deactivate Error 417) 057 Door Open Switch (switch open the door) 058 Use Small Soft Keys (Use a small soft keys) 059 Load Tool Offsets (Download the tool offset) 061 Use S Curves (Using S-curves) 062 Primary Handwheel Encoder (primary flywheel sensor) 063 Look Ahead in Run Mode (outrunning view at run time) 064 Initial Units Inch or Metric (Proactive unit in inch or metric system of

measurement) 065 Number of Axis (Axis number) 068 Spindle Axis (Spindle axis) 069 Tool Change Type (Type of tool change) 070 Run Rapid 100% (Running, accelerated the movement of 100%) 071 Dry Run Rapid 100% (Idle, accelerated the movement of 100%) 072 Spindle on in Dry Run (spindle turned on at idle) 073 Tool Table Diameters \ Radius (Diameter / Radius tool table) 075 Load Engraving Cycles (cycles Download engraving) 076 Load Canned Cycles (Load group cycles) 077 Check Spindle up to Speed (Check the spindle acceleration signal) 078 Check Spindle Zero Speed (Check zero spindle speed) 079 G18 is ZX or XZ plane (G18 - a ZX plane or XZ) 080 Cad Type DXF or CDL (Type Cad DXF or CDL) 081 Special Flags (Special flags) 082 Offset Round and Tapered Walls (Correction of curved walls and

conical) 083 Full Dos File Names (The full file names DOS) 085 Primary Serial Port (Primary serial port) 086 COM1 Baud Rate; (COM1, baud rate in baud)

502

APPENDIX

087 COM1 Data / Stop Bits and Parity (COM1, parity and stop bits of information)

088 COM2 Baud Rate; (COM2, baud rate in baud) 089 COM2 Data / Stop Bits and Parity (COM2, parity and stop bits of

information) 090 Tape Start Character (The symbol starting tape) 091 Tape Stop Character (The symbol stop tape) 092 RS-232 Buffer Size (The size of the buffer RS232) 093 Secondary Serial Port (The secondary serial port) 094 RS-232_End of file character (RS-232_Konets symbol file) 096 Power up with Block Skip On (Turn on the power when activated,

blocks passage of) 097 Power up with Optional Stop On (Power is activated when an optional

stop) 099 Display Multiple Block Lines (Show a few lines of blocks) 100-109 Post M-code Table (Table future M-code) 110-119 Custom G-code Table (Table specialized G-code) 120-129 Custom M-code Table (Table specialized M-codes) 130-145 M6 Macro File Name (file name in the macro M6) 146 Drive on Menus (Disk menu) 160-175 Report File Name (The name of the log file) 176-183 Thermo Comp Axes (Temperature compensation of axles) 188 Rapid S Curves (S-curves at an accelerated movement) 189 Tap Up Double RPM (Cut the thread with double the number of

revolutions per minute) 190 Check Air Pressure (Check the air pressure) 200 ATC Clockwise Coast (Movement of the tool changer to inertia in a

clockwise direction) 201 ATC Clockwise Brake (Braking device tool changer clockwise) 202 ATC Counter Clockwise Coast (Movement of the tool changer of inertia

counter-clockwise) 203 ATC Counter Clockwise Brake (Braking device tool changer counter-

clockwise) 204 Electronic Spindle Gears (electronic transmission of spindle) 206 Show current position in E-Stop (Display the current position during

emergency stop) 209 Spindle Dac Value (value of the DAC spindle) 212 Second Hand-Wheel Axis (The second axis of the handwheel) 213 Probe Axis (The axis of the sensor) 214 Probe Input (Sensor input) 215 Cranking Factor (for hand-wheeling thru a program) (Ratio at start) (for

manual movement of the program) 218 Serial Key board (Keyboard with serial connection) 219 European Code (European code) 220 Door Open Axis (The axis of the door opening) 221 Door Open Input (Log in opening the door)

503

APPENDIX

222 Door Over-Ride Axis (The axis of the abolition of the door opening) 223 Door Over-Ride Input (Log cancel opening the door) 227 End of Cycle Axis = 227; (The axis of the end of the cycle = 227) 228 End of Cycle Output = 228; (The output end of the cycle = 228) 229 Yaskawa Axis Drives (Axes drives Yaskawa) 230 Third Hand-Wheel Axis (The third axis of the handwheel) 231 Inverse Feed-rate in 1/Seconds or 1/Minutes (The reverse flow rate of

1/sec or 1/min) 232 Video Mode (Video mode) 233 Screen Blank Back Light (Lights turn off the display back) 234 Enable Three Hand-Wheels when Conversational Programming (To

activate the flywheel when the three dialog programming) 235 Always Stop on Angles Greater Than 60 º (Always stop at angles greater

than 60 º) 236 Dual Master Axis (Dual drive axle) 237 Run Look Ahead Blocks (Blocks Perform advanced view) 275-291 Foreign Extension (Foreign expansion) 294 Blocks of Look Ahead in Fast DNC (units ahead is rooted in the view

mode, DNC) 295 Reverse Spindle in Back-Gear (reversed spindle gear looping) 296 Check control over temperature (Check the temperature control) 298 Remove tool lengths from graphics (Remove tool length of the charts) 300-315 Utility Command (Command Center) 320-335 Machine Type (Type of the machine) 338-353 Mechanical Version (Version of the mechanical system) 354-369 Electrical Version (Version of the electrical system) 370 Ignore Rapids in Auto-Scale (Ignore the accelerated movement of the

automatic scaling) 371 Safe Zone on at Power Up (Safe area is activated when power is turned

on) 374 New Remote Hand-Wheel (The new remote handwheel) 375 Sub Work-Coordinate System (auxiliary working system of coordinates) 376-391 Machine Serial Number (Serial number of the machine) 392 High Tool Change on Pick and Place (High tool change position in the

capture and distribution) 394 Acceleration Settling Time (Setup time overclocking) 395 Deceleration Settling Time (Setting time of inhibition) 396 Z Axis Scale Feed-back (Mitutoyo) (Feedback on the scale of the axis Z

(Mitutoyo)) 397 Auto Rotary Brake (Automatic rotary brake) 398 Sort Directories by Name (Sort directories by name) 399 Manual Pocket Clear Tool Number (number of tools to clean the deep

recesses manually) 400 Ignore Tool Radius to Large Errors (Ignore "Tool radius is too large") 404 Front Panel Type (Type of the front panel)

504

APPENDIX

405 Aux Auger Button (Additional button for auger) 406 Aux Setup Button (additional button to install) 410 FeedBack on Quill Scale (feedback line sleeve) 411 Tool Setting Any Tool, Current Tool (Set tool in any tool, the current

tool) 413 Pre Check Software Limits 0 = Run Only 1 = Always 2 = Never (Pre-

programmed test limits 0 = 1 = Execute only 2 = Always Never) 415 Remote HDW Encoder (Remote sensor wheel) 416 Quill Scale Encoder (The sensor bar sleeve) 417 Sharp Corners (Sharp edges) 418 Tool Load Flag Limit Exceeded, Limit not Exceeded (Going beyond the

flag download the tool, going beyond the limits do not exist) 419 Tool Load Monitor 0 = Off 1 = E-Stop 2 = Feed Hold 3 = Block Mode

On 4 = Set Flag - No Message 5 = Message Only (Download the tool sensor 0 = Disabled, 1 = 2 = Emergency Stop Stop feeding 3 = Enabled 4 = block mode Checking - No message = Only 5 posts)

420-444 Tool Load Limits (Limits loading tool) 445-470 Tool Load Maximums (Maximum loading tool) 471 Cylinder Parked Axis (Cylindrical axis of the map in the original

position) 472 Cylinder Rotary Axis (Cylindrical rotary axis display) 473 Check Spindle Gear Mismatch (Check the transmission spindle

misalignment) 474 Laser Tool Setter Pulse Length (length of a pulse laser device to adjust

the tool) 475 Tool Setting Use Work Offsets (Using the working set of corrections for

the instrument) 476 Feedhold G1 and No Spindle (Stop feeding the G1 and the absence of

spindle) 477 Watch Spindle up to Speed (Track spindle acceleration signal) 478 Chiller Fault Axis (Axis cooling malfunction) 479 Chiller Fault Input (Input malfunction of cooling) 480 Tool Carousel Index Button (Button indexing rotary tool magazine) 489 Handwheel G54-Z (flywheel G54-Z) 490 E-Stop Option on Conversational End of Program Event (Optional

emergency-stop dialog with the completion of the event program) 491 6 Cent RW30 Remote Handwheel Option (Optional remote flywheel

Cent 6 RW30) 495 90 Degree Cutter Compensation (90-degree correction of the cutting

tool) 496 Restrictive Edit Key (Restrictions editing keys) 530 Auger On Time (On Time auger) 532 Wash-Down on Time (Closing time washing) 533 Wash-Down off Time (Time off washing) 534 Check Tool Door Open (Check tool at the door is open) 535 Spindle Cool Down Time (spindle cooling time)

505

APPENDIX

536 Spindle Lube Cycle Time (cycle time lubrication of spindle) 537 Yaskawa2 Drives (Drives Yaskawa2) 538 Put Pot Down on Swing Arm Tool Changers (Lowering the slot in the

tool changer with swinging arm) 540 2GearwithGearBox (2 transmission with a gear box) 541 Check Drawbar Prox (Check the proximity switch traction rod) 542 Yaskawa M5 drive (Drive Yaskawa M5) 543 Machine State 0 = Nothing 1 = Verifying 2 = Program Running (State

Machine 0 = None 1 = 2 = Running test program) 544 Check Spindle in Gear (Check spindle gearing) 545 Front Panel Flags (Flags front panel)

-Definitions of bits -FPFLAGS_HOLD_TOOL_CHANGE $ 01; (To stop the tool change)FPFLAGS_NOT_OVERRIDE_SWITCH $ 02; (Do not switch the feed rate)FPFLAGS_RAPID_OVERRIDE $ 04; (Rapid correction)FPFLAGS_LEDS $ 08; (LEDs)FPFLAGS_NOT_MANUAL_PANEL $ 10; (Do not hand panel)

547 Changer Type (Device type tool changer) 548 Pump Delay - Used on coolant through spindle (delay pump - used when

applying coolant through the spindle) 549 Check Up-to-speed2 - Copy of PB77 for use in NCB files (Check the

signal razgona2 - Copy PB77 files for use in network management unit) 550 Rotary Brake Delay - Copy of R_RotaryBrakeDelay for the NCB

(Rotational latency brakes - copy R_RotaryBrakeDelay for control network)

551 Up-to-speed Axis (The axis of acceleration) 552 Up-to-speed Input (Signal input acceleration) 554 Coolant Through Code - Used in NCB files for coolant through spindle

(ID Coolant - Use file control block chain for the coolant through the spindle)

555 Auto Rotary Brake2 - Copy of PB397 (Automatic rotary brake 2 - A copy of the PB397)

506

The actual parameters

It should be very careful when writing to any settings other than Custom parameters P00-P99.

P00-P99 User Parameters (Custom Settings)

P100- Probe ParametersP111 (Parameters of the sensor)

P112- UnassignedP139 (Not assigned)

P140 R plane (plane R)P141 Final Z depth (final depth of Z) P142 Z initial level (initial level Z)P143 Z increment (Increment of Z)P144 First Z depth (The first depth Z)P145 Z feedrate (feed speed Z)P146 Peck up increment (Step periodic output bits)P147 Peck clearance (gap periodic output bits)P148 Dwell 1 (a pause)P149 Dwell 2 (Pause 2)P150 Pocket radius (radius of the deep recesses)P151 X pocket dimension (size deep groove X)P152 Y pocket dimension (size deep groove Y)P153 XY finish stock (Finishing allowance XY)P154 Z finish stock (Finishing allowance Z)P155 Cut width (width of cut)P156 Bolthole radius (radius of the bolt holes)P157 Bolthole start angle (the angle of initial bolt holes)P158 #holes in 360 degrees (number of holes at 360 degrees)P159 #holes to be made in Bolthole (number of holes that needed to be done in a hole under the bolt)

P160- Unassigned (not assigned)P170

P171 Holes to be made in drill cycles"K" (The holes that need to berun in cycles of drilling)P172 Mirror position axis 1 (X) (mirroring the position of an axis (X))P173 Mirror position axis 2 (Y) (Mirror 2 position of the axis (Y))P174 Mirror position axis 3 (Z) (Mirror 3 position of the axis (Z))P175 Mirror position axis 4 (A) (mirroring the position of the axis 4 (A))P176 Mirror position axis 5 (B) (mirroring the position of the axis 5 (B))P177 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional)P178 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional) P179 Mirror pos. optional axis (the axis of mirror position optional)P180 Scale position axis 1 (X) (Regulation scaling axis 1 (X))P181 Scale position axis 2 (Y) (Regulation scaling axis 2 (Y))P182 Scale position axis 3 (Z) (3-axis position of the zoom (Z))P183 Scale posiiton axis 4 (A) (4-axis position of the zoom (A))P184 Scale position axis 5 (B) (5-axis position of the zoom (B))P185 Scale position opt. axis (the axis position of the zoom optional) P186 Scale position opt. axis (the axis position of the zoom optional)P187 Scale position opt.axis (optional axis position of the zoom)P188 Scale factor axis 1 (X) (scale factor 1 axis (X))

507

APPENDIX

P189 Scale factor axis 2 (Y) (2-axis scaling factor (Y))P190 Scale factor axis 3 (Z) (3-axis scaling factor (Z))P191 Scale factor axis 4 (A) (4-axis scaling factor (A))P192 Scale factor axis 5 (B) (5-axis scaling factor (B))P193 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional) P194 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional)P195 Scale factor opt. axis (the axis scaling factor optional)P196 Rotate I position (Rotate position I)P197 Rotate J position (Rotate position J)P198 Angle of rotation (Angle)P199 Auto Routines Plunge / Ramp (Automatic standardized incision / overclocking) P200 Previous position (X) (Previous position (X))P201 Previous position (Y) (Previous position (Y))P202 Previous position (Z) (Previous position (Z))P203 Previous position (A) (Previous position (A))P204 Previous position (B) (Previous position (B))P205 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional)P206 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional)P207 Previous pos. opt. axis (axis of the previous position optional)P208 Current position (X) (current position (X))P209 Current position (Y) (The current position (Y))P210 Current position (Z) (The current position (Z))P211 Current position (A) (The current position (A))

P212 Current position (B) (The current position (B))P213 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional)P214 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional)P215 Current pos. opt. axis (axis of the current situation optional)P216 Previous machine (X) (Previous machine (X))P217 Previous machine (Y) (Previous machine (Y))P218 Previous machine (Z) (The previous machine (Z))P219 Previous machine (A) (The previous machine (A))P220 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional)P221 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional)P222 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional)P223 Previous mach. opt. axis (the axis of the previous machine optional)P224 Current machine (X) (Current machine (X))P225 Current machine (Y) (Current Machine (Y))P226 Current machine (Z) (Current machine (Z))P227 Current machine (A) (Current Machine (A))P228 Current machine (B) (Current Machine (B))P229 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional)P230 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional)P231 Current machine opt. axis (the axis of the current machine optional)P232 Work offset axis 1 (X) (Operating a correction of the axis (X))P233 Work offset axis 2 (Y) (Working Correction axis 2 (Y))P234 Work offset axis 3 (Z) (Working Correction axis 3 (Z))

508

APPENDIX

P235 Work offset axis 4 (A) (Working Correction axis 4 (A))P236 Work offset axis 5 (B) (Correction Working axle 5 (B))P237 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional)P238 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional)P239 Work offset optional axis (the axis of the Working correction optional)P240 Tool offset axis 1 (X) (Correction to the tool axis 1 (X))P241 Tool offset axis 2 (Y) (Correction to the tool axis 2 (Y))P242 Tool offset axis 3 (Z) (Correction to the tool axis 3 (Z))P243 Tool offset axis 4 (A) (Correction to the tool axis 4 (A))P244 Tool offset axis 5 (B) (Correction to the tool axis 5 (B))P245 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional)P246 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional)P247 Tool offset optional axis (correction to the tool axis optional)P248 Arc radius (radius of the arc)P149 Arc I value (The quantity I arc) P250 Arc J value (The value of J arc)P251 Feedrate (feed rate)P252 Dwell (Pause)P253 Spindle speed (RPM spindle)P254 Temporary X position (the position of Interim X)P255 Temporary Y position (the position of Interim Y)P256 Temporary Z position (Temporary Regulation Z)P257 Temporary A position (temporary position A)P258 Temporary axis position (the position of Interim axis)P259 Temporary axis position (the position of Interim axis)P260 Active tool number (number of active tool)

P261 Active tool radius (radius of the active tool)P262 Active tool length (length of the active tool)P263 Active radius offset number (number correction to the radius of the active tool)P264 Active length offset number (number correction to the length of the active tool)P265 Canned cycle active (The group is active cycle)P266 Zone status (status area)P267 Unit ratio (ratio of units)P268 Pending tool (expected tool)P269 Unused (not used)P270 Temporary I (Temporary I)P271 Temporary J (Temporary J)P272 Temporary K (Temporary K)P273 Third axis rotation angle (Angle of rotation of the third axis)

P274- Rotation table (Turntable)P282

P283- Unused (not used)P285

P286- Rotation coordinates (The coordinates of the rotation)P292

P293- Unassigned (not assigned) P299

P300 Modal 00 (modal 00)P301 Modal 01 (modal 01)P302 Modal 02 (modal 02)P303 Modal 03 (modal 03)P304 Data mode (Data Mode)P305 H offset direction (direction of the correction H)P306 Interpolate (Interpolation)P307 Coordinates (coordinates)P308 Active plane (active plane)

509

APPENDIX

P309 Cutter compensation (correction to the cutting tool)P310 Canned cycle (Group cycle)P311 Dimension (Size) P312 Feed unit (Supply unit)P313 Spindle unit (Knot Spindle)P314 Spindle direction (direction of rotation of the spindle)P315 Linear unit (Linear node)P316 Scale (Scale)P317 Rotate (turn)P318 Mirror (Mirror)P319 Work system (Operating System)P320 Primary (Primary)P321 Secondary (Secondary)P322 Tertiary (Tertiary)P323 Return plane (plane of the return)P324 Tapping (Tapping)P325 Custom code (custom code)P326 Custom M-code (Specialized M-code)P327 Custom G-code (specialized G-code)P328 Feed per Rev (wait for marker) (feed per revolution (waiting for the token))P329 Feedrate override Lock (Lock feedrate)P330 Spindle override Lock (Lock correct spindle speed)


P335 Hard Tap Fudge Factor (The configuration parameter rigid tapping)


P344 Inverse Time Feedrate (feed rate with time delay) P345 Bore Type (Type of Boring)P346 G76 Orient Bore Angle (G76 angle orientation bore)P347 G76 Orient Bore Distance (G76 Distance orientation boring)

P348- Unassigned (Not assigned)P349

P350- Used in tool setting software P361 (Used in the software configuration tool)


P364 Draw Bar Delay used in tool change macros (delay pulling the rod used in a macro tool change)

P365 Feed per Minute Feedrate (feed rate, feed per minute)

P366 Feed per Rev Feedrate (feed rate, feed per revolution)


P369 Job time (time of manufacturing one piece)

P370 True tool number (the true number of tools)


P400 Work G92 axis 1 (X) (Working one axis (X) G92)P401 Work G92 axis 2 (Y) (working Axis 2 (Y) G92)P402 Work G92 axis 3 (Z) (working 3 axis (Z) G92)P403 Work G92 axis 4 (A) (Working Axis 4 (A) G92)P404 Work G92 axis 5 (B) (Working axis 5 (B) G92)P405 Work G92 optional axis (Working optional axis)P406 Work G52 axis 1 (X) (Working one axis (X) G52)P407 Work G52 axis 2 (Y) (working Axis 2 (Y) G52)

510

APPENDIX

P408 Work G52 axis 3 (Z) (working 3 axis (Z) G52)P409 Work G52 axis 4 (A) (Working axis 4 (A) G52)P410 Work G52 axis 5 (B) (Working axis 5 (B) G52)P411 Work G52 optional axis (Working optional axis)P412 Work coordinate a (X) (Operating a coordinate (X))P413 Work coordinate a (Y) (Operating a coordinate (Y))P414 Work coordinate a (Z) (the coordinate of a Working (Z))P415 Work coordinate 1 (A) (Working coordinate 1 (A))P416 Work coordinate 1 (B) (Working coordinate 1 (B))P417 Work coordinate an opt. axis (Working a coordinate axis optional)P418 Work coordinate 2 (X) (Working coordinate 2 (X))P419 Work coordinate 2 (Y) (2 Working coordinate (Y))P420 Work coordinate 2 (Z) (Working coordinate 2 (Z))P421 Work coordinate 2 (A) (Working coordinate 2 (A))P422 Work coordinate 2 (B) (Working coordinate 2 (B))P423 Work coordinate two opt. axis (Working two coordinate axis optional)P424 Work coordinate 3 (X) (Working coordinate 3 (X))P425 Work coordinate 3 (Y) (Working three coordinate (Y))P426 Work coordinate 3 (Z) (Working coordinate 3 (Z))P427 Work coordinate 3 (A) (Working coordinate 3 (A))P428 Work coordinate 3 (B) (Working coordinate 3 (B))P429 Work coordinate 3 opt. axis (Working three coordinate axis optional)P430 Work coordinate 4 (X) (Working coordinate 4 (X))

P431 Work coordinate 4 (Y) (4 Working coordinate (Y))P432 Work coordinate 4 (Z) (Working coordinate 4 (Z))P433 Work coordinate 4 (A) (Working coordinate 4 (A))P434 Work coordinate 4 (B) (Working coordinate 4 (B))P435 Work coordinate 4 opt. axis (Working optional 4-axis coordinate)P436 Work coordinate 5 (X) (Working coordinate 5 (X))P437 Work coordinate 5 (Y) (5 Working coordinate (Y))P438 Work coordinate 5 (Z) (Working coordinate 5 (Z))P439 Work coordinate 5 (A) (Working coordinate 5 (A))P440 Work coordinate 5 (B) (Working coordinate 5 (B))P441 Work coordinate 5 opt. axis (Working optional five-axis coordinate)P442 Work coordinate 6 (X) (Working coordinate 6 (X))P443 Work coordinate 6 (Y) (6 Operating coordinate (Y))P444 Work coordinate 6 (Z) (Working coordinate 6 (Z))P445 Work coordinate 6 (A) (Working coordinate 6 (A))P446 Work coordinate 6 (B) (Working coordinate 6 (B))P447 Work coordinate 6 opt. axis (Working optional 6-axis coordinate)P448 Tool change offset (X) (Correction tool change (X))P449 Tool change offset (Y) (Correction tool changer (Y))P450 Tool change offset (Z) (Correction tool changer (Z))P451 Tool change offset (A) (Correction tool change (A))P452 Tool change offset (B) (Correction tool change (B))P453 Tool chg. offset opt.axis (Correction tool changer optional axis)

511

APPENDIX

P454 Positive safe zone (X) (Positive safety zone (X))P455 Positive safe zone (Y) (A positive safety zone (Y))P456 Positive safe zone (Z) (Positive safety zone (Z))P457 Positive safe zone (A) (positive safety zone (A))P458 Positive safe zone (B) (positive safety zone (B))P459 Positive safe zone opt. (A positive safety zone axis optional)P460 Negative safe zone (X) (negative safety zone (X))P461 Negative safe zone (Y) (negative safety zone (Y))P462 Negative safe zone (Z) (negative safety zone (Z))P463 Negative safe zone (A) (Negative safe zone (A))P464 Negative safe zone (B) (negative safety zone (B))P465 Negative safe zone opt. (The negative safety zone axis optional) P466 Text Rotation Angle (angle of rotation of the text)


P474 Current Max Feedt (current maximum flow rate)P475 R_LogBeatsSkip (Skipping R_LogBeats)


P495 ToolChangeSpacing (tool change intervals)


P510 StartBlock (Top of unit)P511 EndBlock (end unit)

P512 CutIncrement (increment of cut)P513 RufCutType (type rough cut)P514 Start Mill Options (Options start milling)P515 RufCutDepth (roughing depth of cut)P516 Island (Island)

P517- Used in Autoroutines P527 (Used in automatic standard programs)

P522 Ramp Angle in Autoroutines (canting angle standard in automatic programs)


P698 Parts Counter Increment (step counter parts)P699 Parts Counter (Counter parts)


P704 Power on Feedrate (The inclusion of the feed rate)


P790 Spindle range 1 (Range of spindle 1) P791 Spindle range 2 (Range of spindle speed 2)P792 Spindle range 3 (range of rotation of the spindle 3)P793 Spindle Range 4 (Range of spindle 4)P794 Spindle Range 5 (range of rotation of the spindle 5)P795 Spindle Range 6 (range spindle 6)P796 Spindle Range 7 (range spindle 7)P797 Spindle Range 8 (Range of spindle speed 8)

512

APPENDIX

P798 Max Graph Size (Maximum Graphics)


P812 Block Rate (frequency blocks)P814 Cad Epsilon (Epsilon Cad)


P817 Spindle Encoder PPU1 (The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 1)P818 Actual Spindle RPM (actual spindle speed)


P840 Pulse Delay (Delay time pulse)P841 Max Spindle RPM (Maximum spindle speed)P842 Tapping Ramp Low Gear (first linear channel for tapping)P843 Spindle Acceleration Ramp (linear acceleration of the spindle)P844 Spindle Deceleration Ramp (linear deceleration of spindle)


P850 ADC Sample (Sample ADC)P851 ADC Scale (Scale ADC)P852 ADC Value (value of the ADC)P853 ADC Trigger (Trigger ADC)P854 Tapping Ramp High Gear (upper linear channel with tapping)P855 Spindle Encoder PPU2 (The number of pulses / rev encoder spindle 2)


P893 Soft Start Delay (Delayed soft start)P894 Clamped Feedrate (fixed flow rate)P895 Cranking Max ipm (Maximum number of inches / rev at startup)P896 Handwheel Encoder PPU (The number of pulses / rev encoder wheel)P897 Cranking Minutes Per Turn (The number of minutes / v at startup)P898 Screen Blank Time (Time to turn off the screen)P899 Digitizing Enable (Activating otsifroki)


P963 Max Corner Deviation (Maximum deviation angle)P964 Unassigned (Not assigned)P965 SpindleScale (Fraction of full

spindle dac) (Scaling the spindle (the spindle part of the full DAC))

P966 Minimum Block Time (seconds, min time when not in fast DNC) (Minimum time unit (seconds, minutes. Time is not in an accelerated mode DNC))

P967 Unassigned (not assigned)P968 Minimum Linear Feed AccDec

(Min. Speed / acceleration line feed)

P969 Minimum Rotary Feed AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration rotating feed)

P970 Minimum Linear Rapid AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration of the linear accelerated movements)

P971 Minimum Rotary Rapid AccDec (Min. speed / acceleration rotating fast movement)

P972 Quill Epsilon (Epsilon sleeve)P973 Front Panel Base Port (main port

of the front panel)P974 Quill Scale PPU (The number of

pulses / inch ruler sleeve)

513

APPENDIX


P1000- Axis 1 Address (X) P1099 (Address 1 axis (X))

P1100- Axis 2 Address (Y)P1199 (Address of axis 2 (Y))

P1200- Axis 3 Address (Z)P1299 (Address the 3 axis (Z))

P1300- Axis 4 Address (A)P1399 (Address of axis 4 (A))

P1400- Axis 5 Address (B)P1499 (Address 5-axis (B))

P1000 Axis address label (X) (address label axis (X))P1001 Pulses per unit (X) (number of pulses per unit (X))P1002 Home position (X) (Starting position (X))P1003 Home direction (X) (initial direction (X))P1004 Positive limit (X) (positive limit (X))P1005 Negative limit (X) (negative limit (X))P1006 Maximum feed (X) (maximum feed rate (X))P1007 Dry run feed (X) (Filing at idle (X))P1008 Rapid velocity (X) (for fast moving speed (X))P1009 Rapid acc / dec (X) (acceleration / acceleration when moving fast (X))P1010 Home sequence (X) (loop back to the original position (X))P1011 Velocity toward home (X) (The speed in the direction of the initial position (X))

P1012 Velocity away from home (X) (The speed in the direction from the initial position (X))P1013 Velocity toward marker (X) (The rate of momentum in the direction of the marker (X))P1014 Encoder multiplier (X) (Multiplier detector (X))P1015 Slow jog velocity (X) (Jog at a slow flow rate (X))P1016 Slow jog acc / dec (X) (Acceleration / deceleration jog feed at a slow speed (X))P1017 Rapid jog velocity (X) (Jog feed at high speed (X))P1018 Rapid jog acc / dec (X) (Acceleration / deceleration jog feed at high speed (X))P1019 In position (X) (The position (X))P1020 G00 unidirectional (X) (G00 Unidirectional (X))P1021 G60 unidirectional (X) (G60 Unidirectional (X))P1022 Backlash (X) (The gap (X))P1023 Excess error (X) (Error error (X))P1024 Rotary = 0 Linear = 1 (X) (Pie = 0, linear = 1 (X))P1025 English Lead (X) (Senior level, the English system (X))P1026 English Trail (X) (Least significant bit, the English system (X))P1027 Metric Lead (X) (Senior level, the metric system (X))P1028 Metric Trail (X) (Least significant bit, the metric system (X))P1029 Jog Key Direction (X) (Direction buttons jog feed (X))

P1030- Unassigned (X) (not assigned)P1040

P1041 Home Marker Switch (X)(Home Switch = 0, Marker = 1)(Switch the starting positionmarker pulse (X)) (switchinitial position = 0, a marker

514

APPENDIX

pulse = 1)P1042 G28 reference point (X) (G28 reference point (X))P1043 G30 reference point 2 (X) (G30 control point 2 (X))P1044 G30 reference point 3 (X) (G30 reference point 3 (X))P1045 G30 reference point 4 (X) (G30 reference point 4 (X))P1046 Max Handwheel Error (X) (Maximum error of the flywheel (X))


P1049 Feed Back (X) (Feedback (X))P1050 Invert Handwheel (X)

(non-zero = invert handwheeldirection) (Check the flywheel(X)) (non-zero value is the inversedirection of the flywheel)P1051 Gain Proportional (X) (Proportional gain (X))P1052 Gain Velocty (X) (Growth rate (X))P1053 Gain Acceleration (X) (growth acceleration (X))P1054 Gain Handwheel (X) (Enhancement of the flywheel (X))P1055 Feed S-Curve Acc \ Dec (X) (S-curve acceleration and deceleration when applying (X))P1056 Rapid S-Curve Acc \ Dec (X) (S-curve acceleration and deceleration at the accelerated movement (X))


P1100- Same as above only for (Y) axisP1199 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (Y))

P1200- Same as above only for (Z) axisP1299 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (Z))

P1300- Same as above only for (A) axisP1399 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (A))

P1400- Same as above only for (B) axisP1499 (Same as the above parameters, only the axis (B))

P1500 Unassigned (not assigned)P1501 Software Version (Software Version)


P1504 Turret Pocket Count (Count of nests in the turret)


P1555 Current Pocket (Time slot)

P1556- Tool Slots for swing arm style tool P1595 changers (Hole tool tool changer with swinging arm)


P1599 Spindle Orient Delay (Delay of spindle orientation)

P1600- Thermo Degrees per VoltP1607 (The number of thermal degrees per volt)

P1608- Thermo Inches per VoltP1615 (The number of thermal inches per volt)

P1616- Thermo Inverse Growth perP1623 Degree (volume growth in the reverse thermal degrees)

515

APPENDIX

P1624- Thermo Position SensorP1631 (The thermal position sensor)

P1632- Thermo Voltage ReferenceP1639 (Thermal voltage reference)

P1640- Thermo Position ReferenceP1647 (The thermal reference point position)


P1700- Security Codes P1799 (Security codes)


P2000- Tool Radii 0 .. 99P2099 (The radii of the tool 0 .. 99)P2100- Tool Lengths 0 .. 99P2199 (Tool length 0 .. 99)

516

Documents

16442761 Centurion 7 CNC Programming Manual 10208.Ru.en